Introduction

In this section, you can find the basic information about the product and also the formatting conventions used in the topics.

In this Section
  • General Description
  • Features
  • Benefits
  • General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)
  • Liabilities and Warnings
  • Revision History
  • System Overview
  • Conventions
  • License Levels

General Description

ToolsTalk 2, the new generation software in controller programming, is ready to take your line management to the next level. The client-server based software solution is geared to provide quick and easy configuration, as well as complete visibility and traceability to your entire line structure. Built on a state-of-the-art user experience and with an extended amount of unique features. Tailored to fit your needs and optimized to get the job done. It allows you to delegate additional features at any time to respective stations, through the embedded simple Functionality Management System (FMS). With 100% customizable user rights, you maintain quality control in complex production systems and increase uptime in production critical operations.

Features

  • Configuration master of PowerFocus6000, PF6 FlexSystem, accessories, multistep, Fieldbus and Soft plc

  • Traces analysis and export

  • Line structure management

  • Active directory and user administration

  • Embedded Functionality Management System

  • Programs library containing full history

  • Offline and Global programming

  • Line software visibility and management

Benefits

  • Reduced training needed due to simple and user friendly interface

  • Reduced defects with global programs and error notifications

  • Efficient new product introduction through quick and easy line configuration

  • Improved productivity due to visibility and traceability on program changes

  • Increased uptime due to live results analysis and line software management

  • Full line control thanks to 100% customizable user access permissions

General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

This product offers the possibility to process personal identifiable information such as system user name, role and IP-address. The purpose of this processing capability could be to enhance quality control through traceability and proper access management.

If you decide to process personal data you need to be aware of and comply with relevant personal data protection rules, including, in the EU the GDPR as well as other applicable laws, directives and regulations. Atlas Copco can in no way be held liable for any use made by you of the product.

Liabilities and Warnings

  • Liability

Liability

Many events in the operating environment may affect the tightening process and shall require a validation of results. In compliance with applicable standards and/or regulations, we hereby require you to check the installed torque and rotational direction after any event that can influence the tightening result. Examples of such events include but are not limited to:

  • initial installation of the tooling system

  • change of part batch, bolt, screw batch, tool, software, configuration or environment

  • change of air- or electrical connections

  • change in line ergonomics, process, quality procedures or practices

  • changing of operator

  • any other change that influences the result of the tightening process

The check should:

  • Ensure that the joint conditions have not changed due to events of influence.

  • Be done after initial installation, maintenance or repair of the equipment.

  • Occur at least once per shift or at another suitable frequency.

Revision History

Document revision

ToolsTalk 2 Software revision

Changes

12.0

2.14

  • Repairable restriction added in Multistep tightening program

  • Result reporters added in Multistep tightening program

  • Result reporter added in Results tab

  • Byte order is selectable in Fieldbus settings

  • Possibility added to load async data automatically in Fieldbus settings

  • Working with Sources tab added

  • Step added in Multistep tightening program: Run Until Digital Input (DI)

  • Step monitors added: Torque Gradient (TG), Yield Angle (YA), and Mean Torque (MT)

  • Step restriction added: Torque Gradient (TG)

  • Gradient trace added for Results

  • Sync Mode task added for Virtual Station

  • New parameters added in Multistep: Torque filter type, Cut-off frequency, Number of Samples and NOK if window is passed

  • Possibility added to turn Torque monitoring on for the entire Multistep tightening program

  • FMS tab re-designed

  • Re-design of the Tightening program tab: New tab for Properties

  • Max ADI size added for Profibus

  • Connection statues of controllers added

  • Controller event notifications added

  • Controller connection status added

  • Updated installation and upgrade instructions - New way of installing using the configurator

  • General software improvements

11.0

2.13.4

  • Export/Import License Distributions added

  • Scheduled Task - Export License Distribution added

  • Sort/Filter columns added

  • .NET 4.8 for software versions ≥2.13

  • Dependency to SQL Server and MSMQ in StationSetup removed

  • Line License - New license level added

  • Program approval added

10.0

2.13

  • Copy/Paste Sync Mode added

  • Copy/Paste Batch Sequence added

  • Import/Export Sync Mode added

  • Batch Sequence added

  • Import/Export Batch Sequence added

  • Compare Multistep Programs added

  • Loosening Sync Mode added

  • Acyclic and Async Data added

  • Socket Selector added

  • Global Tightening Program added

  • SoftPLC signals added

  • User groups in System Administration updated

  • Virtual Station updated

  • General software improvements

9.0

2.12

  • Events updated

  • Fieldbus CC Link added

  • Fieldbus CC Link IE added

  • Fieldbus & SoftPLC updated

  • FMS updated

  • Global settings in Libraries added

  • Libraries updated

  • Open Protocol updated

  • Results updated

  • Tightening Programs updated

  • Configurations updated

  • Tools updated

  • Controller updated

  • Virtual Station updated

  • General software improvements

8.0

2.11

N/A

7.0

2.9

N/A

6.0

2.8

N/A

5.1

2.7.1

N/A

5.0

2.7

N/A

4.0

2.6

N/A

3.0

2.5

N/A

2.0

2.4

N/A

1.0

2.3

First edition

System Overview

A manufacturing system may consist of the functional blocks in the figure:

A

Factory network.

H

Controller factory port: connected to the factory network.

B

ToolsNet server: for storing tightening results and for statistical analysis.

I

Power Focus 6000 controller: used with handheld tools.

C

ToolsTalk 2 server: for configuration and parameter settings for controllers and IXB tools.

J

Handheld battery tool: uses a wireless connection to the controller.

D

Industrial PC (IPC): can be used as client terminal to the ToolsTalk 2 and ToolsNet servers.

K

PF6 Flex controller: used with fixtured tools.

E

Portable computer connected to the factory network: can be used as client terminal to the ToolsTalk 2 and ToolsNet servers.

L

IXB handheld battery tool: uses a wireless connection to the factory network.

F

Service computer: can be connected to the service port of a controller or an IXB tool.

M

The internet cloud.

G

Controller service port: can be used to connect a service computer.

N

Atlas Copco Licensing Portal (ACLP): located at Atlas Copco and provides support to licensed functionality in the Functional Management System (FMS).

In this Section
  • Software Structure
  • Configuration Options

Software Structure

Global icons

Icon

Description

The ToolsTalk 2 system user administration. Selection of language, temperature and torque units.

The Help icon shows the following:

  • ToolsTalk 2 Software version.

  • ToolsTalk 2 License type.

  • ToolsTalk 2 Virtual Station information.

Plant structure

Within the plant structure workspace, individual controllers are selected. The workspace is divided into several icons. The menus under each icon are used for configuration of data and parameter settings.

The icons differ from the controller interface and the web interface but are very similar in the partitioning and the configurations that can be made under each.

Tightening program

When selected, the workspace shows a list of existing tightening programs. Selecting an individual program opens the different menus to configure and set parameters for the selected tightening program.

Batch sequence

When selected, the workspace shows a list of existing batch sequences. Selecting an individual batch sequence opens the different menus to configure and set parameters for the selected batch sequence.

Sync Mode

The icon is only available on controllers with parallel multistep capabilities.

The workspace is used to configure and set parameters for all the synchronized multistep tightening programs.

Configurations

When selected, the workspace shows a list of existing configurations. The menus where to configure and set parameters vary depending on selected type of device:

  • Operator panel.

  • Stacklight.

  • Indicatorbox.

  • Socket selector

  • General Virtual Station.

  • Tool configuration.

  • Scanner.

  • I/O Expander.

  • Internal I/O signals.

Tools

The workspace is used to display which tools are connected to the controller and to see and set tool maintenance intervals and calibration data.

Virtual stations

When selected, the workspace shows a list of existing virtual stations. Selecting an individual virtual station opens the different menus to configure and set parameters for the following:

  • Assign a tool to the virtual station.

  • Assign accessories and select accessory configurations.

  • Assign a task to the virtual station either manually or configure how external signals are used to assign the task.

  • Enable communication protocols to factory management systems.

  • View the fieldbus mapping, if it is used.

Controller information

Controller hardware and software modules included in the controller.

Fieldbus & SoftPLC

The workspace is used to configure the fieldbus, acyclic data and SoftPLC settings.

Settings

  • Controller preferences.

  • Tool alarm settings.

  • Controller network connections.

  • Controller time and date configurations.

Results

Displays the latest tightening results of a selected controller. Results can be shown in a table format or in graphical trace format.

Events

Displays the latest tightening events for a selected controller. Define what events to display in the event configurations in settings .

Libraries

Includes submenus for managing library templates that can be reused among controllers.

Controller library

A library of controller configurations. It is very useful in station setup mode which provides a ToolsTalk 2 functionality on a single laptop computer without the need of a server installation.

Program Templates library

This library contains multistep programs saved as templates to use when creating a new multistep program. Editing a multistep program template will not affect multistep programs based on that template.

Tightening Program library

A library of tightening programs. It is possible to copy an existing tightening program to the library. Editing a tightening program in the library will affect all controllers that subscribe to the tightening program.

Configurations library

A library of configurations for virtual stations, devices and accessories. It is possible to copy an existing configuration to the library. Editing a library configuration will affect all controllers that subscribe to the configuration.

Fieldbus library

A library of fieldbus configurations. It is possible to copy an existing fieldbus configuration to the library. Editing a fieldbus configuration will affect all controllers that subscribe to the fieldbus configuration.

Settings library

A library for Event configurations that can be distributed to other controllers. The events can be created here or in settings Events and added to the library. Editing an Event configuration will affect all controllers that subscribe to the configuration.

System administration

Includes functions for software update, import/export of configuration parameters, task scheduling and the functionality management system.

Controller software and data management

Manages controller software through the ToolsTalk 2 server.

Scheduled export and import

Schedules repetitive tasks that affect one or many controllers and that are executed by the ToolsTalk 2 server.

Compare configuration

Select configuration files to compare.

User groups

Manages different user groups and the user group rights to folders, controllers and configurations.

Functionality Management System (FMS)

Manages licensed controller functionality through the ToolsTalk 2 server.

Program Approval

Manages approvals for tightening and loosening programs.

Push

The push indicator is shown when configurations have been made to any controller in ToolsTalk 2.

Configurations and parameter changes are copied to the controller via the Push function.

The controller icons differ from the controller GUI and the web GUI but are very similar in the partitioning and the configurations that can be made under each icon.

Configuration Options

The configuration and setting up of a controller can be done in the following ways:

  • Controller GUI: This is applicable to Power Focus 6000 controllers which have a touchscreen. A controller can be configured regardless whether it is connected to the network or not.

  • Web GUI: A PC can be directly connected to the controller service port or if the controller is connected to the network and its IP address is known, it can be accessed from a computer anywhere on the network. One controller at a time can be accessed. For a Power Focus 6000, the web-GUI has the same icons as the controller GUI. For a FlexController, the icons are slightly different. All controllers might have icons that could be unique to them.

  • ToolsTalk 2 GUI: If the controller is connected to a ToolsTalk 2 server, a ToolsTalk 2 client (PC) can access all connected controllers through the ToolsTalk 2 GUI. Both Power Focus 6000 controllers and FlexControllers can be accessed. The GUI uses a full PC screen and has different partitioning and a different icon, but provides the same functionality.

  • ToolsTalk 2 GUI in Station Setup mode: Provides a ToolsTalk 2 interface on a PC without a server installation. The PC is connected to the controller service port and provides access to one controller at a time.

Conventions

To enhance user understanding, certain formatting conventions are used throughout this document. The formatting conventions used are listed below.

User Guide Conventions

Element

Notation

Description

Output

General emphasis

In the Program workspace.

To make certain text elements stand out, or to highlight.

Text in Bold

Graphical User Interface (GUI) items

Select the Function button.

Any reference to items found on screen in the GUI (for example, command buttons, icon names and field names).

Text in Bold

Graphical User Interface (GUI) Path >

Generally, on the top of the GUI.

Navigation aid which keeps track of the location in the GUI.

For example: Controller > Program > Edit

User input

Enter a Description for the program.

Any text input by the user.

Text in Bold

File names

Enter a File Name for the export.

Files either exported from, or imported into the system.

Text in Bold Italic

Variable and parameter names

Enter a Name for the export.

Variable and parameter names (not values).

Text in Italic

Variable and parameter values

Enter a VALUE for the export.

Variable and parameter values.

Text in BOLD CAPS

System output

Client.Domain.Models.ExportImportConfiguration

Any text output by the system.

Text in Monospace

External links

https://servaid.atlascopco.com

www.atlascopco.com

http://webbox.atlascopco.com/webbox/dimdrw

Links to external sites that have information connected to the document or subject content. These could include:

  • Technical Product Data

  • Dimensional Drawings

  • Accessories

  • Product Specific Information

Selectable text to external sites

Internal documentation links

  • Relevant Information - links to information which is directly related to the current topic and needs to be considered for certain configurations that are made.

  • In this Section - links to all the topics within the section, which can be useful when understanding a feature, or configuration.

If available, these links will be presented below the text.

Selectable text to internal content

License Levels

Line Licenser, Line Configurator and Line Manager

These three versions are all client-server based installations of ToolsTalk 2, but with different feature sets. Line Licenser is the smallest package in which ToolsTalk 2 enters on a clean installation, when neither of the other licenses have been installed. When ToolsTalk 2 has the status Line Licenser, all Line Manager and Line Configurator functionality will be visible, but a warning message will appear every time the user tries to use the included features.

ToolsTalk 2 will only remove, unlink, or delete data created in Line Manager, if a downgrade is initiated. This could happen for example when downgrading to a Line Configurator license, or if the trial period of the Line Manager license has expired.

Station Setup

This is a version of ToolsTalk 2 where all the components are located locally on the computer, giving a one-to-one connection. Station Setup runs without an SQL server database connection and has a built-in limit that enables only one connected controller at a time. Note, a valid license is required to use Station Setup, otherwise a warning message will be displayed.

An unlicensed Station Setup can have one virtual station and this will be validated against the License Server.

License Functionality

Symbol

Description

X

Full functionality.

X¹

Connect, disconnect, and restart enabled.

X²

Push is enabled if changes are made.

X³

Custom sections, restart, and right-click functionality enabled.

X⁴

Only Database maintenance enabled.

X⁵

Read access only, program export enabled.

License Functionality Matrix

Line Licenser

Line Configurator

Station Setup Licensed

Line Manager

Plant Structure

Right-click - Add new controller

X

X

X

X

Right-click functionality

X¹

X

X

X

History on program configuration

X

Tightening Program

X⁵

X

X

X

Batch Sequence

X⁵

X

X

X

Sources

X⁵

X

X

X

Configurations

X⁵

X

X

X

Tools

X⁵

X

X

X

Virtual Stations

X⁵

X

X

X

Controller

X⁵

X

X

X

Settings

X⁵

X

X

X

Fieldbus

X²

X

X

X

SoftPLC

X

X

X

Results

X

X

X

Events

X

X

X

X

Library

Tightening Program

X

Configurations

X

Fieldbus

X

Settings

X

Program Templates

X

Controller Configuration

X

X

X

System Administration

Controller Software & Data Management

X³

X³

X

Scheduled Task

X⁴

X⁴

X⁴

X

Functionality Management System (FMS)

X

X

X

X

User Groups

X

Program Approval

X

Installation and Upgrade

In this section, you can find information to help with the initial installation of the product, or upgrading from one version to another.

In this Section
  • Installation Restrictions
  • Installation Sequence
  • Software Installation
  • Uninstalling the Software
  • Installation Validation
  • Upgrading ToolsTalk 2
  • Troubleshooting

Installation Restrictions

  • Compatibility Matrix
  • Before Installing or Upgrading
  • Database Requirements
  • Computer Requirements
  • License Requirements

Compatibility Matrix

All versions of ToolsTalk 2 software are backwards compatible unless stated otherwise

ToolsTalk2

PF6 FlexSystem

PF6000

PF6000 StepSync

Atlas Copco Data Communication Version

IXB

PF8

PF8 StepSync

2.3

N/A

2.0, 2.1, 2.1.1, 2.3

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.4

N/A

2.4

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.5

1.2

2.4

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.6

1.2

2.5

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.7

1.3

2.6

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.7.1

1.3.1

2.6

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.8

1.3.1

2.7

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.9

2.0

2.7

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.11

2.1

2.8

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.12

3.0

3.0

3.0

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.13

3.1

3.1.1

3.1.1

1.7

N/A

N/A

N/A

2.14

3.3

3.3

3.3

1.9

3.3

N/A

N/A

ToolsTalk 2 can run with higher versions of Atlas Copco Data Communication. The Atlas Copco Data Communication version mentioned in the matrix is to be considered as the lowest version the ToolsTalk 2 software is compatible with.

Before Installing or Upgrading

It is not recommended to have both a Station Setup and a Client-Server installation on the same computer. Make sure to uninstall and clear the computer from the components of the unwanted installation.

Server Installation

The Microsoft SQL database, the ToolsTalk 2 server application and the ToolsTalk 2 client application, can all be installed on the same computer.

Before starting the installation, make sure the following is available:

  • Administrator rights to the computer upon which the server application is to be installed.

  • Administrator rights to the computer upon which the client application is to be installed.

  • Computers and programs according to the listed prerequisites.

  • A completed installation of the 64-bit Microsoft SQL database according to the listed prerequisites.

  • An executable file for the server application.

  • An executable file for the client application.

  • Atlas Copco Data Communication (ACDC) is installed and running and is compatible with the current version of the ToolsTalk 2 (only for versions of ToolsTalk 2 from 2.13 onwards). Please see the Atlas Copco Data Communication Installation Manual.

Station Setup

Before starting the installation, make sure the following is available:

  • Administrator rights to the computer upon which the application is to be installed.

  • Computers and programs according to the listed prerequisites.

  • An executable file for the Station Setup application.

Relevant Information
  • Uninstalling the Software

Database Requirements

All controller data and configurations are stored in the database catalog. The database is a standard 64-bit Microsoft SQL database.

The installation of a Microsoft SQL database is not described in this document. It is recommended to follow a standard installation.

  • The Microsoft SQL database may be located on the same server or the same network as the ToolsTalk 2 application.

  • If the database is located elsewhere, firewall needs to be properly configured between the database and the ToolsTalk 2 application server.

  • The IP address of the Atlas Copco Data Communication server must be known and entered into every controller that is connected to ToolsTalk 2

  • The server address that hosts the ToolsTalk 2 application must be known by the client PC if a remote connection is being used.

Mandatory when installing the Microsoft SQL database

  • 64-bit Microsoft SQL.

  • Select both Microsoft SQL server authentication and windows authentication.

Recommended when installing the Microsoft SQL database

  • Include the management studio in the installation.

  • Enable the default instances.

Computer Requirements

The ToolsTalk 2 ecosystem requires the following functions to be in place:

64-bit is required for client, server, Station Setup and ClickOnce.

Computer requirements

Area

Category

Minimum Requirement

ToolsTalk 2 Release Version

Comments

Server software requirements

Database

SQL Server 2014 R2, or later version

SQL express 2014 R2, or later version (Compatible but not recommended)

The database can be located locally on the same machine, or installed on a remote database server.

Java

Version 8 or later

≥2.3

64-bit version

.NET Framework

Version 4.6

2.3 - 2.4

Version 4.6.2

2.5 - 2.12

Version 4.8

2.13 - current version

Server hardware requirements

Processor

Dual Core 2.70 GHz Intel Xenon or higher

This specification is only meant to give an indication of the performance needed.

Memory (RAM)

4 GB

This specification is only meant to give an indication of the performance needed.

Disk space

50 GB

Note that the database will grow over time. Configurations and configuration changes are stored to the database. More controllers will also add more info to the database.

Disk speed

5400 rpm or higher

PC client requirements

Operating system

Windows 10

Windows 7

2.14

2.3 - 2.13

ToolsTalk 2 version 2.14 does not support Windows 7!

.NET Framework

Version 4.6

2.3 - 2.4

Version 4.6.2

≥2.5 - 2.12

Version 4.8

2.13 - current version

User rights

Database access

System administrator access or similar

Users performing the installation, must also have admin rights to create users in the database.

Windows access

Administrator account

Needed in order to install the application and its dependencies.

License Requirements

An Atlas Copco license server is needed when the Functional Management System (FMS) is being used for licensed Feature items.

The license server is included in the server installation file. For correct installation the JAVA_HOME system variable must have a correct path and point at the 64-bit Java installation.

The FMS can only be used in a client-server installation and is not applicable in a Station Setup installation.

Installation Sequence

The installation sequence for any of the ToolsTalk 2 applications should be as follows:

  1. Make sure all the computer and database requirements are met before installation.

  2. Install the Microsoft SQL server.

    Refer to https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/sql/database-engine/install-windows/install-sql-server?view=sql-server-ver15 for the correct installation procedures.

  3. Install Atlas Copco Data Communication if applicable.

    Refer to the Atlas Copco Data Communication Installation guide for further information.

  4. Install the required ToolsTalk 2 application.

  5. Deploy the ToolsTalk 2 application if installing the ToolsTalk 2 client application or run the application from the start menu and create shortcuts if required.

  6. License the ToolsTalk 2 application so you get the right features you subscribed to.

Relevant Information
  • Before Installing or Upgrading
  • Computer Requirements
  • Database Requirements

Software Installation

  • ToolsTalk2 Configuration Window
  • Default Installation Locations
  • Installing the ToolsTalk Server Application
  • Installing the Client Application
  • Installing the Client by Using ClickOnce
  • Installing the Station Setup Application
    • Station Setup Connection
  • File Comparison
  • SoftPLC Configurator Installation

ToolsTalk2 Configuration Window

With the ToolsTalk 2 configuration, it is possible to finish the installation of the ToolsTalk 2 software first and then configure the different installation parameters. The ToolsTalk 2 configuration for each installation type is available as a shortcut in the start menu after the installation and so it can be accessed anytime to make changes to the installation parameters.

Default Installation Locations

Default Folder Locations

Installation

Default Location

Remarks

ToolsTalk 2 Server

C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk Server\

Can be changed to a desired location by the user

ToolsTalk 2 ClickOnce

C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk ClickOnce\

Can be changed to a desired location by the user

ToolsTalk 2 Client

C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk Client\

Can be changed to a desired location by the user

ToolsTalk 2 StationSetup

C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk StationSetup\

Can be changed to a desired location by the user

AtlasCopco FMS

C:\ProgramData\AtlasCopcoFMS\

The default path should not be changed!

Flexera Logs

C:\Windows\ServiceProfiles\NetworkService\Flexnetls\acopco\logs

The default path should not be changed!

Installing the ToolsTalk Server Application

Before you begin with the ToolsTalk 2 server installation, make sure all the requirements are met as described in section Before Installing or Upgrading.

Before installing the Server Application, make sure that the Atlas Copco Data Communication (ACDC) installed and running is compatible with the current version of the ToolsTalk 2 (only for versions of ToolsTalk 2 from 2.13 onwards). Please see the Atlas Copco Data Communication Installation Manual.

  1. Place the executable file ToolsTalkServer<xxx>.exe in a desired folder on your computer. The <xxx> represents the version of the file.

  2. Double-click on the executable file.

  3. Select Yes to Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?

  4. Select Next in the Atlas Copco Tools Talk Server - InstallShield Wizard window to continue.

  5. Read and then select I accept the terms in the license agreement. Select Next to continue.

    Select Print if you would like to print the license agreement.

  6. Select Change... to install the application in a different location. The default location is C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk Server\

    Select Next to continue.

  7. Select Install to finish the installation.

  8. Select Finish to complete the installation and the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window opens up or the User Access Control dialog from Windows may be prompted.

  9. If Windows prompts the User Access Control dialog requesting permission, Select Yes to Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?

    When the installation is completed, the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window opens up.

    If you select No, then the ToolsTalk2 Configuration window does not open automatically and you need to access it from the Windows Start Menu. If the ToolsTalk 2 configurator is opened from the Windows Start menu, select Force Initialize at the bottom of the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window to complete the installation procedure.

    If an error occurs during installation, a step is unclear, or a parameter name or value is unclear, look for more information in the Troubleshooting section.

  10. Enter the parameters in the Server Settings.

    Selecting Save will save the Server Settings and will try to restart the service.

    if you select Save before entering and completing the Database Installation Settings, an error Changes accepted, but failed to control dependent Windows service appears.

  11. Go to Database Installation Settings and enter the User name and Password and select Test Connection to test the database connection.

    The User name and Password should be the same as used for the Microsoft SQL Server installation.

  12. Select Install Database.

    Upon successful installation of the database, the message Database creation succeed is displayed.

  13. Select Save and Close.

    If you receive a notification about Dependent service not started, restart the FNLS-acopco service and restart the ToolsTalk 2 configuration again. When both the services are up and running, continue with the installation.

Server Settings Parameters

Database Settings

Parameters

Description

SQL Server Address

IP or Hostname of the SQL Server

The Microsoft Windows Defender Firewall will prevent connections through the network to SQL Server. Therefore, it is required to configure SQL Server to accept connections by using TCP/IP. This setting can be modified in section SQL Server Configuration Manager in Windows Computer Management.

Computer Management -> SQL Server Configuration Manager -> SQL Server Network Configuration -> Protocols for MSSQLSERVER -> TCP/IP -> Enabled

Database Name

The Database/Catalog used by ToolsTalk 2. The database will be created during database installation if not already existing.

Server Settings

Parameters

Description

Authentication Mode

The authentication mode used to verify user authority. Select Windows (Active directory) or None.

Active Directory Group

Only visible if the Authentication Mode selected is Windows. Specifies what active directory group a user must be member of. Example: DOMAIN\GROUP

Server Address

IP or Hostname of the ToolsTalk 2 Server.

Web Application Port

Communication port for ToolsTalk 2.

Controller Port

Port 9016 is used as the default controller port. If using the port 9016, make sure this port is open and you can connect to it, else the application will not work.

Port 80 is used when the function Connect/disconnect/add controller is used from ToolsTalk 2 to interact with a controller.

Make sure that the controller port you enter is open and is possible to connect to!

Backup

Parameters

Description

Controller Backup Folder

Specifies a folder where the backup for the controllers will be located.

ACDC Communication Settings

Parameters

Description

Server Address

IP or Hostname of the Atlas Copco Data Communication server

Web API Port

Port for Web API

SignalR Port

Port for SignalR

Database Installation Settings

Database Credentials

Parameters

Description

User name

The username of a database user with the credentials to create databases/catalogs. Usually the system administrator credential.

Password

Enter the password. Usually the system administrator credential

Installation

Parameters

Description

Manual Script

Specifies whether or not the database has been manually created.

If this box is checked, ToolsTalk 2 expects that you have already created the SQL catalogue and the default user manually. The entered User Name and Password will be the default credentials that connects to the SQL server and are stored in clear text in the configuration files.

This setting should be only used if you have created the database catalogue and user yourself.

The ToolsTalk 2 application is available in the start menu.

Relevant Information
  • Before Installing or Upgrading
  • Troubleshooting

Installing the Client Application

Before you begin with the ToolsTalk 2 client installation, make sure all the requirements are met as described in section Before Installing or Upgrading.

  1. Place the executable file ToolsTalkClientxxx>.exe in a desired folder on your computer. The <xxx> represents the version of the file.

  2. Double-click on the executable file.

  3. Select Yes to Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?

  4. Select Yes in the Atlas Copco Tools Talk Server - InstallShield Wizard window to continue.

  5. Read and then select I accept the terms in the license agreement. Select Next to continue.

    Select Print if you would like to print the license agreement.

  6. Select Change... to install the application in a different location. The default location is C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk Client\

    Select Next to continue.

  7. Select Install to finish the installation.

  8. Select Finish to complete the installation.

    If an error occurs during installation, a step is unclear, or a parameter name or value is unclear, look for more information in the Troubleshooting section.

    When the installation is completed, the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window opens up.

  9. Enter the parameters in the Client Settings and select Save.

    Server Settings

    Parameters

    Description

    Authentication Mode

    The authentication mode used to verify user authority. Select Windows (Active directory) or None.

    Server Address

    IP or Hostname of the ToolsTalk 2 Server.

    Web Application Port

    Communication port for ToolsTalk 2.

    Convert Service URL to IP Address

    On or Off. When On is selected, if a hostname is used in the address, it is converted to an IP address.

The ToolsTalk 2 application is installed and a shortcut available on the desktop.

Installing the Client by Using ClickOnce

  1. Place the executable file ToolsTalkServerClickOnce<xxx>.exe in a desired folder on your computer. The <xxx> represents the version of the file.

  2. Double-click on the executable file.

  3. Select Yes to Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?

  4. Select Next in the Atlas Copco Tools Talk Server ClickOnce - InstallShield Wizard window to continue.

  5. Read and then select I accept the terms in the license agreement. Select Next to continue.

    Select Print if you would like to print the license agreement.

  6. Select Change... to install the application in a different location. The default location is C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk ClickOnce\

    Select Next to continue.

  7. Select Install to finish the installation.

  8. Select Finish to complete the installation and the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window opens up or the User Access Control dialog from Windows may be prompted.

  9. If Windows prompts the User Access Control dialog requesting permission, Select Yes to Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?

    When the installation is completed, the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window opens up.

    If you select No, then the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window does not open automatically and you need to access it from the Windows Start Menu. If the ToolsTalk 2 configurator is opened from the Windows Start menu, select Force Initialize at the bottom of the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window to complete the installation procedure.

    If an error occurs during installation, a step is unclear, or a parameter name or value is unclear, look for more information in the Troubleshooting section.

  10. Enter the parameters in the Server Settings.

    Selecting Save will save the Server Settings and will try to restart the service.

    if you select Save before entering and completing the Database Installation Settings, an error Changes accepted, but failed to control dependent Windows service appears.

  11. Go to Database Installation Settings and enter the User name and Password and select Test Connection to test the database connection.

    The User name and Password should be the same as used for the Microsoft SQL Server installation.

  12. Select Install Database.

    Upon successful installation of the database, the message Database creation succeed is displayed.

  13. Select Save and Close.

    If you receive a notification about Dependent service not started, restart the FNLS-acopco service and restart theToolsTalk 2 configuration again. When both the services are up and running, continue with the installation.

Server Settings Parameters

Database Settings

Parameters

Description

SQL Server Address

IP or Hostname of the SQL Server

The Microsoft Windows Defender Firewall will prevent connections through the network to SQL Server. Therefore, it is required to configure SQL Server to accept connections by using TCP/IP. This setting can be modified in section SQL Server Configuration Manager in Windows Computer Management.

Computer Management -> SQL Server Configuration Manager -> SQL Server Network Configuration -> Protocols for MSSQLSERVER -> TCP/IP -> Enabled

Database Name

The Database/Catalog used by ToolsTalk 2. The database will be created during database installation if not already existing.

Server Settings

Parameters

Description

Authentication Mode

The authentication mode used to verify user authority. Select Windows (Active directory) or None.

Active Directory Group

Only visible if the Authentication Mode selected is Windows. Specifies what active directory group a user must be member of. Example: DOMAIN\GROUP

Server Address

IP or Hostname of the ToolsTalk 2 Server.

Web Application Port

Communication port for ToolsTalk 2.

Controller Port

Port 9016 is used as the default controller port. If using the port 9016, make sure this port is open and you can connect to it, else the application will not work.

Port 80 is used when the function Connect/disconnect/add controller is used from ToolsTalk 2 to interact with a controller.

Convert Service URL to IP Address

On or Off. When On is selected, if a hostname is used in the address, it is converted to an IP address.

Make sure that the controller port you enter is open and is possible to connect to!

Backup

Parameters

Description

Controller Backup Folder

Specifies a folder where the backup for the controllers will be located.

The Active Directory Group and Controller Backup Folder are empty by default.

ACDC Communication Settings

Parameters

Description

Server Address

IP or Hostname of the Atlas Copco Data Communication server

Web API Port

Port for Web API

SignaIR Port

Port for SignaIR

Database Installation Settings

Database Credentials

Parameters

Description

User name

The username of a database user with the credentials to create databases/catalogs. Usually the system administrator credential.

Password

Enter the password. Usually the system administrator credential

Installation

Parameters

Description

Manual Script

Specifies whether or not the database has been manually created.

If this box is checked, ToolsTalk 2 expects that you have already created the SQL catalogue and the default user manually. The entered User Name and Password will be the default credentials that connects to the SQL server and are stored in clear text in the configuration files.

This setting should be only used if you have created the database catalogue and user yourself.

Deploying the Client On a Remote Machine

  1. Browse to the server, via web browser, by using the link:

    http://<FULL COMPUTER NAME>:<PORT NUMBER>/deploym

    Replace <FULL COMPUTER NAME> and <PORT NUMBER>.

    Make sure that the <FULL COMPUTER NAME> is exactly the same as on which the server and database are located. If Full Computer Name [TOOLSE277256.ATLASCOPCO.COM] or Computer Name [TOOLSE277256] is set, then a DNS server must exist and be set in the controller, otherwise it is not possible to add controllers to the ToolsTalk 2 environment.

  2. Save the executable file ToolsTalk.Client.WPF.Desktop.application on your computer.

  3. Double-click on the executable file, or select Open if prompted.

  4. ToolsTalk 2 client opens with the latest version installed.

The ToolsTalk 2 client will always open with the latest server version by using ClickOnce.

Deploying the Client on Local Machine

  • If ClickOnce was installed in the default folder, navigate to “C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk ClickOnce\ClientDeploy” and double click on ToolsTalk.Client.WPF.Desktop Application manifest file to deploy the client.

Once the installation is completed, the ToolsTalk 2 icon is created on the desktop.

Installing the Station Setup Application

The condensed Station Setup installation has full controller configuration functionality, but also some limitations:

  • The entire installation has a smaller footprint and is installed on a portable computer.

  • Only one physical controller can be managed at a time.

  • The computer is connected to the service port of the controller to avoid interruption of normal activity.

Applications

The typical application for this mode of operation can be the following:

  • A controller can be accessed using ToolsTalk 2 without connecting to the customer network but instead using the service port of the controller.

  • Offline configuration of controllers using the controller library features. The configuration file can later be transferred to a real controller for verification.

  • An easy export of a controller configuration that is very helpful in debugging tasks.

Before you begin with the ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup installation, make sure all the requirements are met as described in section Before installing or Upgrading.

  1. Place the executable file ToolsTalkStationSetup<xxx>.exe in a desired folder on your computer. The <xxx> represents the version of the file.

  2. Double-click on the executable file.

  3. Select Yes to Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?

  4. Select Next in the Atlas Copco Tools Talk Server - InstallShield Wizard window to continue.

  5. Read and then select I accept the terms in the license agreement. Select Next to continue.

    Select Print if you would like to print the license agreement.

  6. Select Change... to install the application in a different location. The default location is C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk StationSetup\

    Select Next to continue.

  7. Select Install to finish the installation.

  8. Select Finish to complete the installation.

    If an error occurs during installation, a step is unclear, or a parameter name or value is unclear, look for more information in the Troubleshooting section.

    When the installation is completed, the ToolsTalk 2 Configuration window opens up.

  9. Enter the parameters in the Server Settings tab and select Save.

Server Settings

Parameters

Description

ToolsTalk User Name

Username of the user that is local to the application.

Server Address

IP or Hostname of the ToolsTalk 2 Server.

Web Application Port

Communication port for ToolsTalk 2.

Advanced Settings

Parameters

Description

Web API

Web API port

SignalR

SignalR port

Controller Port

Port 9016 is used as the default controller port. If using the port 9016, make sure this port is open and you can connect to it, else the application will not work.

Port 80 is used when the function Connect/disconnect/add controller is used from ToolsTalk 2 to interact with a controller.

Make sure that the controller port you enter is open and is possible to connect to!

The ToolsTalk 2 application is available in the start menu.

Relevant Information
  • Before Installing or Upgrading
In this Section
  • Station Setup Connection

Station Setup Connection

A computer with a Station Setup of ToolsTalk 2 can be connected to a controller through the network or directly to the service port.

Network Connection

The ToolsTalk 2 server connection address in the controller must be directed to this computer. This is done via the controller GUI or the controller web GUI.

Only one controller at a time can be connected to a computer with a ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup. If an online controller is connected to the ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup computer, subsequent connection attempts from other controllers will be ignored.

Controller Service Port Connection

The controller service port can be used to connect a controller to ToolsTalk 2 when the PC with ToolsTalk 2 is not allowed to be connected to the network. For example, an Atlas Copco - or external - service technician visits a factory and the external computer is not allowed to be connected to the factory network.

If a computer is connected to the service port of the controller, the controller acts as a DHCP server and provides an IP address to the computer. This address must be entered in the controller server connection address field for the ToolsTalk 2 connection.

File Comparison

The configurator stores a copy of all configuration settings as an .xml file called Storage. The file helps in identifying manual changes in the product configuration .xml files. If the product configuration .xml files have been modified, then when you start the configurator, the File Comparison window opens, where you can choose between options Use Storage Files or Use Configuration Files.

SoftPLC Configurator Installation

To be able to use the SoftPLC functionality in a controller, the SoftPLC Configurator must be installed on the computer where a ToolsTalk 2 Client is installed.

  1. Insert a USB device or similar, containing the MultiProg551_Atlas_Installation.

  2. Double-click on Installation.bat in MultiProg551_Atlas_Installation, the installation starts.

  3. Open the ToolsTalk client when the installation is completed (no restart required).

  4. In the ToolsTalk 2 client, go to the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab. Select the SoftPLC configuration section and in the General SoftPLC Settings, set SoftPLC to On.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Uninstalling the Software

Each one of the modules (Client, Server, Station Setup) can be uninstalled as follows:

  • Using the windows control panel / Programs and features to select and uninstall the desired programs and modules.

For some modules it may be necessary to restart the computer for the changes to take effect.

Installation Validation

  • Validating Windows System Services
  • Validating the Client-Server Installation
  • Validating the Station Setup Installation
  • Validating the License Service

Validating Windows System Services

To verify that background programs and services have started correctly, perform the following check:

  1. Select the Windows Search button.

  2. Type services in the Search windows entry box.

  3. Scroll down and verify that the Atlas Copco Industrial Technique Host for ToolsTalk has started.

    This indicates that the ToolsTalk 2 server application is running.

  4. Scroll down and verify that the FlexNet License server - acopco has started.

    This indicates that the license server application for the functional management system is running.

Validating the Client-Server Installation

After successful installation of the client-server version of the ToolsTalk 2 application, a controller is needed for a complete system test.

  • The server computer must be connected to the network.

  • The client computer must be connected to the network.

  • The controller must be connected to the network and configured to communicate with the server computer.

  • Check that Atlas Copco Data Communication service is started.

The server and client may be installed on the same computer.

  • For configuration and starting the controller please refer to the controller user guide.

  • For configuration, starting and navigating in the ToolsTalk 2 GUI, please refer to the ToolsTalk 2 user guide.

If the ToolsTalk 2 client is installed, the application can be started in the following way:

  • Select the Windows Start menu and locate the ToolsTalk 2 folder.

  • Select the ToolsTalk 2 icon to launch the application.

Relevant Information
  • Getting started

Validating the Station Setup Installation

If the ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup is installed, the application can be started in the following way:

  • Select the Windows Start menu and locate the ToolsTalk 2 folder.

  • Select the ToolsTalk 2 icon to launch the application.

The ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup application cannot execute if a ToolsTalk 2 client application or a ToolsTalk 2 server application is installed. They can easily be removed by executing their respective installation programs and choose the Remove option in the Program maintenance window.

The Getting started section in the ToolsTalk 2 user guide describes the windows and the window navigation.

The GUI for a ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup application is slightly different if there is no controller connected. Please refer to the information under the library icon and the controller library icon in the configuration manual.

Validating the License Service

This validation process is only applicable for Client, Server and ClickOnce application installations and is not valid for a Station Setup installation.

When the ToolsTalk 2 installation is complete, you will need to check that the license service is ready upon startup.

  1. Open a web browser, browse to the following two pages and complete the steps:

    • http://”ip-address:port"/api/1.0/health - This page should have the “connectionCheck” : “success”, if not you will need to restart the Flexera service. In some cases more than one restart may be required.

    • http://”ip-address:port"/api/1.0/hostids - If this page is empty you will need to restart the Flexera service. In some cases more than one restart may be required.

This validation process is not applicable for a Station Setup installation

Upgrading ToolsTalk 2

Please make sure that the ToolsTalk2 server is running before starting the upgrade.

When upgrading ToolsTalk 2 from 2.12 or earlier versions and Atlas Copco Data Communication (ACDC) is already installed, make sure that the controller port is pointing to the same port that ACDC was installed on. If you are installing ACDC for the first time and want to use another port than your current controller port in your ToolsTalk 2 version, then please change the controller port as described in the following procedure.

In the configuration files, controller port is named as HubPort.

  • In ToolsTalk.Server.SelfHostService.exe.config(ClickOnce/Client/Server) or ToolsTalk.Standalone.exe.config(Station Setup), change the controller port to the correct port number <add key="HubPort" value="XXXX" />

     

Troubleshooting

  • Troubleshooting During Installation

Troubleshooting During Installation

Restart the ToolsTalk Industrial Technique Host service after upgrading ToolsTalk 2.

Error

Solution

Error code 1920

Failed to start. Verify you have correct permission

Database authentication error. For the SQL database mixed mode authentication must be configured.

Use the SQL management studio to correct the authentication. A restart of the computer is most likely needed before another installation attempt can be made.

The InstallShield Wizard detects if installations have already been made, when using an installation file. If older installations are present on the computer, they may not be detected.

It is therefore recommended to remove old instances of the program and of the database catalog before starting a new installation.

Configuration

In this section, you can find detailed information about how to create, modify, and verify product settings.

In this Section
  • Getting started
  • Working with the Hardware Configuration Tab
  • Working with the Tightening Program Tab
  • Working with the Sync Mode Tab
  • Working with the Batch Sequence Tab
  • Working with the Sources Tab
  • Working with the Configurations Tab
  • Working with the Tools Tab
  • Working with the Virtual Station Tab
  • Working with the Controller Information Tab
  • Working with the Settings Tab
  • Working with Fieldbus, SoftPLC and Acyclic Data Tab
  • Working with the Libraries Tab
  • Working with the System Administration Tab
  • Working with Push Configuration Changes

Getting started

  • Starting
  • User Interface Start View
  • Controllers
    • Adding Controllers
    • Managing the Controller List
  • Saving Changes in Parameters and Configurations
  • Managing the Workspace Windows
  • User Interface - Workspace With Controller Overview

Starting

If the ToolsTalk 2 client is installed, the application can be started:

  1. Select the Windows Start menu, open All programs and scroll down to ToolsTalk 2.

  2. Open the folder and select ToolsTalk 2 to launch the application.

User Interface Start View

After a successful start of ToolsTalk 2 this view below is displayed, containing the icons described above:

Navigation overview

A

Left-side menu bar

C

System menu bar

B

Plant structure workspace

D

Controller workspace

The controller workspace area displays different content, depending on the selected icon or menu.

At start the default icon selection is the Plant structure icon . This is indicated by changing the icon color to light blue. The workspace is divided into two parts:

  • The structure workspace is used to organize controllers and to select an individual controller.

  • The controller workspace shows all the controller icons and is used to view and set all parameters and configurations for one selected controller.

Content of the left menu bar

Left menu bar

Function

Plant structure

ThePlant structure icon . A single controller is selected for viewing or editing.

System administration

The System administration icon includes software updates and configuration management.

Libraries

Under the Libraries icon several global library functions resides that are used to distribute global configurations and parameters to many controllers.

Content of the system menu bar

System menu bar

Function

Push changes

Push icon . Saved configuration changes or parameter updates are pushed to a controller.

User settings

User settings icon . Selection of language, torque units and temperature units.

Help

The Help icon shows the ToolsTalk 2 software version. Will in the future include help functions.

The plant structure view is empty if no controllers are connected to ToolsTalk 2, or if user rights do not allow access to folders or controllers.

Controllers

Controller Types

Apart from the controllers that are supported and configurable using ToolsTalk 2, there is the capability to show other controller types in the Controller List and some limited information about these. The controllers which aren't configurable can launch the relevant software through ToolsTalk 2, where they can be further configured.

The different controller types are represented with an icon in the All Controllers list.

Controller Icon

Controller Type

Compatible Software

Power Focus 6000

ToolsTalk 2

PF6 Flex System

ToolsTalk 2

Power Focus 6000 StepSync

ToolsTalk 2

Power Focus 4000

ToolsTalkPF

Power Macs 4000

ToolsTalkPM

Unsupported Controller - A Controller with a higher version and not compatible with the current ToolsTalk 2 release

N/A

IXB

ToolsTalk 2

Controller Information

The following is an example of the information that a Power Focus 4000, or a Power Macs 4000 controller can display. An Unsupported Controller will not display this information..

  • Application Boot Software Version

  • Controller Serial Number

  • Protocol Version

  • RBU Serial Number

  • RBU Type

  • Software version

Tool Information

The information below is displayed under Tools in ToolsTalk 2. What will be shown here is configured in the respective controller software.

  • Identifier

  • Serial Number

  • Model Type

  • Service Date

  • Calibration Date

  • Tightening Count

  • Tool Type

  • Tightenings Since Service

  • Application Code Version

  • Boot Code Version

To receive tool information, the controllers will need to be connected to ACDC. For further information please see the ToolsTalk 2 documentation.

In this Section
  • Adding Controllers
  • Managing the Controller List

Adding Controllers

Controllers connected to ToolsTalk 2 may be visible in the Plant structure .

The plant structure view is empty if no controllers are connected to ToolsTalk 2, or if user rights do not allow access to folders or controllers.

  1. Select Plant structure and then right-click anywhere in the upper area of the controller list. Alternatively, select System administration, then in the Controller software & data management tab right-click in the left-side menu workspace area. Choose Add new controller. The Connect controller dialog window opens.

  2. Enter the IP address, or the DNS name of the controller. The IP address of the ToolsTalk 2 server will be pre-populated.

  3. Select Connect and select Close once the Controller online message is displayed.

Connection Status

  • If you enter the IP address of an already connected controller in the Connect controller window, the message Controller already connected and online is displayed.

  • The message Waiting for controller to come online is displayed while the connection is being established.

  • The message Controller online is displayed when the connection to the controller is established.

  • The message ToolsTalk failed to connect to controller. Please verify IP address/DNS name is displayed if the connection failed.

A controller can also be connected to the ToolsTalk 2 application via the web GUI or controller GUI.

This procedure is described in the controller specific documentation.

Managing the Controller List

The Plant structure workspace default view displays All controllers. The All controllers view contains all the controllers currently connected to the ToolsTalk 2 server, regardless of whether they are online or offline. Custom Sections is a subsection of All Controllers ordered into folders.

Selecting a Custom Sections folder

On the top of the controller list, click the options button, and select Custom Sections and then select the appropriate folder.

Selecting a Controller

  1. In the left side menu bar, select Plant structure .

  2. Scroll down to the relevant controller and select it by clicking on the name field .

    The selected controller is highlighted. A controller with an online status constantly updates the ToolsTalk 2 application.

Offline controller names are struck-through.

A controller in offline status may display old and outdated information if changes have been made through another controller interface other than ToolsTalk 2.

It is possible for several ToolsTalk 2 users to access the same controller. If an attempt is made to select a controller, which is already selected by another ToolsTalk 2 user, a modal dialog box is displayed with the following warning message:

Other users are currently active in the system. Parameter values may be changed without notice.

Select OK to close the dialog box and to continue.

Searching for Controllers

In the Plant structure workspace there is a field for searching for controllers in the controller list.

In the search field, enter at least two letters of the controller name.

It is possible to search for the controller name or type.

Remote Controller Restart

In certain circumstances it may be required to make a complete power on reset (POR) of the controller.

The following describes how to make a remote POR from ToolsTalk 2:

  1. In the left side menu bar, select Plant structure .

  2. Right-click on the selected controller and select Restart in the shortcut menu

  3. Confirm or cancel the controller restart operation in the modal window dialog. The controller will first go offline before it gets back online.

    This operation may take a few minutes.

    While this is in progress, it is possible to perform other tasks in ToolsTalk 2.

It is only possible to make a remote restart on a controller that is online and connected to the ToolsTalk 2 application server. Offline controller names are struck-through.

Saving Changes in Parameters and Configurations

When a controller has a status of On-line, it automatically updates ToolsTalk 2 if any changes are made in the web GUI or in the controller GUI.

Any changes made in ToolsTalk 2 are automatically saved but are not copied to the controller. A Push copies changes to the controller and is executed by an active command.

A push indicator is displayed beside the controller name in the plant structure workspace to indicate that configuration changes have been made in ToolsTalk 2 but not yet copied to the controller.

 

A push can be made in several ways:

  • Select the Push indicator icon next to the controller name in the controller list.

  • Click the Push command button in the system menu bar to start copying changes from ToolsTalk 2 to one or more controllers. A shortcut menu opens to select affected controllers

  • Right click on a controller name in the plant structure workspace and select the Push command button in the shortcut menu. Changes are copied from ToolsTalk 2 to the one selected controller.

It is not possible to make a Push to a controller which has a status of Off-line.

Managing the Workspace Windows

The workspace for plant structure and reports both involve the selection of a single controller for further work. The workspace can be minimized or maximized to increase the space for the controller workspace by either, dragging as described and shown in the image below, or by selecting the Plant structure icon .

Minimizing and Maximizing the Workspace View

  1. Place the cursor on the line between the two workspace areas. The cursor shape changes from a white arrow to the shape of a horizontal double sided arrow.

  2. Click-hold-drag and the border line between the two workspace area can be moved. The workspace can be maximized by moving the window border all the way to the left-side menu, or maximized by moving the window border to the right-side menu.

Filtering and Sorting the Data Grid

The data grid columns in the workspace windows can be sorted and filtered.

  1. Select a column header to access the sort and filter function.

  2. To sort the list, select Sort list to arrange the list into ascending, descending, or default order.

  3. To filter the list, select the check boxes to filter what is to be displayed. Select Clear filter to return to the default view.

User Interface - Workspace With Controller Overview

After selecting a controller and selecting a controller menu icon, the controller workspace can show the following information.

Controller workspace overview

A

A selected controller in the Plant structure workspace

B

Controller name in the controller workspace. The name is identical to the selected controller name in the Plant structure

C

Name of the selected controller menu icon

D

List of configurations with overview information in the controller workspace

E

Controller menu icons

F

A row of command buttons in the controller workspace. The type of command buttons vary depending on the controller menu icon selected

G

Selected controller menu icon. Highlighted with a yellow border

The workspace overview shows either a list of configurations or shows menus with parameter values. If a list of configurations is shown, the next level, the Menu level is accessed by a double-click on a configuration name.

Working with the Hardware Configuration Tab

Offline programming of a Hardware Layout Configuration is made in the Controller Template Library.

Configuration Area

In the configuration area, you can either create a layout from scratch or update the existing layout extracted from your controller.

Buttons

Extract

Updates the hardware layout configuration according to the hardware connected to the controller.

Zoom in

Zooms in on the layout. (Ctrl + mouse wheel forward)

Zoom out

Zooms out on the layout. (Ctrl + mouse wheel backward)

Fit to screen

Reverts the layout back to a default size.

Delete

Deletes the selected item.

Tool box

The toolbox contains all valid products for the controller version.

Creating Hardware Layout

A new installation of a PF6 System does not have any hardware layout.

To create a hardware layout, always start with a carrier (3-slot or 6-slot) from Tool Box. For the sequence of the channel number, it is recommended to use 6-slot carriers first. For any system with more than two FlexCarriers, start hardware configuration with a 6-slot FlexCarrier.

Drag FlexCarrier to the Drop here area and drop it. Indicators are displayed. You can point to a symbol to get a tooltip .

Drag other products from Tool Box to a target place. When pointing to a target place with a product, the target place will change color:

  • Red: invalid drop

  • Blue: valid drop

You can move, copy and remove a single product or a carrier with all its products.

  • To move, click and drag the product.

  • To copy, press Ctrl and drag the product.

  • To delete, choose the product and press Delete. The FlexCarrier containing the FlexController can only be deleted when it is the single remaining carrier.

Extracting a hardware layout configuration

If the Hardware Layout Configuration is empty, a current controller setup can be extracted by using the Extract button.

  1. Select Extract, the Extract Hardware Configuration dialog box opens.

  2. Select OK to extract the current configuration.

After extracting, push the changes to the controller in order to receive status and health. The hardware deployment status will change after validation.

Status

When the controller is connected and online, and the hardware layout configuration is in sync with the controller, ToolsTalk 2 will start to receive notifications of changes in the hardware deployment status. Once notified, ToolsTalk 2 will ask the controller for the Hardware measurement data.

To see detailed deployment status and measurement data:

  1. Select the product in the configuration area. Multiple products can be selected by pressing Ctrl and select.

  2. Click on the Status bar to expand the window.

Tips:

  • The height of panel can be increased by dragging the top border.

  • To get the latest measurement data, click Refresh.

  • The details of Health status can be expanded. Select Show only NOK to only view the data with NOK result.

Tool configuration

For each tool, it is possible to select a tool configuration from a list containing all available tool configurations. By default, no mapping of Tool Configuration is made. It is possible to run tools that are not mapped to a tool configuration. In this case, the controller will use an internally created default Tool Configuration without any of the dual transducer functionality enabled.

Inhibit mode

If there is something wrong with the channel (Drive or tool), inhibit mode can be set to continue using your hardware:

  • False: Channel is running OK.

  • Report OK: Channel is disabled and reports OK in result.

  • Report NOK: Channel is disabled and reports NOK in result.

  • Report No Result: Channel is disabled and do not show up in the result.

Carrier

There are two types of carriers:

  • 3-slot

  • 6-slot

You can have maximum 11 carriers in your configuration. The carrier with controller is always the first carrier. All the carriers need to be dropped after the first carrier.

Controller

The controller can only be added to the first slot of the first carrier. It is not possible to add the Controller product to any other slots in the system.

Drive

The drive can be placed in all free slots except the first carrier’s first slot or slot with channel number 65. See section on channel numbering for further information.

You can have maximum 64 drives in your configuration.

Blank

The blank can be placed in all free slots except the first slot of any carrier.

Fan

The fan product can only be dropped at the top of a carrier. A 3-carrier has one fan module and a 6-carrier has two fan modules.

E-Stop

There are three different types of E-Stop:

  • E-Stop ASM

  • E-Stop Entry

  • E-Stop ByPass

The first two E-Stops can only be dropped in the configuration’s first carrier. All other carriers can only have an E-Stop ByPass.

Tool

The Flex system can only add QST tools. The tool can only be dropped on a Drive that does not have a tool connected.

Symbols

Symbols indicate status of each product. You can always point to each indicator to get a tooltip.

Warning

Not expected

OK

Empty

Wrong type

Missing

In this Section
  • Channel Numbering

Channel Numbering

When a system is powered up a channel number (also named drive index) will be assigned to each FlexDrive. The drive index is dependent of which FlexCarrier and where in the FlexCarrier the FlexDrive is mounted.

Example: Channel numbering

Carrier

1

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Controller

Drive

Drive

Drive

Drive

Drive

Drive index

-

2

3

4

5

6

Carrier

2

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

 

 

 

Drive

Drive

Drive

Drive index

7

8

9

Working with the Tightening Program Tab

Viewing the list of Tightening Programs
  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. On the toolbar, select Tightening program .

    The Tightening program overview shows a list of tightening programs.

The list has the following columns:

List of tightening programs

Column

Description

Check box

Select a tightening program by marking a check box.

Name

Name of the tightening program. A Push indicator can be visible in adjacent to the name indicating that changes have been made, but not yet pushed to the controller.

Strategy

The tightening strategy selected for the tightening program.

Library Link

Indicates if the program is linked to a Global tightening program in the tightening program library.

Target

The final tightening target is either expressed as a torque value or as an angle value.

Last change

Last changes made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Indicates which user made the last changes.

Controller updated

Last changes pushed to a controller, expressed in controller time.

Controller updated by

Indicates which user made the last push to the controller.

Approval status

Approval status of the tightening or loosening program

The field Changed by can be a registered ToolsTalk 2 user, as it is done via the ToolsTalk 2 GUI.

The field Controller updated by can be a registered ToolsTalk 2 user, via the web-GUI or via the controller-GUI.

Command buttons in the tightening workspace

Command

Description

Add

Creates a new tightening program.

Add to library

Converts a Local tightening program into a Global tightening program.

Unlink

Converts a Global tightening program into a Local tightening program.

Compare

Compares two selected tightening programs. These must have the same strategy.

Delete

Removes selected tightening program(s) from the list.

In this Section
  • Tightening Program Menu
  • Multistep Tightening Introduction
  • Adding a Multistep Program
  • Copying and Pasting a Tightening Program
  • Importing a Multistep Program
  • Deleting a Multistep Program
  • Comparing Multistep Tightening Programs
  • Global Tightening Program
  • Tightening Editor
  • Multistep Tightening Program Properties

Tightening Program Menu

Each row in the list represents one multistep tightening program.

Header

Description

Check box

Used for selecting a specific tightening program.

Name

A user-defined name.

Strategy

Selected strategy for the tightening program.

Library link

Linked to global library Yes/No.

Target

 

Last changed

Time expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Tightening program changed by <user>

Controller updated

Controller updated, expressed in controller time.

Controller updated by

Controller updated by <user>

Approval status

Approval status of the tightening or loosening program

Tightening program workspace command buttons

Command

Description

Add

  • New. Creates a new tightening program.

  • Import. Import a tightening program. File format is *.json

Manage

  • Add to library. Adds current tightening program to library

  • Unlink.

    Removes the library link

  • Compare

  • Export. Exports a selected tightening program. File format is *.json

  • Delete. Removes selected tightening program from the list.

Multistep Tightening Introduction

A multistep tightening is a tightening done in several steps. The number of steps and the type of the steps vary depending on the tightening to be done.

Often a multistep tightening is run with many tools in parallel, for example, to tighten the five bolts holding a wheel on a car. To make sure the tightening is done properly all the tools must run synchronized so they reach the same torque at roughly the same time.

To make sure this synchronization happens, the multistep program uses synchronization points. At a synchronization points each tool stop. When all of the tools have reached the synchronization point the tools continue with the next step until they reach the next synchronization point.

The number of steps between the synchronization points is flexible and could vary from 1 to 10. It is not necessary for the multistep programs running on different tools to have the same number of steps between the synchronization points. A multistep tightening program is highly configurable and the actual layout of different multistep programs can vary wildly.

Example: Multistep tightening program

Pos

 

A

Step 1 and 2 engage the tool on the bolt.

B

A fast rundown is made with step 3.

C

Step 4 and 5 run the actual tightening

D

Step 6 is used to release the socket from the bolt.

Restrictions
Restrictions are used to make sure the tightening stops if something unexpected occurs. These restrictions could, for example, test that a maximum set torque is not reached or that a part of the multistep tightening does not take too long to run. Every step can have up to four restrictions each.

Monitors
Monitors are used to verify that the tightening was made according to the specification. This can be, for example, angle limits or torque limits. Every step can have up to four monitors each.

Sync mode
With sync mode it is possible to run different tightening programs on different tools at the same time. The main function of the sync mode is to define the tools that shall be included in a synchronized tightening and specify the tightening program each tool shall run.

Reject management
If something goes wrong in a tightening program the program can either do a repair or the program is terminated.

The reject management works like this, when all tools have reached a synchronization point the status of each tool and the total status is evaluated. If all channels at the synchronization point are OK the program continues with the next step. If something is NOK the program will repair or terminate according the set action.

Adding a Multistep Program

  1. Select the Add button. The Create new Tightening program dialog window opens.

  2. Enter tightening program name, index number (only valid for tightenings), and select tightening strategy Multistep. The tightening program will be issued with the next sequential number in the list of programs, if no active selection of the index is made.

  3. Select the Add button.

Copying and Pasting a Tightening Program

Existing tightening programs can be copied as a template and then pasted on another controller.

Copy and Paste are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers running the same software version and controller type.

  1. In the Plant structure area, select a controller.

  2. Go to Tightening Program .

    The workspace area displays all the tightening programs available.

  3. Right-click on a single row to be copied, or to copy many, select the check box on each of the programs you want to copy, and then right-click.

  4. Select Copy.

  5. Right-click anywhere in the empty workspace area, and then select Paste to add the tightening program to the first available position in the list. Alternatively, right-click and choose Paste with index to choose the position in the program list. Double-click to open the tightening program and modify.

    It is also possible to paste the tightening program template into the Program Templates library workspace.

Importing a Multistep Program

  1. Select the Add button. The Create new Tightening program dialog window opens.

  2. Select the Import tab.

  3. Select Open file and select the file from the desired location. The file must have the format <template_name>.json. Select Open.

Deleting a Multistep Program

  1. For each Multistep program to be deleted, mark the check box in the leftmost column in the workspace area.

  2. Select the Manage command button, then Delete from the drop-down list.

  3. The selected Multistep program(s) are removed and the list is updated.

Comparing Multistep Tightening Programs

In Tightening Programs, two different Multistep Programs can be compared.

  1. Go to the Tightening Program tab , in the list of programs select the corresponding check boxes of the Tightening Programs to be compared.

    Only Multistep Programs with the same operation mode can be compared, Tightenings with Tightenings and Loosenings with Loosenings.

  2. Select the Manage command button, and then select Compare.

    The workspace displays graphical images of the actual Multistep Program Steps, and in the Compare area, the parameters for the two selected tightening programs are shown.

  3. In the Compare window, the specific parameter values that differ will be displayed in red. Select the check box Show only differences to display only the parameter values that differ. The Properties and Steps sections which include parameters that differ will be marked with a blue indicator.

It is not possible to edit the two Multistep Programs that are being compared and configuration errors or warnings will not be shown.

Global Tightening Program

A tightening program can be either Local or Global. If a tightening program is global, it is indicated with a Yes in the Library link column in the list of tightening programs.

A Local tightening program is valid for a single controller.

Viewing the list of Tightening Programs
  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. On the toolbar, select Tightening program .

    The Tightening program overview shows a list of tightening programs.

A Local tightening program can only be edited via the Tightening program tab.

A Local tightening program is not visible in the Tightening program library .

A Global tightening program is valid for multiple controllers subscribing to the tightening program. The Global tightening programs are located in the tightening program library.

Accessing the Library
  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select Tightening program library in the top menu bar.

    The Tightening program library shows a list of global tightening programs.

If a controller subscribes to a Global tightening program, it is visible in Tightening program , but editing is prohibited.

A Global tightening program can only be edited via the Tightening program library .

Tightening Editor

Buttons

Name

Description

Display

  • Repair - Show or hide the repair area.

  • Terminate - Show or hide the terminate area.

  • Monitor - Show or hide the step monitors.

  • Restriction - Show or hide the step restrictions.

  • Direction Arrow - Show or hide the direction arrow.

  • Display DropArea Help - Show or hide the DropArea help.

Zoom in

Zooms in on the tightening program.

Zoom out

Zooms out from the tightening program.

Fit to screen

Fits the whole tightening program to the drag and drop area.

Delete

Deletes the selected item.

Repair Area

The steps in the repair area show the repair path to be followed if the status at a synchronization point is NOK.

A repair path always starts and ends at a synchronization point. Where the repair path should re-enter the tightening path is flexible, but the repair path must always go back towards the beginning of the program.

Only one repair path can start in each synchronization point, but several repair paths may end at the same synchronization point.

The number of steps to run in the repair path can be between 1 and 3.

It is not possible to define a repair path from the start of the program.

Example: Repair paths

A

Repair path from the first synchronization point to the start of the program.

B

Repair path from the third synchronization point to the second synchronization point.

Tightening Area

The tightening area includes the tightening path, i.e., the steps and synchronization points in the multistep tightening program excluding repair and termination paths.

Terminate Area

The steps in the terminate area shows the terminate path followed if the status at a synchronization point is fatal. After the termination path is done the tightening is ended. A termination path always starts at a synchronization point. Only one termination path can start in each synchronization point.

The number of steps to run in the termination path can be between one and three.

It is always possible to terminate from all synchronization points. If no termination path is defined, the program will go directly to the end without running any other steps.

Example: Termination path

A

Termination path from the first synchronization point to the end of the program.

B

Termination path from the third synchronization point to the end of the program.

Configuration

  1. Select on the step, restriction or monitor and click on Configuration at the bottom of the screen to open the Configuration field. To select multiple steps, use Ctrl.

    The Configuration field contains different parameters for the steps, monitors and restrictions based on which step, monitor or restriction is selected in the repair area.

  2. Enter the required parameters.

    To delete a monitor or restriction, select Delete which is present in that field.

Using speed shifts

You can define 1-5 angle triggers or torque triggers during a step, where the speed will shift.

The speed shifts can be added in the Configuration field.

Within one step, all the speed shift triggers are based on the same property, i.e. either torque or angle. They cannot be mixed within one step.

To add a speed shift:

  1. In the dialog box of a step that can have speed shifts, click Add speed shift and choose an angle range or a torque range. The Speed Shift Angle/Torque fields open.

  2. Add values according to the table below.

Parameter

Description

Angle/Torque trigger

Must be > 0.

Speed

Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard or soft.

The Torque triggers and Angle triggers must be less than the step target, depending on the type of the step and the trigger type.

The Torque trigger and Torque speed also validate against the Max torque and Max speed of the tool. A warning or error indicator occurs whenever the Speed Shift settings exceed either the tool max values or step max values.

It is possible to push the settings to the controller when a tightening program has a warning, but not when a tightening program has an error(fault) indicator.

Tool Box

The Tool box includes:

  • Steps: including Sync point and Utilities

  • Monitors

  • Restrictions

  • Result Reporters

  • Templates

Drag and drop area shortcut keys

Shortcut key

Description

Space bar + cursor

Move Drag and drop area.

Drag and drop area functions

Function

Description

 

 

 

Add step

Grab a step in the Tool box. Drag the step to the desired position. Possible positions are indicated by a light blue indication arrow.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Mark a step

Click on a step to mark it.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Move a step

To move a step, click on the step and hold the button pressed while moving.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Copy step

To copy a step, click the Ctrl button and drag and drop the step.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Add repair path

Place the step above the synchronization point from where the repair part should start.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Add repair step

OR

Place a step in the Repair area to add a repair step. Possible positions are indicated by a light blue indication arrow.

or

Place the step above the synchronization point from where the repair part starts. The step is then placed before the first step in the repair path.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Add terminate path

Place the step below the synchronization point from where the termination part should start.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Add terminate step

OR

Place a step in the Terminate area to add a terminate step. Possible positions are indicated by a light blue indication arrow.

or

Place the step below the synchronization point from where the termination part starts. The step is then placed before the first step in the termination path.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Move endpoint for repair path.

Click the small arrow to move the endpoint of the repair path.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Add restriction and monitor

Grab a restriction or a monitor in the Tool box. Drag the restriction or monitor to desired step. Possible steps to add a restriction or monitor to, are indicated by changing to a lighter blue color.

___________

__________________________

_________________

Forbidden placement

A red arrow indicates that it is not possible to place a step.

 

 

In this Section
  • Tightening Steps
  • Sync Point
  • Utilities
  • Step Monitors
  • Step Restrictions
  • Result Reporters
  • Multistep Template

Tightening Steps

Tighten/Loosen to Angle (A)

A – Tighten to Angle

This step runs the tool until the target angle is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

A – Loosen to Angle

This step runs the tool with the speed n in the backward direction until the angle target is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

Parameters

Parameter

Description

Target angle

The angle target. Must be > 0.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm.

T – Tighten/Loosen to Torque

T – Tighten to Torque

This step runs the tool with the programmed speed in forward direction until the target torque is reached.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

The torque target. Must be > 0.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm.

T – Loosen to Torque

This step runs the tool with the speed in the backward direction. For the step to be active, the torque must first exceed 110 % of the Target torque. The Target torque should be set to a positive value. After reaching the target torque, the step runs until the torque drops below the target torque.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

The torque target. Must be > 0.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Stop on first torque

The step runs until the torque pass the Target torque. The Target torque should be set to a positive value.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

T+A – Tighten to torque plus angle

This step runs the tool until the target torque is reached. From this point it continues to run an additional target angle.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

The torque target. Must be > 0.

Target angle

The angle target. Must be > 0.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm.

DI – Run Until Digital Input

This steps runs the tool, in the direction defined by parameter Direction, until the input specified by Digital Input goes high or low depending on the value of Stop Condition.

Parameter

Description

Direction

Forward, or Backward

Digital Input

One of the following local digital inputs on the controller can be selected:

  • Local DI 1

  • Local DI 2

  • Local DI 3

  • Local DI 4

Stop Condition

  • Falling edge: The steps runs until a falling edge is detected after step start.

  • Rising edge: The steps runs until a rising edge is detected after step start.

  • Any edge: The step runs until a falling or a rising edge is detected after step start.

  • Low: The step runs until low value is detected.

  • High: The step runs until high value is detected.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed (rpm)

Default: 60 rpm.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

Available if Speed ramp type is Manual. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Tighten to DynaTork (DT)

This step runs the tool with speed n in the forward direction until the Target torque is reached. The tool will then hold the current constant at the DynaTork Percentage of Target torque during the DynaTork time.

To avoid overheating of the tool, it is strongly recommended to never run DynaTork to more than 40% of the maximum torque of the tool.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

The torque target. Must be > 0.

DynaTork time

The time DynaTork will be active.

DynaTork Percentage

The percentage of Torque target.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed (rpm)

Default: 60 rpm.

Wait (W)

In this step the tool waits the specified amount of time. The tool does not rotate while waiting.

The step before the Wait step must have the setting Brake set to On, that is, the Wait step must start with the tool standing still.

Parameter

Description

Wait Time

Number of seconds the tool will stand still.

Hold position

On or Off.

If On, the tool holds the position during the Time target.

Socket Release (SR)

This step runs the tool with speed n in the backward direction until the target angle is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

This step is only allowed to use as the last step in the tightening path of a multistep tightening program. However, it is possible to add a sync point after this step.

Parameter

Description

Target angle

The angle target.

Default: 3º , must be > 0

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm.

Tighten to torque or angle (T|A)

This step runs the tool with the speed n in the forward direction until the first of either torque target or angle target is reached. The torque and angle measurements start at the beginning of the step.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Target angle

Must be > 0.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Rundown (RD)

This step runs the tool with the speed in the forward direction, and depending on the Rundown Type, Torque or Snug the step behavior is as follows:

Rundown Type: To Torque: The step stops when the specified target torque is found.

Rundown Type: To Snug: The snug gradient calculation starts at the specified torque trigger level Tt. If no torque trigger is set the gradient calculation is started at the start of the step.

The slope calculation is made between two angle points Ad degrees apart and is calculated as: (Tn – Tn-1) / (An – An-1) and as soon as two slopes after each other are larger than TSLOPE the snug point is found.

Parameter

Description

Rundown type

To Torque or To Snug.

Target torque

Default: "not set". Must be > 0.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Trigger Torque

If Rundown type is To Snug, the Trigger torque field is displayed.

Default: "not set". Must be > 0.

Delta Angle

If Rundown type is To Snug, the Delta angle field is displayed.

Default: "0". Must be > 0.

Torque Rate

If Rundown type is To Snug, the Torque rate field is displayed.

Default: "0". Must be > 0.

Y - Tighten to Yield

This strategy runs the tool with the speed in the forward direction until the yield point is detected. The yield point is found by monitoring the torque gradient from the point where the torque goes above the Trigger Torque level, calculated based on Torque and Angle distance measurements. The Angle distance parameter is set according to the specified hardness of the joint.

Set the Gradient angle window (for hard joint, for soft joint or for manually setting of the Angle window). If Manual is selected, the Angle Window must be set. A joint is considered Hard if the screw is tightened to its full torque and it rotates 30 degrees or less after it has been tightened to its snug point. A Soft joint rotates 720 degrees or more after it has been tightened to its snug point. The hardness parameter defines the Angle Window for the gradient calculation. The harder the joint - the smaller the angle window.

Parameter

Description

Gradient Angle Window

Specifies Angle Window:

  • For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 20.

  • For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 1.

  • Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window

Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Trigger Torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be >= 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping

Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Yield Point Percentage

Must be >= 20 %

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Torque Filter Type

The type of the filter:

  • None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

  • Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

  • Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

  • Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

  • 20 Hz

  • 40 Hz

  • 90 Hz

  • 200 Hz

  • 600 Hz

Number of Samples

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

  • 2

  • 4

  • 6

  • 8

  • 16

  • 32

Tighten to yield, method 2 (YM2)

This step runs the tool with the specified speed in the forward direction until the yield point is detected.

Search for the yield point starts when the torque has reached Tt. The average of the torque over Af degrees is calculated. This procedure is repeated N rs times.

A reference slope is calculated with linear regression over the N rs points. After that, new average values are continuously calculated over A f degrees.

The actual slope is calculated with linear regression over the last N s average points. The yield point is reached when the slope is less than Py % of the reference slope.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Filter angle

Default: 1. Must be > 0.

Number of samples

Default: 6. Must be >=4.

Number pf samples, reference

Default: 6. Must be >=4.

Yield point percentage

Default: 90%. Must be >20%.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

TC – Torque Calibration

This step runs the tool with the specified speed in the forward direction until the torque target is reached.

By setting this to either Main or Secondary it is possible to calibrate either one of the two transducers.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Transducer

Main or Secondary. Default: Main.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Engage (E)

This step runs the tool in both directions until the socket engages the screw. The step continues until Target torque or Target angle is reached, provided that Continue if not Engaged is set to Yes. If Target Angle is reached in any direction, the direction is reversed. Limit the search iterations by entering Max Engage Attempts. If Target Torque is reached in any direction the step will finish with OK status.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Target angle

Default: 0. Must be > 0.

Max Engage Attempts

Default: 2. Must be > 0.

Continue if not Engaged

If Yes the step will end with status OK even if the engage attempts fail.

If No the step will end with status NOK if the engage attempts fail.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Thread Cutting to Torque (ThCT)

The Thread Cutting to Torque function enables tightening where the rundown torque required is greater than the Rundown complete torque, for example when tightening thin layers of metal using self-threading (or selftapping) screws. The tool runs in forward direction until the Thread Cutting Angle (Aw) is reached. The thread cutting angle window is measured from when the torque passes Thread Cut Trigger Torque (Ttc) for the first time. From the point where Thread cutting angle is reached, the step continues to run until the Target Torque (Tt) is reached.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Thread Cutting Angle Window

Default: 0. Must be > 0.

Trigger Torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Tighten to Torque and Angle (T&A)

The tool runs until with the specified speed in the forward direction until both target torque and target angle are reached. The target torque and the target angle must be set to > 0.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Target angle

Default: 0. Must be > 0.

Brake

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Sync Point

In a synchronization point the tool waits for all other tools to reach the corresponding synchronization point in their programs. Depending on the status for all tools the program continues on the tightening path, the repair path or the terminate path.

To prevent overheating of tools that are waiting in a synchronization point they are only allowed to “hold torque” or “hold position” for a maximum of 1 second. After this the tool will release the hold and continue to wait for the other tools.

Parameter

Description

Sync hold condition

  • Hold position: The tool holds the position it had when the previous step ended.

  • No Hold: The motor is turned off and the position will not be held.

  • Hold Torque: If the step before the synchronization point is a DynaTork step it is possible to set HoldTorque.

Configuring Sync point
  1. In a Multistep Tightening Program, double-click on a Sync Point, or mark it and then select Configuration in the lower area of the workspace. To mark several, press CTRL.

  2. In the Configuration area, select one of the following conditions for each Sync Point:

    • NoHold. The motor is turned off and the position will not be held.

    • HoldPosition. The tool holds the position it had when the previous step ended.

Utilities

Connectors can be added to reuse a repair path or a terminate path.

Creating a connector
  1. Select Connector.

  2. Select a sync point.

    If a wrong sync point is selected, use the right mouse button or press Esc to cancel.

  3. Select a step that is on a repair path or a terminate path.

    You can only select the repair path backward or the terminate path forward.

The connector is added.

One sync point can only have one repair path and one terminate path.

Example: Same repair path

A

Same repair path as step 5 from the second synchronization point.

B

Same repair path as step 5 from the third synchronization point.

Example: Same termination path

A

Same termination path as step 5 from the first synchronization point.

B

Same termination path as step 5 from the second synchronization point.

Step Monitors

The step monitors are used to verify that the tightening was made according to the specification, for example, angle limits or torque. The monitors are flexible and can be placed as needed in the multistep program.

For each step in the multistep tightening program it is possible to have up to four monitors.

A – Angle

This step monitor measures the maximum angle reached during the monitor and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit. The angle measurement starts at the start of the monitor or, if specified, at the point where the torque passes Trigger torque for the first time during the monitor.

Parameter

Description

Type

Four angle types are available: Peak angle (default), Angle at peak torque, Shut off angle, and Angle at end.

Trigger torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger.

Low limit

Lowest acceptable angle.

High limit

Highest acceptable angle.

YA – Angle from Yield

This monitor measures the peak angle reached from the yield point and checks that the peak angle is within the limit.

Parameter

Description

Gradient Angle Window

Specifies Angle Window:

  • For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 20.

  • For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 1.

  • Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window

Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Yield Point Percentage

Must be >= 20 %

Trigger Torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping

Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Low limit

Lowest acceptable angle. Must be >= 0

High limit

Highest acceptable angle. Must be > 0

Torque Filter Type

The type of the filter:

  • None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

  • Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

  • Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

  • Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

  • 20 Hz

  • 40 Hz

  • 90 Hz

  • 200 Hz

  • 600 Hz

Number of Samples

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

  • 2

  • 4

  • 6

  • 8

  • 16

  • 32

MT – Mean Torque

This monitor measures the average torque during the monitor and checks the calculated value is within the limits.

Parameter

Description

Type

Specifies start condition:

  • Step Start: The measurement starts from step start and ends at the shut-off point.

  • Torque Trigger: The measurement starts at the point where the torque passes Torque Trigger for the first time. It ends at the shut-off point.

  • Angle Trigger: The measurement starts at the point where Angle Trigger is reached, measures from when the Trigger Torque (optional) is reached. Without Trigger Torque, the Angle Trigger is measured from the start of the step. It ends at the shut-off point.

  • Angle Window: Measures during an Angle Window. The window starts at the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time plus an angle offset, Angle Trigger.

  • Time Interval: Measures during the last Time Interval seconds of the tightening.

Torque Trigger

Available when Type is set to Trigger Torque, Angle Trigger or Angle Window. Must be >= 0 and < Tool Max Torque.

Angle Trigger

Available when Type is set to Angle Trigger or Angle Window. Must be > 0.

Angle Window

Available when Type is set to Angle Window. Must be > 0.

 

Time Interval

Available when Type is set to Time Interval. Must be > 0.

Low limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

High limit

Highest acceptable torque.

PT – Peak Torque

This step monitor measures the maximum torque reached during the monitor, including any over shoot, and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit.

Parameter

Description

Low limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

High limit

Highest acceptable torque.

PTCA – Post Thread Cut Angle

Measures the angle achieved during the monitoring and checks that it is between the specified angle limits. The Trigger Torque level is ignored until the end of the Thread cut angle window is reached. After that, the angle measuring starts as soon as the measured torque is above Trigger Torque. The parameter Stop Condition specifies where the angle measurement should end.

Parameter

Description

Trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Thread cutting angle window

Must be > 0

Angle measurement type

Peak angle

Angle at peak torque

Shut off angle

Angle at end

Thread cut trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Low limit

Must be >= 0

High limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

PTCPT – Post Thread Cut Peak Torque

Measures the maximum torque achieved during the monitoring, including any over-shoot, and checks that it is between the Torque limits. All torque values are ignored until the end of the Thread cut angle window has been reached.

Parameter

Description

Thread cut trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Thread cutting angle window

Must be > 0

Low limit

Must be >= 0

High limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

PVTH – Post View Torque High

This monitor checks that all torque values in the angle window are below the limit.

Parameter

Description

Start Angle

Must be >= 0

Window length

Must be <= 0

Number of samples

1

High limit

Highest acceptable torque.

PVTL – Post View Torque Low

This monitor checks that all torque values in the angle window are above the limit.

Parameter

Description

Start Angle

Must be >= 0

Window length

Must be <= 0

Number of samples

1

Low limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

PrT – Prevailing Torque

This monitor calculates the prevailing torque value in the angle window and checks that it is within the limits.

Parameter

Description

Torque Compensation

On or off.

Start angle

Must be > 0

Window length

Must be >= 0

Low limit

Must be > 0

High limit

Must be >= 0

SOT – Shut Off Torque

The shut off point is the point where the step reaches its target. The torque is measured at the shut off point and checked to be between High limit and Low limit.

Parameter

Description

Low limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

High limit

Highest acceptable torque.

SOC – Shut Off Current

The shut off point is the point where the step reaches its target. The current is measured at the shut off point and checked to be between High limit and Low limit .

Parameter

Description

Low limit

Lowest acceptable current.

High limit

Highest acceptable current.

SSD - Stick Slip Detection

This step monitor detects and reports stick slip effects during a step. The detection is done by counting the number of times the torque falls below the Trigger Level. If the number of times is larger than Maximum Number of Oscillations then the stick slip error is reported. The monitor operates in two different modes, Dynamic or Fixed. The difference between the modes is the way that the Trigger level is calculated.

Parameter

Description

Stick Slip detection type

Specifies what type of Stick slip detection that will be done in the monitor Stick Slip detection. Default: Dynamic torque.

Peak torque percentage

Default: 80%, Must be >=10 and < 100.

Trigger torque

Default: 5, Must be >= 0 and < Tool max torque.

Maximum number of oscillations

Default: 5, Must be >= 3 and <20.

Ti – Time

Measures the elapsed time during the monitor and checks that it is between the time limits. The time measurement starts at the start of the monitor and, if the Trigger Torque is specified, at the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time during the monitor.

Parameter

Description

Trigger torque

Must be >= 0 and < Tool max torque.

Low limit

Must be >= 0

High limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

TC – Torque Calibration

This monitor checks the maximum torque reached is within the torque limits.

Parameter

Description

Transducer type

Main or Secondary

Low limit

Must be >= 0

High limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

TG – Torque Gradient

This monitor checks the gradient is within the limit.

Parameter

Description

Gradient Angle Window

Specifies Angle Window:

  • For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 20.

  • For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 1.

  • Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window

Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

End Point Check

If set to Yes, only the gradient measured at the shut off point of the step is checked to be within the limits.

Trigger Torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping

Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Low limit

Lowest acceptable torque gradient. Must be >= -100.

High limit

Highest acceptable torque gradient. Must be > -100 and > Low limit.

Torque Filter Type

The type of the filter:

  • None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

  • Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

  • Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

  • Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

  • 20 Hz

  • 40 Hz

  • 90 Hz

  • 200 Hz

  • 600 Hz

Number of Samples

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

  • 2

  • 4

  • 6

  • 8

  • 16

  • 32

Angle Offset

Available when End Point Check is set to No. Specifies the degrees that the calculation of the gradient start after the trigger torque is passed for the first time.

TAW – Torque in Angle Window

This monitor checks that all torque values in the angle window are within the torque limits.

Parameter

Description

Trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Start Angle

Must be > 0

Window length

Must be <= 0

Low limit

Must be >= 0

High limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

NOK if window is passed

If set to Yes, status of this monitor is NOK if the end of angle window is not reached.

TRD – Torque Rate and Deviation

This step monitor measures and checks the torque rate, i.e. the ratio of torque vs. angle. The calculated torque rate is checked if it is within the torque rate limits defined by High limit and Low limit.

Parameter

Description

Trigger torque

Torque of the angle start point.

Start point angle

When Start point angle has been measured from Trigger torque the measuring of the torque starts.

End point angle

Angle point where the measuring of the torque is stopped.

End point torque

Torque where the measuring of the torque is stopped.

Low limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

High limit

Highest acceptable torque.

Limit

Must be > 0

Step Restrictions

To make sure the tightening stops if something unexpected happens, it is possible to add restrictions to the multistep tightening program. For each restriction, select Repairable = Yes to allow retry when tightening stops. For each of the steps in a multistep program it is possible to have up to four restrictions.

CTh – Cross Thread

This restriction checks the angle from the point where torque passes Start torque (T1) to the point where the torque passes End torque (T2). If the angle measured from Start torque (T1) is higher than Maximum limit (Amax), the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point.

When the torque passes End torque (T2), the measured angle is checked against the limit Minimum limit (Amin). If the angle is lower than this limit, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point.

Parameter

Description

In illustration

Start torque

Must be <=0.

T1

End torque

Must be <=0.

T2

Minimum limit

The low angle limit.

Amin

Maximum limit

The high angle limit.

Amax

A – Maximum Angle

This restriction measures the angle. If the measured angle reaches the Maximum limit, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point. The angle is measured from the start of the restriction or, if specified, from the point where the torque passes Trigger torque for the first time during the restriction.

Parameter

Description

Trigger torque

If specified, this is the torque from where the angle is measured.

Maximum limit

If this limit is reached the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point.

T – Maximum Torque

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque exceeds the Maximum limit, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point.

Parameter

Description

Maximum limit

If the torque reaches this specified limit the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point

RH – Rehit

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque exceeds the Torque Limit, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point, or the end of the program.

Parameter

Description

Torque Limit

If the torque reaches this specified limit the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point, or the end of the program.

RT – Rescinding Torque

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque is lower than the limit Torque low limit, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point, or the end of the program.

Parameter

Description

Rescinding torque limit

Default: 10 Nm. Must be > 0.

TG – Torque Gradient

This restriction checks the gradient and if it is outside the limits the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point or the end of the program.

Parameter

Description

Gradient Angle Window

Specifies Angle Window:

  • For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 20.

  • For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 1.

  • Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window

Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Trigger Torque

Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping

Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Minimum Limit

Must be >= -100.

Maximum Limit

Must be > -100 and > Low limit.

Torque Filter Type

The type of the filter:

  • None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

  • Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

  • Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

  • Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

  • 20 Hz

  • 40 Hz

  • 90 Hz

  • 200 Hz

  • 600 Hz

Number of Samples

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

  • 2

  • 4

  • 6

  • 8

  • 16

  • 32

TAW – Torque in Angle Window

This restriction checks that the measured torque in the angle window is within its limits. If the measured torque is outside the limits the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point, or the end of the program.

Parameter

Description

Trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Start angle

Must be >= 0

Window length

Must be >0

Minimum limit

Must be >= 0

Maximum limit

Must be <= Minimum limit

TCD - Torque vs Current Deviation

This restriction verifies that all current measurements converted to the corresponding torque are, at most, the Maximum deviation away from the actual torque measured with the torque transducer. The restriction starts when the torque reaches Trigger Torque for the first time during the step and is active until the step reaches its target.

If Trigger Torque is never reached, the monitor will report OK.

Parameter

Description

Trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Maximum deviation

Default: 1, Must be > 0

Result Reporters

The result reporters makes it possible to extract specific values of selected producer from the result. The result reporters belong to a step but has to be tied to the monitor/restriction from which they will read the values. Only monitors or restrictions located in the same step as the result reporter can be selected. A result reporter is added to a step using drag and drop (in the same way as monitors and restrictions). Each result reporter is responsible for reporting a specific result value, for example, Rundown Angle, Final Torque, Prevailing Torque.

It is possible to tie a result reporter to:

  • program monitors

  • step monitors

  • step restrictions

Each result reporter defines a final value type:

  • FA – Final Angle

  • FC – Final Current

  • FT – Final Torque

  • PT – Prevailing Torque

  • RA – Rundown Angle

  • ST – Self-tap Torque

General Parameters

Parameter

Description

Producer

Specifies which monitor/restriction produces the value.

Value

Specifies which value to show from the selected producer.

Limitations:

  • It is only possible to add a result reporter on a monitor/restriction belonging to a step in main path or a program monitor/program restriction.

  • There may exist several reporters on a step if they are of different type.

  • There may exist a result reporter of for example type final angle on every step and program monitor angle.

  • For those monitor/restrictions that have more than one result value it is possible to add more than one result reporter if the result reporters are of different types.

  • There may not exist several result reporters of the same type on a step or on a program monitor/restriction.

  • There is only one result reported for each possible final value type.

Rules:

  • The internal number of a result item has to be the same as for the corresponding result reporter.

  • The internal number of a monitor/restriction result has to be the same as the internal number of the monitor/restriction in the configuration.

  • The step results has to be ordered according to the order of execution. The first executed step has to be first.

Possible values reported by a result reporter if present in the monitor/restriction/step:

  • The monitors/restrictions measured value (as float or integer)

  • The monitors/restrictions high and low limits

  • Status

  • Torque trigger and angle trigger

  • Angle target and torque target (read from the step)

Possible values for status:

  • Low

  • OK

  • High

  • Other

  • NotSet

The target values do not belong to any step monitor so the target values are taken from the step that the monitor belongs to.

Multistep Template

All created templates are visible in the tab Templates, when creating a multistep program. A template can be inserted (drag-and-drop) and act as a base to build the new multistep program on.

A template can only be dragged into the multistep program when steps have not yet been added. After dragging the template to the multistep program, steps may then be added.

The template itself will not be affected when modifying a multistep tightening program since the template is copied, and not linked to the program.

Create multistep program templates in Library > Program templates.

Relevant Information
  • Program Templates
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Multistep Tightening Program Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

A user-defined name for the multistep program.

Description

Description of the multistep program.

Type

Set type of tightening, for example, fixtured.

Thread direction

Clockwise (CW) or counter clockwise (CCW). Normally this direction is clockwise.

Program Restrictions

Parameter

Description

Maximum Time Limit

Set amount in seconds. This restriction checks the total time for the tightening and if it exceeds the Maximum Time Limit limit the tool is stopped immediately. The time is measured from the start of the program.

Maximum Torque Limit

Set amount. This restriction checks the torque and if the measured torque exceeds the Maximum Torque Limit limit the tool is stopped immediately.

Program Monitor

Parameter

Description

Angle

Turn angle monitoring On or Off for the entire program. If Active in steps and Trigger Torque are left blank, angle monitoring will start at program start.

Active in steps

Sets a range of steps the angle monitoring is valid for. If no end step is specified, angle monitoring will stop at the last step of the program that is not a Socket Release step.

Type

Type of angle monitoring:

  • Peak Angle: the highest angle reached during the monitor.

  • Angle at Peak Torque: the angle at the point where the highest torque was reached during the monitor.

    (Not available for STB tools)

  • Shut Off Angle: the angle at the shut-off point of the step.

  • Angle at End: the angle at the end of the monitor, including the brake, if active.

Trigger torque

Sets the value of the trigger torque for angle monitoring.

Low limit

Sets angle monitoring (program) lower limit.

High limit

Sets angle monitoring (program) higher limit.

Parameter

Description

Torque

Turn Torque monitoring On or Off for the entire program. If Active in steps is left blank, torque monitoring will start at program start.

Active in steps

Sets a range of steps the torque monitoring is valid for. If no end step is specified, torque monitoring will stop at the last step of the program that is not a Socket Release step.

Type

Type of angle monitoring:

  • Peak Torque: the highest torque reached during the monitor.

  • Shut Off Torque: the torque at the shut-off point of the step.

Low limit

Sets torque monitoring (program) lower limit.

High limit

Sets torque monitoring (program) higher limit.

Validation

Parameter

Description

Validate against tool values

Use On if tool is known and set Max Torque and Max Speed.

Use Off if tool is not known.

Tool

Drop-down for choosing the tool to validate against.

Max torque

Maximum torque of the tool to validate against.

Max speed

Maximum speed of the tool to validate against.

Attachment Tuning

Parameter

Description

Use attachment tuning

Select whether attachment tuning should be on or off.

Gear ratio

The gear ratio value can be between 0.5 and 4.0.

Efficiency tuning

The efficiency tuning value can be between 0.5 and 1.0.

Reporters

This enables the user to choose which values (from monitors/restrictions) shall be shown as final values. Click Add to choose a result reporter to be tied to a program monitor/restriction value.

Parameter

Description

Reporter

Select a result reporter.

Producer

Select which monitor/restriction produces the value.

Value

Select which value to show from the selected producer.

Working with the Sync Mode Tab

Sync Mode is used to:

  • Define the tools that shall be included in a synchronized tightening or loosening

  • Specify the tightening or the loosening program each tool shall run

  • Handle reject management (valid only for tightening Sync Mode)

The Sync Mode allows the different tools in a fixtured solution to run different multistep programs at the same time.

In a flexible production line you may need to use a different Sync Mode for each new product. The Sync Mode feature allows you to set up a mode for each configuration.

Each line represents one Sync Mode. The columns contain the following information:

Column

Description

Check box

Used when, for example, deleting a Sync Mode.

Name

For a tightening Sync Mode each name starts with an index number which is then followed by the user defined name. A loosening Sync Mode contains only an user defined name.

Channels

The number of channels in the Sync Mode.

Last saved

Last changes made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Last saved by

Shows who saved the configuration data.

Controller updated

Time when the controller was updated, expressed in controller time.

Controller updated by

User who last updated the controller.

In this Section
  • Adding a Sync Mode
  • Deleting a Sync Mode
  • Handling Tightening Sync Mode Configuration
  • Handling Loosening Sync Mode Configuration
  • Running a Loosening Sync Mode
  • Copying and Pasting a Sync Mode
  • Exporting a Sync Mode
  • Importing a Sync Mode

Adding a Sync Mode

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Select the Sync Mode icon in the Menu bar. The workspace area shows a list of all the current Sync Modes.

  3. Select the Add command button and enter the Name and Index (valid only for tightening Sync Mode).

  4. Select Tightening or Loosening in the Operation mode drop-down.

    A new Sync Mode is added at the lowest possible position and the list is updated.

Deleting a Sync Mode

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Select the Sync Mode icon in the Menu bar. The workspace area shows a list of all the current Sync Modes.

  3. For each Sync Mode to be deleted, mark the check box in the left most column in the workspace area.

  4. Select Manage, and then choose Delete from the drop-down menu.

    The selected Sync Mode is removed and the list is updated.

Handling Tightening Sync Mode Configuration

  • Double-click on a tightening Sync Mode to configure that Sync Mode.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

A user defined name for the mode.

Description

Description of the mode.

Referencing Loosening Sync Mode

A tightening Sync Mode can be linked to a loosening Sync Mode. Referencing a loosening sync mode is located in the Properties menu of a tightening Sync Mode

  1. Select the relevant loosening Sync Mode from the Loosening Sync mode drop-down.

    The number of bolt configurations and the channel numbers used in the bolt configurations of the tightening Sync Mode should be the same as the loosening Sync Mode selected and a warning is displayed if they differ.

Reject management

Parameter

Description

Max number of failing steps

Specifies the maximum number of different steps that can fail during the whole tightening. It does not matter if the same step fail more than once, it still only counts as one failing step.
If not set an unlimited number of steps can fail.

Action if exceeded

Specifies the action if Maximum number of failing steps is exceeded.

Action if NOK during repair

Specifies the action if a new error (NOK) is detected while a repair is ongoing.

Triggers

To view the Sync point table a tightening program with sync points must be selected for at least one bolt in Bolt configuration.

For each synchronization point in the main path of the programs it is possible to specify different triggers to control the reject management.

Add trigger

  1. Click on the + icon next to Add trigger.

  2. Select trigger.

  3. Set action for each sync point.

Delete trigger

  1. Click on the + icon next to Add trigger.

  2. Click on delete icon next to the trigger you want to delete.

Default trigger parameters

Description

Sync point

Sync point in the selected tightening program.

Default failing

Specifies the main action if an error is detected. Is used if none of the other conditions are fulfilled.

Default failing other

This parameter defines the action on the tools not running End or Terminate

Number of repairs parameters

Description

Repairs

Specifies the maximum number of repairs that can be started from the synchronization point and if not set, an unlimited number of repairs can be made

Repair action

Specifies the action if Maximum number of repairs have been made and a new error occurs

Repair action other

This parameter defines the action on the tools not running End or Terminate

NOK channels parameters

Description

NOK channels

Specifies the maximum number of channels that can fail in the synchronization point. If not set the number of failing channels settings will never be used to decide the action.

NOK channel action

Specifies the action if more than NOK channels have failed in the synchronization point.

NOK channel other

This parameter defines the action on the tools not running End NOK or Terminate NOK.

NOK groups parameters

Description

NOK groups

Specifies the maximum number of groups that can fail in the synchronization point. If not set the number of failing groups settings will never be used to decide the action.

NOK group action

Specifies the action if more than NOK groups have failed in the synchronization point.

NOK group other

This parameter defines the action on the tools not running End NOK or Terminate NOK.

Not repairable Parameters

Description

Not repairable

Specifies the action if the total status in the synchronization point is Not repairable.

NOK repairable other

This parameter defines the action on the tools not running End or Terminate.

Bolt configuration

To add bolt configuration, click ADD or ADD MANY. You can have maximum 64 bolt configurations.

Parameter

Description

Check box

Used when, for example, deleting a channel.

Channel

Number of the channel, also named drive index.

Tightening program

Select tightening program defined in the menu Tightening Program.

Bolt

The actual fastener that is tightened when a tightening is made. This number will be used as the address when collecting data for the specific bolt, for example, in the fieldbus signal Bolt tightening status.

Bolt name (optional)

Name of the bolt.

Group

The repair groups are used to group bolts that depend on each other when running a repair. One channel can belong to none, one or more repair groups.
If a group is specified for one bolt all the other bolts must also have a repair group defined, otherwise the Sync Mode is considered invalid.

In this Section
  • Reject management

Reject management

The reject management function is used for automatic repair or termination of failed steps. At each synchronization point the status of the tightening is evaluated. If the status is OK the next part of the tightening program starts. If the status is NOK an action is taken to repair, terminate or end the tightening program.

The repair path from each sync point is defined in the repair area in the tightening program.
The termination path from each sync point is defined in the termination area in the tightening program.

 

Status at a synchronization point

When all tools have reached a synchronization point the status of each tool and the total status is evaluated.

OK

NOK

Not repairable

Fatal

Status of a tool

Everything is OK so far.

The step(s) before the synchronization point has an error detected by a monitor. For these errors a repair is possible to do.

The step(s) before the synchronization point has an error detected by a restriction.

The step(s) before the synchronization point has a fatal error. Reasons for this can be:
- Hardware errors in tool or drive
- Max time in program restriction Time was reached
- Max torque in program restriction Torque was reached.

Status for a repair group

All the tools in the repair group reached the synchronization point with status OK.

At least one of the tools in the repair group reached the synchronization point with status NOK (and none had the status Not repairable or Fatal).

At least one of the tools in the repair group reached the synchronization point with status Not repairable (and none had the status Fatal).

At least one of the tools in the repair group reached the synchronization point with status Fatal.

Total status

All the tools reached the synchronization point with status OK. The execution of the program continues with the next step in the tightening.

At least one of the tools reached the synchronization point with status NOK (and none had the status Not repairable or Fatal).

At least one of the tools reached the synchronization point with status Not repairable (and none had the status Fatal).

At least one of the tools reached the synchronization point with status Fatal.

Calculate action if total status at a synchronization point is NOK

If total status at a synchronization point is NOK the applicable action is calculated. The action is decided depending on the set triggers. The first trigger that is fulfilled decides the action to take:

  1. Maximum number of failing steps exceeded:
    If the total number of failing steps in the whole tightening exceeds the number Max number of failing steps the Action of exceeded is used. If the same step fail more than once it still only counts as one failing step.

  2. Maximum number of repairs exceeded:
    If the total number of repairs started from the current synchronization point exceeds the number Repairs in the Number of repairs trigger the Repair action is used.

  3. Maximum number of failing groups:
    If the number of failing groups (groups that have status NOK) exceed the number NOK groups in the Number of NOK channels trigger the NOK group action is used.

  4. Maximum number of failing tools:
    If the number of failing tools (tools that have status NOK ) exceed the number NOK channels in the Number of NOK groups trigger the NOK channel action is used.

  5. Default failing action:
    If none of the conditions above is fulfilled the setting in Default failing action is used.

Action running a repair

A tool that runs a repair will run the steps in its repair path and jump back to a previous synchronization point. The repair is ongoing until the program returns to the synchronization point that started the repair. When the repair are done the status of the tools, repair groups and the total status will be evaluated again. If the total status is now OK all tools will continue with the next step, otherwise a new repair or termination is started.

The tools not running a repair will stay at the current synchronization point and wait for the repair to finish.

Action on status

Total status NOK

Repair NOK

All the tools with status NOK will run a repair. The tools not running a repair will stay at the current synchronization point and wait for the repair to finish.

Repair NOK groups

All tools that belong to a repair group with status NOK will run a repair. All the tools in the repair group will run a repair, regardless of their individual status. The tools not running a repair will stay at the current synchronization point and wait for the repair to finish.

Repair All

All the tools, regardless of their status, will run a repair.

Action running a termination

A tool that run a termination will run the steps in its termination path. After that the tightening is completed with status NOK.

Action on status

Total status NOK

Total status Not repairable

Terminate NOK

All the tools with status NOK will run a termination.

All the tools with status NOK or Not repairable will run a termination.

Terminate NOK Groups

All tools that belong to a repair group with status NOK will run a termination. All the tools in the repair group will run a termination, regardless of their individual status.

All tools that belong to a repair group with status NOK or Not repairable will run a termination. All the tools in the repair group will run a termination, regardless of their individual status.

Terminate All

All the tools, regardless of their status, will run a termination.

The tools with status OK will continue according the setting Other :
- Continue, The other tools will wait on the current synchronization point until the termination is finished. After this they will continue with the remaining parts of the tightening program.
- End all, The other tools will end the tightening.

Action end a tightening program

A tool that end the tightening program will go directly to the end without running any other steps. After that the tightening is completed with status NOK.

Action on status

Total status NOK

Total status Not repairable

End NOK

All the tools with status NOK will end the tightening without running the termination path.

All the tools with status NOK or Not repairable will end the tightening without running the termination path.

End NOK Groups

All tools that belong to a repair group with status NOK will end the tightening without running the termination path. All the tools in the repair group will end the tightening, regardless of their individual status.

All tools that belong to a repair group with status NOK or Not repairable will end the tightening without running the termination path. All the tools in the repair group will end the tightening, regardless of their individual status.

End All

All the tools, regardless of their status, will end the tightening without running the termination path.

The tools with status OK will continue according the setting Other :
- Continue: The other tools will continue with the remaining parts of the tightening program.
- Terminate all: The other tools will run a termination.

Action on total status Fatal

If the total status is Fatal a repair is not allowed. The tools with status Fatal cannot run anymore, so they will just end the tightening. The other tools will terminate, regardless of their individual status.

  • If one of the bolts is NOK but has no repair action configured in the tightening program, the mode will end all. NOK will state the main NOK cause for that bolt.

  • If one of the bolts is NOK and has a repair path, the system tries to repair until the maximum time limit is reached on the NOK bolt. The other bolts, which are OK, will wait. If the bolt gets OK after n number of repairs, the program continues as in the first bullet above with all the bolts. If the bolt still does not get OK, the whole sync mode will end as in bullet two.

Handling Loosening Sync Mode Configuration

  • Double-click on a loosening Sync Mode to configure that Sync Mode.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

A user defined name for the mode.

Description

Description of the mode.

Bolt Configuration

The bolt configuration of a loosening Sync Mode can only be linked to a loosening multistep program and only lists the available loosening multistep programs.

To add bolt configurations, click ADD or ADD MANY. You can have maximum of 64 bolt configurations.

Parameter

Description

Check box

Used when, for example, deleting a channel.

Channel

Number of the channel, also named drive index.

Loosening program

Select the loosening multistep program defined in the menu Tightening Program.

Running a Loosening Sync Mode

A loosening sync mode can be run in following possible ways.

All the conditions to start a tightening must be fulfilled (example: no emergency stop, enable signal is set and so on) in order for all the above cases to work correctly.

Running a Loosening Sync Mode Using the Input Select Loosening

  1. Select a tightening sync mode with an associated loosening sync mode.

    • This can be done by adding the I/O signal Select Input, Id 10020 in the To controller area in the Fieldbus sub-tab under Fieldbus and SoftPLC or this can also be done by selecting a task in the Task under the Virtual Station tab .

  2. Select loosening using the I/O signal Select loosening, Id 10029 in the To controller area in the Fieldbus sub-tab under Fieldbus and SoftPLC .

  3. Start the loosening using any of the two signals:

    • Start drive (continuos), Id 10028

    • Start drive (pulse), Id 10113

Running a Loosening Sync Mode Using Input Start Loosening

  1. Select a tightening sync mode with an associated loosening sync mode

    • This can be done by adding the I/O signal Select Input, Id 10020 in the To controller area in the Fieldbus sub-tab under Fieldbus and SoftPLC or this can also be done by selecting a task in the Task under the Virtual Station tab .

  2. Start the loosening using any of these two signals:

    • Start loosening (continuous), Id 10011

    • Loosening pulse start (pulse), Id 10072

Copying and Pasting a Sync Mode

Existing Sync Modes can be copied and pasted on the same controller, or copied from one controller and then pasted to another.

Copy and Paste are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers running the same software version and controller type.

  1. On the menu bar, select the Sync Mode tab. The workspace displays a list of available Sync Modes.

  2. Copy the Sync Mode by either:

    • Right-click the Sync Mode to copy, and then choose Copy from the menu.

    • Or select multiple Sync Modes by checking the check box in front of each row, right-click, and then choose Copy from the menu.

  3. In the Plant Structure , select the controller to paste the Sync Mode to. On the menu bar, select the Sync Mode tab, and then right-click anywhere in the workspace area and choose Paste. The pasted Sync Mode is added to the first available position in the list.

If there are no available slots then the Sync Mode will be added to the bottom of the list and assigned the lowest available index number. It is not possible to change the index number to rearrange the order. (This operation is valid only for tightening Sync Mode )

When pasting a Sync Mode, the connected Multistep Tightening Programs are also included. The loosening Sync Mode connected to that Multistep Tightening program is not copied by default. If there is no space to import the Multistep Tightening programs, because the maximum number has already been reached, then the whole paste operation will fail.

Exporting a Sync Mode

A Sync Mode can be exported from one controller and imported to another.

Export and Import are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers running the same software version and controller type.

  1. In the Plant structure , select a controller from the list.

  2. On the menu bar, select the Sync Mode tab. The workspace area displays a list of all the current Sync Modes.

  3. Select the check box of the Sync Mode to be exported.

  4. Select Manage, and then choose Export from the drop-down menu.

    A browser window opens for saving the export file.

  5. The default file name is <SyncModeName>.json, the exported file can be given any name with the *.json extension.
    Select Save.

Importing a Sync Mode

A Sync Mode can be exported from one controller and imported to another.

Export and Import are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers running the same software version and controller type.

  1. In the Plant structure , select a controller from the list.

  2. On the menu bar, select the Sync Mode tab. The workspace area displays a list of all the current Sync Modes.

  3. Select the Add command button and select Import.

  4. Select Open File and browse to select the relevant .json file.

  5. Select Add.

When importing a Sync Mode, the connected Multistep Tightening Programs are also included. If there is no space to import the Multistep Tightening Programs, because the maximum number has already been reached, then the whole import operation will fail.

Working with the Batch Sequence Tab

A Batch Sequence task is selected in a Virtual Station Task configuration, or by an external input source.

The tightening order can either follow a fixed scheme, or be left to the operator to decide in a free-order scheme. In either case, the sockets or signals can be used to communicate between the controller and the operator.

  • A Batch consists of one tightening program, which is repeated a number of times.

  • A Batch Sequence is an ordered set of batches, when the operation requires a combination of batches/tightening programs.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Batch Sequence .

The columns contain the following information:

Batch sequence information

Column

Description

Name

Each Batch Sequence name starts with an index number. The following characters can be changed to any user defined name.

Last changed

Expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Last changed by

Configuration data last changed by <user>.

Controller updated

Expressed in controller time.

Controller updated by

Controller updated by <user>.

The field Changed by and Controller updated by can be a registered ToolsTalk 2 user, created in the ToolsTalk 2 interface.

Command

Description

Manage

  • Export: Exports the Batch Sequence in .json format.

  • Delete: Removes selected Batch Sequence from the list. Mark the check box for one or more batch sequences and select Manage, and then Delete from the drop-down list. The selected Batch Sequences are removed and the list is updated.

The list of configurations will show irregularities in the index number scheme when a configuration is deleted. Index numbers do not change. Adding a new configuration will attempt to find the lowest free index position for a configuration.

Add

Create or Import a new Batch Sequence.

The Batch Sequence name consists of an index number combined with optional characters. The index position cannot be changed. A new configuration is given lowest possible available index number. The index number is important when using sources and identifier numbers to be part of the task selection process.

In this Section
  • Batch Sequence Configuration Workspace

Batch Sequence Configuration Workspace

The Batch Sequence configuration workspace shows the details of a single batch sequence with the following configuration menus:

  • Basic settings, with configuration name and description.

  • General settings, controlling the flow and order of tightenings.

  • Sequence configuration, creates the batch sequence from individual tightening programs.

Viewing the Batch Sequence menus
  1. Select a controller in the Plant Structure workspace .

  2. Select Batch Sequence in the menu bar.

  3. Double-click on the Name of the desired batch sequence to display the menus.

In this Section
  • Batch Sequence Configuration Menu
  • Adding a New Batch to a Batch Sequence
  • Copying and Pasting a Batch Sequence
  • Exporting a Batch Sequence
  • Importing a Batch Sequence
  • Deleting a Batch in a Batch Sequence

Batch Sequence Configuration Menu

The options in the Properties menu are as follows:

Parameter name

Description

Name

Default name Batch sequence. This can be edited.

Description

The optional description issued for the batch sequence.

Lock tool on batch sequence complete

On: The tool is locked when the batch sequence is completed.

Off: The tool remains unlocked when the batch sequence is completed.

Free order

No: The batches within the sequence are executed in the order listed by the index number. If sockets have been specified, the system will prompt for the next socket when the batch is to be performed.

Yes: The tightenings and the batches within the sequence can be executed in any order. The operator must indicate to the system which batch is to be executed by using the Socket selector bits, these act as identifier numbers.

Increment on NOK

No: The batch counter is not incremented if the tightening fails (NOK).

Yes: The batch counter is incremented if the tightening fails (NOK).

Max consecutive NOK

Max consecutive NOK is defined as the maximum allowed number of consecutive failed tightenings in a batch. If the value is reached, the event Too many NOK tightenings (4020) is displayed.

Decrement on loosening

Never: The batch counter is not decremented when a loosening is performed. This is the default value.

Always: The batch counter is decremented when a loosening is performed.

When last tightening OK: If the preceding tightening was OK, the batch counter is decremented when a loosening is performed.

Sequence abort time

On: The selected batch sequence will be aborted within a specified time limit. When you select On, the Abort time field opens.

Off: The selected batch sequence cannot be aborted.

Abort time

The number of seconds during which the selected batch sequence will be aborted. Allowed range is between 1 s to 1600 s.

A batch sequence is completed (and the tool may be locked) when either:

  • All tightenings have been completed with an OK or NOK result.

  • The Abort sequence signal terminates the task. Unperformed tightenings are reported with NOK result.

In the Sequence configuration menu, the different batches are combined into a batch sequence. A batch consists of one single tightening program that is repeated a number of times.

Each row in the Sequence configuration menu represents one single batch.

Workspace options

Column

Description

Check box.

Batch

Batch index number (order number within the sequence).

Tightening program

Drop-down menu. Select tightening program for this batch.

Batch size

The number of tightenings the batch will consist of.

Identifier number

An externally generated identifier number or a Socket selector position translated into an identifier number.

  • Using fixed order tightening, the operator is guided to pick the correct socket.

  • Using free order tightening, the corresponding batch is selected when the operator picks a socket.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Adding a New Batch to a Batch Sequence

  1. In the Plant structure , select a controller from the list.

  2. On the menu bar, select the Batch Sequence tab . The workspace displays a list of batch sequences.

  3. Select the Add command button in the Sequence configuration menu. The To create a new Batch Sequence window opens.

  4. Issue the Batch Sequence with a name, and then select ADD.

  5. Select the relevant parameters in the Properties.

  6. Select a Tightening Program for the batch in Sequence Configuration.

  7. Enter the Batch Size (the number of tightenings the batch will consist of).

  8. Enter an optional Identifier Number.

The new Batch Sequence will be issued the first free position in the sequence list. If there are no free slots it will be placed at the bottom of the list and assigned the lowest available index number. It is not possible to change the index number to rearrange the batch tightening order.

Copying and Pasting a Batch Sequence

Existing Batch Sequences can be copied and pasted on the same controller, or copied from one controller and then pasted to another.

Copy and Paste are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers of the same type and running the same software version.

When you copy an existing Batch Sequence, any programs associated with the Batch Sequence are also copied. These configurations are only copies and can be changed as per requirements.

  1. On the menu bar, select the Batch Sequence tab. The workspace displays a list of available Batch Sequences.

  2. Copy a Batch Sequence by either:

    • Right-clicking on the Batch Sequence to copy, and then choose Copy from the menu.

    • Or select multiple Batch Sequences by checking the check boxes in front of each row, right-clicking, and then choose Copy from the menu.

  3. In the Plant Structure , select the controller to paste the Batch Sequence to. On the menu bar, select the Batch Sequence tab, and then right-click anywhere in the workspace area and choose Paste. The pasted Batch Sequence is added to the first available position in the list.

If there are no available slots, then the Batch Sequence will be added to the bottom of the list and assigned the lowest available index number. It is not possible to change the index number to rearrange the order.

Exporting a Batch Sequence

A Batch Sequence can be exported from one controller and imported to another.

Export and Import are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers running the same software version and controller type.

When you export an existing batch sequence, any programs and modes associated with the batch sequence are also exported. These configurations are only copies and can be changed as per requirements.

  1. In the Plant structure , select a controller from the list.

  2. On the menu bar, select the Batch Sequence tab . The workspace displays a list of all the current batch sequences.

  3. Select the check box of the Batch Sequence to be exported.

  4. Select Manage, and then choose Export from the drop-down menu.

    A browser window opens for saving the export file.

  5. The default file name is <BatchSequenceName>.json, the exported file can be given any name with the *.json extension.
    Select Save.

Importing a Batch Sequence

A Batch Sequence can be exported from one controller and imported to another.

Export and Import are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers running the same software version and controller type.

When you import an existing batch sequence, any programs and modes associated with the batch sequence are also imported. These configurations are only copies and can be changed as per requirements.

  1. In the Plant structure , select a controller from the list.

  2. On the menu bar, select the Batch Sequence tab. The workspace area shows a list of all the current batch sequences.

  3. Select the Add command button and select Import.

  4. Select Open File and browse to select the relevant .json file.

  5. Select Add.

If there are no available slots, then the Batch Sequence will be added to the bottom of the list and assigned the lowest available index number. It is not possible to change the index number to rearrange the order.

Deleting a Batch in a Batch Sequence

  1. In Batch Sequence , select the check box for the batch to be deleted. Selecting the check box enables the MANAGE command button function.

  2. Select the MANAGE command button, and then select Delete from the drop-down list. The selected batches are removed from the list.

When a batch is deleted from the batch sequence, the index sequence is compressed and updated, leaving no gaps. The index number of the deleted batch sequence will be assigned automatically to the next sequence that is created.

Working with the Sources Tab

The selection of a task is done in the Task menu in the Virtual station configuration workspace.

External signals used as tasks for tightenings are configured in the Sources tab. Sources are accessories, or similar, connected to a virtual station. Two types of source tasks are available:

  • Source Tightening task

  • Source Batch task

Source Tightening is used to select a single sync mode.

Source Batch is used to select a batch sequence, a series of sync modes.

In this Section
  • Source Tightening Overview
  • Creating a Source Tightening
  • Creating a Source Batch
  • Significant Positions
  • Copying and Pasting a Source Batch or a Source Tightening
  • Exporting a Source Batch or a Source Tightening
  • Importing a Source Batch or a Source Tightening

Source Tightening Overview

The tightening menu shows a list of Source Batch and Source Tightening configurations. Separate lists can be linked to a Virtual Station by going to the Virtual Station in question, and in the Task properties selecting Choose. There, a Source can be chosen as a task. Source tightenings link a specific tightening program to an identifier number. When the identifier number is sent to the controller, the linked program will run over and over until a different signal is sent .

Parameter name

Description

Name

The name issued to the Source Tightening.

Description

The description of the Source Tightening.

Lock tool on batch sequence complete

On: The tool is locked when the batch sequence is completed.

Off: The tool remains unlocked when the batch sequence is completed.

Increment on NOK

On: The batch will advance even if a NOK tightening is performed.

Off : The batch will only advance if a successful tightening is performed.

Max consecutive NOK per program

  • On - Max consecutive NOK is configured on each individual program within the Source Tightening Task.

  • Off - The Max consecutive NOK is configured on Source Tightening task level.

Max consecutive NOK

Set the number of consecutive NOK results to be allowed. If the value is set to 0, then there is no check performed for NOK tightenings. When reaching max consecutive NOK's, the controller locks the tool and the source tightening execution is halted.

Batch control

Select how the source tightening is to be executed:

  • No batch control

  • Internal batch control: Configure how many times a source tightening should be repeated.

  • External batch control: Configure how many times a source tightening should be executed by using Open protocol or Fieldbus. Any configuration change clears the source tightening to start over from a clean and known state (the batch count in the batch will be reset to 0). Ongoing tightenings are able to finish before the changes take effect. 

Command

Description

Add

Adds a new row with lowest identifier available.

Delete

Removes selected sync mode from the list. Select the sync mode by selecting the corresponding check box.

Creating a Source Tightening

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to the Sources tab.

  3. Select Add, the Create new source configuration dialog window opens. Choose Tightening from the drop-down menu then select Add.

  4. Issue the Source Tightening with a name.

  5. Set the number of Max consecutive NOK results to be allowed. If the value is set to 0, then there is no check performed for NOK tightenings. When reaching max consecutive NOK's, the controller locks the tool and the source tighteining execution is halted.

  6. Select which Batch Control is to be used from the drop-down menu.

    Internal batch control: Configure how many times a source tightening should be repeated.

    External batch control: Configure how many times a source tightening should be executed by using Open protocol or Fieldbus. Any configuration change clears the source tightening so to start over from a clean and known state (the batch count in the batch will be reset to 0). Ongoing tightenings are able to finish before the changes take effect. 

  7. By default, only one editable Identifier number will be available when creating a new Source Tightening. Select Add to add more.

  8. Give every item an identifier number

  9. Choose a mode to link to each identifier number by selecting Mode and choosing from the list.

Creating a Source Batch

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to the Sources tab.

  3. Select Add, the Create new source configuration dialog window opens. Choose Batch from the drop-down menu then select Add.

  4. Issue the Source Batch with a name

  5. Set the Abort on new identifier to Yes if scanning a new identifier string should abort the previous scan.

  6. Select the Identifier method (String for text, or Number for numerical strings).

  7. Set Free order to On if the strings can be scanned in any order.

    Identifier strings can be made up of up to 4 different strings. When free order is set to No, the strings need to be scanned in a specific order for the system to recognize the string.

    An error may occur when Free order is set to On, and the lengths of the different strings are duplicated. The scanned sequence will then not activate a tightening program. To remedy this error, set Free order to Off, or adjust the string lengths.

  8. Issue the string a Name and enter the length of the string. (For further information on concatenating strings, see Relevant Information in the User Guide).

  9. Significant positions - the relevant positions in the string. (For further information on Significant Positions, see Relevant Information in the User Guide).

  10. Saved positions - which positions are to be logged by the system. (For further information about Saved Positions, see Relevant Information in the User Guide).

  11. Indicate which strings (in the String contains column) should be linked to which Batch sequence (in the Activates column). Select Add to add more strings.

Wildcards can be used when typing the "string contains". The wildcard(s) can be used at any position in the string. No Batch sequence is activated in case of an ambiguous matching result.

The wildcard is a . (period)

The Abort on new identifier controls how a second signal should be interpreted when a batch sequence has been activated and is ongoing.

If identifier numbers are used in the Batch sequence configuration , the input signal or the socket selector can be used to select a batch within a batch sequence.

The controller can be configured to select a batch sequence with input signal based on either an identifier number or an identifier string.

Relevant Information
  • Combining Identifier Strings
  • Configuring Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String
  • Saved Positions

Significant Positions

Significant positions are used to specify which characters in the barcode string to read when putting together the string to match with your pre-defined string. The number of significant positions must match the number of characters in the pre-defined strings.

In this Section
  • Configuring Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String
  • Combining Identifier Strings
  • Saved Positions

Configuring Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String

The positions in the barcode string are associated with a number between 1 and 1024. The first position of the string is 1 and the last is 1024.

The significant positions must be specified following the rules described in the table below. Barcode strings:

Description

Significant positions

Valid configuration

Barcode string to match with pre-defined string

Significant positions in order

1,2,3,7,8

Ok

ABCGH

Significant positions in optional order

7,1,2,3,8

Ok

GABCH

Range of numbers

1–3,7-8

Ok

ABCGH

Combining Identifier Strings

The identifier string that is used for matching is a combination of up to four strings from a factory management system or up to four scanner inputs that need to be combined into one string.

The Add and Delete command buttons manage how many strings are combined. The following parameters are available:

Parameters for combining identifier strings

Parameter

Description

Check box

Select an entry if it is to be deleted.

Name

The string must be given a name.

Length

The length of the string must be known and must be entered. This is important to be able to combine the correct string identifier.

Significant positions

The comma-separated positions or ranges (separated by hyphen) in the combined string that are used for matching.

Saved positions

The comma-separated positions or ranges in the strings that will be saved in the result.

If more than one identifier string is to be used, perform the following steps:

  1. Press the Add command button to create a new entry in the table.

  2. Issue the string a name.

  3. Enter the length of the string.

  4. Repeat steps 1-3 for every string to be added. Up to four strings can be combined.

The Start-End parameters in each row define the individual string positions in the combined string identifier that is used in the next step of the matching process.

The first part in the task selection process using an identifier string as an input, is to define which positions in the string that are to be activated:

  • Enter the significant positions, to define which positions in the identifier string will be used for matching. The positions must be either comma-separated, or by range.

Saved Positions

Saved positions is a field where the user can indicate which parts of each string used in the Source Batch will be saved, and how they will be represented in the log. In this field, indicate the positions in the string that need to be saved. Positions can constitute only parts of the entire string. If the field is left empty, the entire (concatenated) string will be saved. The table below shows some examples of saved position combinations.

Saved position values are comma-separated (without spaces), and ranges are indicated using a hyphen.

Identifier string

Positions

String 1: 1234567

1-7

String 2: abcdef

8-13

String 3: GHIJKL

14-19

String 4: 890

20-22

Saved position examples

Saved positions

Saved results

(empty)

1234567abcdefGHIJKL890

1-3,9,11,15,20-22

123bdH890

8-12,1-7,19,20-21 will be changed automatically to: 1-12,19-21

1234567abcdeL89

Copying and Pasting a Source Batch or a Source Tightening

Existing Source batches or Source tightenings can be copied and pasted on the same controller, or copied from one controller and then pasted to another.

Copy and Paste are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers of the same type and running the same software version.

When you copy an existing Source batch or a Source tightening, any programs and modes associated with the tightening or batch sequence are also copied. These configurations are only copies and can be changed as per requirements.

  1. On the menu bar, select the Sources tab. The workspace displays a list of available Source batches and Source tightenings.

  2. Copy a Source batch or source tightening by either:

    • Right-clicking on the Source batch or Source tightening to copy, and then choose Copy from the menu.

    • Or select multiple Source batches or Source tightenings by checking the check boxes in front of each row, right-clicking, and then choose Copy from the menu.

  3. In the Plant Structure , select the controller to paste the Source to. On the menu bar, select the Sources tab, and then right-click anywhere in the workspace area and select Paste.

The new Source batch or Source tightening will be issued the first free position in the sequence list. If there are no free slots it will be placed at the bottom of the list and assigned the lowest available index number. It is not possible to change the index number.

Exporting a Source Batch or a Source Tightening

A Source batch or Source tightening can be exported from one controller and imported to another.

Export and Import are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers of the same type and running the same software version.

When you export an existing Source batch or a Source tightening, any programs and modes associated with the tightening or batch sequence are also exported. These configurations are only copies and can be changed as per requirements.

  1. In the Plant structure , select a controller from the list.

  2. On the menu bar, select the Sources tab . The workspace displays a list of all the current Source batches and Source tightenings.

  3. Select the check box of the Source batch or tightening to be exported.

  4. Select Manage, and then choose Export from the drop-down menu.

    A browser window opens for saving the export file.

  5. The default file name is <SourceBatch>.json or <SourceTightening>.json , the exported file can be given any name with the *.json extension.
    Select Save.

Importing a Source Batch or a Source Tightening

A Source batch or Source tightening can be exported from one controller and imported to another.

Export and Import are only possible if they are performed on the same controller, or different controllers of the same type and running the same software version.

When you import an existing Source batch or a Source tightening, any programs and modes associated with the tightening or batch sequence are also imported. These configurations are only copies and can be changed as per requirements.

  1. In the Plant structure , select a controller from the list.

  2. On the menu bar, select the Sources tab . The workspace area shows a list of all the current Source batches and Source tightenings.

  3. Select the Add command button and select Import.

  4. Select Open File and browse to select the relevant .json file.

  5. Select Add.

    The new Source batch or Source Tightening will be issued the first free position in the sequence list. If there are no free slots it will be placed at the bottom of the list and assigned the lowest available index number. It is not possible to change the index number.

Working with the Configurations Tab

Scanners, Stacklights and Tools are just some of the examples of device types that are connected to the controller via the I/O bus. Multiple devices can be connected to the I/O bus and each type of device has its own set of configuration parameters. Before operation, the configurations must be assigned to a Virtual Station.

Viewing Existing Configurations

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Select the Configurations tab in the menu bar.

    The workspace area shows a list of all the current configurations.

  3. Double-click on a row in the workspace list to view details of the selected configuration.

    The workspace area shows the configuration menus where it is possible to configure the selected device.

    Configuration overview list

    Column

    Description

    Check box

    Select to get access to the Manage command button list.

    Name

    Shows the name of the controller template.

    Type

    Type of configuration set-up.

    Library link

    Displays Yes if there is a library link for the configuration.

    Last changed

    Last changes made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

    Changed by

    Last changes made, by <user>

    Controller updated

    Last changes made, expressed in controller time.

    Controller updated by

    Last update of the controller made, by <user>

    The list can be sorted by clicking in the header of each column.

In this Section
  • Adding a Configuration
  • Importing a Configuration
  • Deleting a Configuration
  • Configuration Types

Adding a Configuration

  1. In Configurations , select ADD. The Create new configuration dialog window opens.

  2. Select type of device from the drop-down list, and then select ADD

  3. In the Properties menu, type in a configuration name and a description.

Depending on selected type of device, each configuration has their own set of input and output signals. How to configure each type of device is described separately.

Relevant Information
  • General Virtual Station
  • Indicatorbox

Importing a Configuration

  1. In Configurations , select Add. The Create new configuration dialog window opens.

  2. Select the Import tab.

  3. Select Open file.

    A browser window opens for reading the import file.

  4. Select the desired import file. The file must be in the format <configuration_name>.json. Select Open.

  5. Select Add in the dialog window.

Deleting a Configuration

  1. In Configurations , select the check box for the configuration to be deleted. Selecting the check box enables the MANAGE command button function.

  2. Select MANAGE and then select Delete from the drop-down menu.

The selected configurations are removed from the list.

A configuration can only be deleted when it is not assigned to a Virtual Station.

Configuration Types

  • Internal I/O
  • I/O Expander
  • Operator Panel
  • Stacklight
  • Indicatorbox
    • Configuring the Indicatorbox
  • Tool Configuration
  • Scanner
    • Scanner Configuration
  • General Virtual Station
    • Enabling and Disabling the Tightening Settings
  • Socket Selector
    • Viewing/Editing or Creating a Socket Selector Configuration
    • Socket Selector Control Switch

Internal I/O

The controller has two screw terminals located on the inside. They can be used to connect digital input and output signals.

All the digital input signals and the digital output signals that are listed in the Reference section can be routed to the internal I/O terminals.

For electrical specification and connections, see the controller documentation.

How to assign an accessory configuration to a Virtual Station is described in the Virtual Station section.

Relevant Information
  • Unassigning an Accessory from a Virtual Station

I/O Expander

The I/O expander is connected to the I/O bus and provides an extension to connect digital input and output signals. Multiple expanders can be connected. Read the I/O expander documentation for address configuration and specifications of connections.

How to assign an accessory configuration to a Virtual Station is described in the Virtual Station section.

Relevant Information
  • Unassigning an Accessory from a Virtual Station

Operator Panel

The Operator Panel is connected to the I/O bus and provides a configurable digital communication link between an operator and the controller. Lamps, buttons, buzzers and switches are used in the communication. Read the operator panel documentation for address configuration and specifications of connections.

How to assign an accessory configuration to a Virtual Station is described in the Virtual Station section.

Relevant Information
  • Unassigning an Accessory from a Virtual Station

Stacklight

The Stacklight provides long distance visual communication from the controller to the operator. In addition to the lights, the accessory can be equipped with a button, key switch, buzzer and I/O connections.

The Stacklight is connected to the controller using the I/O bus. Multiple accessories can be connected on the I/O bus. Read the Stacklight documentation for address configuration and specifications of the connections.

How to assign an accessory configuration to a Virtual Station is described under the Virtual Station icon .

Indicatorbox

The Indicatorbox is a flexible display indicator used to display status signals from the controller. The display is equipped with 20 dual color LEDs, these are mounted in a square with five LEDs at each side.

In this Section
  • Configuring the Indicatorbox

Configuring the Indicatorbox

Adding an LED configuration
  1. Select Indicatorbox in the Configurations menu.

  2. To add an LED click on the Add button.

  3. Select LED letter in the Position box according to the illustration.

  4. Select signal for red and green LED.

To remove an LED, select the LED and click on the DELETE button.

Tool Configuration

With the Tool Configuration it is possible to activate and configure various functions related to the tool. Each tool configuration can be mapped to a tool in Hardware Layout Configuration.

To view or edit a tool configuration menu:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Click Configurations in the Menu bar.

    The workspace area displays the current accessory configurations.

  3. Add a new configuration or double click on an existing configuration with the type being a tool configuration.

  4. Make necessary configurations. The parameters are described in each section.

The tool configuration is divided into the following menus:

Menu

Description

Properties

Configuration name and description and a tool type filter.

General

General parameters for the tool.

Dual transducer

Dual transducer functionality.

Properties

The Tool configuration should be given a unique name. An optional description field is also available.

The accessory configuration list displays all configurations in an alphabetical order

To view or edit a tool configuration menu:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Select the Configuration icon in the menu bar.

    The workspace area shows a list of all the current accessory configurations.

  3. Double-click on the name of the selected Tool configuration.

    The workspace area shows the details of the current configuration and is divided into different menus, one for each topic.

  4. Enter a configuration name and a description in the Properties menu.

  5. Select a tool type from the Filter by tool type drop-down menu.

    As the number of tools grow, the number of menus grow as well. To increase the visual comfort in the workspace, it is possible to filter menus and only show what is relevant for one selected tool type. The filter is set in the Properties menu. If No tool is selected, all the possible tool configuration parameters are displayed.

General

Use Start source to set how to start the tool.

Start source

Description

Trigger only

Press the tool trigger to start the tightening.

Trigger OR Push

Press the tool trigger or push the tool against the joint to start the tightening.

Trigger AND Push

Press the tool trigger and push the tool against the joint to start the tightening.

Push only

Push the tool against the joint to start the tightening.

Digital input

Using an external digital input signal to trigger the start of the tightening.

Dual transducers

Dual transducer

Description

Primary torque transducer

The torque transducer used for tightening.
The first transducer is controlling and the second transducer is monitoring. It is not possible to switch between the main and the secondary transducer.

Primary angle transducer

The angle transducer used for tightening.
The first transducer is controlling and the second transducer is monitoring. It is not possible to switch between the main and the secondary transducer.

Required dual torque

If the connected tool must have dual torque transducers (that are not disabled) to be able to run a tightening.

Required dual angle

If the connected tool must have dual angle transducers (that are not disabled) to be able to run a tightening.

Secondary torque in trace

If the values from the secondary torque transducer is included in the trace.

Secondary angle in trace

If the values from the secondary angle transducer is included in the trace.

Enable double torque restriction

If the double torque transducer restriction is active.

Maximum torque difference

The limit for the double torque difference restriction.

Enable double angle restriction

If the double angle transducer restriction is active.

Maximum angle difference

The limit for the double angle difference restriction.

Scanner

The Scanner is an accessory, it is installed directly to the controller via a USB cable.

In the Scanner configuration it is possible to configure the Pass through as On or Off. As default the configuration is Off. When Pass through is activated (set to On), the scanned barcode information is sent to either SoftPLC, or Fieldbus for decoding.

  1. In the Plant structure workspace , select a controller.

  2. In the tab menu bar in the workspace area, select the Configurations icon .

    The workspace area displays a list of configurations.

  3. Double-click on a configuration row that has Scanner in the Type column.

    Alternatively, select Add to create a new scanner configuration.

Scanner options

Parameter

Description

Name

Optional name for the configuration

Description

Optional configuration description

Pass through = On

The scanned barcode is sent to either SoftPLC, or Fieldbus to be decoded

Pass through = Off

The scanned barcode is decoded in the controller

In this Section
  • Scanner Configuration

Scanner Configuration

The Scanner is a tool accessory that is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus. It has one function button that activates the Scanner.

In the Scanner configuration it is possible to configure the Pass through as On or Off. As default the configuration is Off. When Pass through is activated, On, the scanned barcode information is sent to either SoftPLC, or Fieldbus for decoding.

Configuring the Scanner

  1. In the Plant structure workspace , select a controller.

  2. In the tab menu bar in the workspace area, select the Configurations icon .

    The workspace area displays a list of configurations.

  3. Click Add to create a new configuration.

  4. Select Scanner from the Type of configuration drop-down

    and click Add

  5. Make the selected configuration. The configurations are auto saved in ToolsTalk 2.

ST Scanner options.

Parameter

Description

Pass through = On

The scanned barcode is sent to either SoftPLC, or Fieldbus to be decoded

Pass through = Off

The scanned barcode is decoded in the controller

How to assign an accessory configuration to a virtual station is described in the Virtual station section.

General Virtual Station

Adding a General Virtual Station
  1. In the Plant structure workspace , select a controller.

  2. In the tab menu bar in the workspace area, select the Configurations icon .

    The workspace area displays a list of configurations.

  3. Double-click on a configuration row that has General Virtual Station in the Type column.

    Alternatively, select Add to create a new General Virtual Station configuration .

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Optional name for the configuration

Description

Optional configuration description

The non-tightening results can either be reported unfiltered (default), or configured to report a selection of the results. Up to 16 General Virtual Station configurations can be created.

Non-tightening results affected:

  • Loosening

  • Batch increment

  • Batch decrement

  • Reset batch

  • Bypass tightening program

  • Abort batch sequence

  • Reset batch sequence

When using a StepSync or a Flex controller the following parameter is also visible in the General Virtual Station configuration.

Fixtured Stations

Auto Enable can use one of the following settings, the default setting is Never.

Setting

Description

Never

Input Enable Operation must be set high to be able to run a tightening.

Always

It is always possible to run tightenings regardless of the status of input Enable Operation.

Creating a Non-tightening result filter

Default is set to "On" - all results will be reported. Switch to "Off" to filter the results, only filters set to "On" are reported.

The non-tightening results will always be displayed in the controller and web user interface, regardless of what is filtered to the report.

To apply the General Virtual Station configuration, assign it to a Virtual Station in the Virtual Station section.

Only unassigned General Virtual Station configurations can be deleted.

Relevant Information
  • Assigning a General Virtual Station Configuration
  • Global Configurations Library - Creating a Global Configuration From An Existing
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
  • Working with the Configurations Tab
In this Section
  • Enabling and Disabling the Tightening Settings

Enabling and Disabling the Tightening Settings

The General Virtual Station configuration contains a tightening section, which is used to set parameters for Disable tightening and Disable loosening.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to theConfigurations tab in the menu bar.

    The workspace area displays the available Configurations.

  3. Double-click on an existing General Virtual Station to configure, or select Add to create a new one to configure.

  4. Make the relevant selections in the Tightening Settings parameters, according to the information in the tables below.

Unlock tool on loosening

Parameter Value

Description

Off

A disabled tool will remain disabled regardless of the loosening status.

On OK

A disabled tool will be unlocked after an OK loosening has been performed.

Always

A disabled tool will be unlocked as soon as a loosening has been performed, regardless of the loosening status.

Disable loosening options

Disable loosening

Description

Off

Disable loosening is Off. An operator can always loosen a screw.

On OK tightening

Disable loosening for an OK tightening. An operator cannot loosen a screw that was terminated with tightening OK.

On NOK tightening

Disable loosening for an NOK tightening. An operator cannot loosen a screw that was terminated with tightening NOK.

Always

Disable loosening is always ON. An operator can never loosen a screw.

Disable tightening options

Disable tightening

Description

Off

Disable tightening is Off. An operator can always tighten a screw.

On OK tightening

Disable tightening after an OK tightening. An operator cannot tighten another screw if the current tightening terminated with OK.

On NOK tightening

Disable tightening after a NOK tightening. An operator cannot tighten another screw if the current tightening terminated with NOK.

After every tightening

Disable tightening is activated after every tightening. An operator cannot tighten another screw until the current tightening is terminated.

Tool lock behavior

Tool lock behavior is set to Off by default. This behavior can be overridden to allow the tool to be unlocked by the operator by performing a loosening.

Allowing a disabled tool to unlock after loosening

  1. In the configuration used by the tool (set in the Virtual Station the tool is connected to), set the Unlock tool on loosening to On OK or Always.

    In order to enable the setting above, three conditions need to be met:

    1. The Disable loosening parameter cannot be set to Off or Always.

    2. The Disable loosening value cannot be set to the same value as the Disable tightening.

    3. The tightening program used must have loosening enabled.

When the tool is locked for either tightening or loosening due to a disable state, it can be unlocked by any of the following input signals:

  • Master_Unlock

  • Unlock_Tool_On_Disable

This input signal can be sent to the controller either from an accessory, from a programable tool accessory, or from the Fieldbus unit.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Socket Selector

  • Viewing/Editing or Creating a Socket Selector Configuration
  • Socket Selector Control Switch

Viewing/Editing or Creating a Socket Selector Configuration

The Socket Selector is connected to the I/O and assists the operator in selecting the correct socket for the tightening procedure.

Viewing/Editing a Socket Selector Configuration
  1. Select a controller in the Plant Structure .

  2. Go to Configurations .

    The workspace area displays a list of created configurations for the selected controller.

  3. Double-click on the name of the selected Socket Selector configuration in order to view or edit the configuration.

Creating a Socket Selector Configuration
  1. In Configurations , selectAdd.

  2. The Create new configuration dialog window is displayed. Choose Socket Selector form the drop-down list, and then select Add.

  3. In the Properties area of the menu, enter a configuration name and description.

  4. In the Socket Selector Configuration, choose Control type Auto or External.

  5. For each socket position that should be active, select the check box .

  6. For each socket position that should be inactive, clear the check box.

  7. To add or remove a group of four sockets, select either Add or Remove.

Up to 32 socket selector positions can be used.

More information on how a configuration is addressed and assigned to a Virtual Station is given in the Virtual Station section .

Socket Selector Control Switch

The Control switch has two positions:

Position

Description

Auto

The controller controls the LED lamps on the Socket Selector, which guide the operator to the correct socket selection.

External

The controller has no control of the socket selector. All functionality of the LED lamps is controlled by an external control system through the Open Protocol communication or by the Fieldbus module.

Working with the Tools Tab

The Tools workspace displays a list of tools connected to the controller. The displayed menus differ between the controllers for fixtured tools and controllers for handheld tools and provide detailed information about connected tools.

In the menu Settings, tool alarms can be set. Trigger points for these alarms are taken from the Tools menu.

To view the tool menus:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Tools section.

    A list of tools connected to the controller is displayed.

    Column

    Description

    Tool type

    Describes the type of the tool.

    Model

    A detailed model number of the tool.

    Serial number

    The serial number of the tool.

    MAC address

    The MAC address is only visible if the tool has got a MAC address.

    Software version

    The software version of the tool.

    Max torque

    The maximum torque value the tool can produce.

    Max torque with TurboTight

    The maximum torque value the tool can produce when using the TurboTight strategy.

    Applicable only to certain tools.

    Max torque with TensorPulse

    The maximum torque value the tool can produce when using the TensorPulse strategy.

    Applicable only to certain tools.

    Max speed

    The maximum rotation speed of the tool.

    Next calibration

    Date for the next calibration of the tool.

    Virtual station

    The name of the virtual station to which the tool is connected.

    Channel

    The channel number of the tool.

  3. Double-click on one of the tools in the table for more detailed information.

How to connect a tool or how to make a wireless pairing is described in the controller manual.

General information

The menu is valid for a controller that supports fixtured tools or handheld tools.

Information

Description

Model

Tool model denomination.

Serial number

Tool serial number.

MAC address

The MAC address is only visible if the tools have a MAC address.

Product number

The same as ordering number.

Software version

Tool software version number.

The general tool information is provided by the tool itself to the controller and to ToolsTalk 2.

Limits

The menu is valid for a controller that supports fixtured tools or handheld tools.

Information

Description

Max torque

The maximum torque the tool can use for a tightening.

Max speed

The maximum rotation speed of the tool.

Min torque

The minimum torque the tool can use for a tightening.

Gear ratio

The ratio of the angular velocity of the input gear to the angular velocity of the output gear.

The tool limit information is provided by the tool itself to the controller and to ToolsTalk 2.

Connection

Connection to the controller and to which virtual station it is assigned.

Service settings

Calibration

The menu is used to control how well a tool corresponds to a reference transducer and how to adjust differences.

The calibration value is stored in the tool memory and is used to adjust the torque value given by the tool’s torque transducer so that the correct torque value is displayed on the controller. The controller displays last calibration date.

Tool calibration is carried out at the controller and uses a torque reference transducer. This process is described in the Power Focus 6000 controller manual.

Store the new calibration value in the tool memory by entering the calculated value, and then click Set.

Parameter

Description

Last calibrated

Date for last calibration.

Calibration value

Enter the measured and calculated value into the parameter entry box.

Next calibration

Due date for next calibration.

Set

Stores the entered values.

Maintenance

The tool stores a service interval number and counts how many tightenings that can be performed before the next tool maintenance or service should be performed.

Parameter

Description

Last service

Date and time when last service was performed. The last service date is set at the repair workshop. The Last service date is set to current date and time when the Reset button is pressed.

Total tightenings at service

The Total tightenings at service is the total number of tightenings performed by the tool since it was used for the first time. This value is updated at service, and will remain the same until the next service.

Remaining tightenings

Total number of tightenings left until the service interval is reached.

Service interval

Number of tightenings to be performed before the next service. Can be set in multiples of 10 000.

Set

The command stores the value entered in the Service interval parameter entry field and adjusts the value to a multiple of 10 000.

Reset service counter/data

The Reset command resets the counter and sets the Last service date to the current date.

Transducer information

A tool can have one main and one secondary torque transducers and one main and one secondary angle transducers. For each transducer (torque or angle), the information shows here.

Angle transducer

Information

Description

Enabled

Indicates if the transducer is enabled.

Gear ratio

The gear ratio between the transducer and the out-going shaft of the tool.

Wind-up

The wind-up compensation factor for the angle transducer.

Torque transducer

Information

Description

Enabled

Indicates if the transducer is enabled.

Serial Number

Serial number of the transducer as a string.

Article Number

Article number of the transducer as a string.

Calibration Value

Calibration value for the transducer expressed in Nm.

Health

The menu provides data from environmental monitors. The equipment measures parameters regularly and stores them.

Parameter

Description

Value

Refresh

Command button: read tool value.

History

Command button:
History window opens to display latest temperature readings.

Tool motor temperature

Latest temperature recording expressed in month/day/year hours:minutes:seconds.

Degree C or F

Tool electronics temperature

Latest temperature recording expressed in month/day/year hours:minutes:seconds.

Degree C or F

Zero offset and shunt limits

A tool can have one main and one secondary torque transducers. For each torque transducer, the limits show here.

Information

Description

Shunt Limit

Maximum allowed measured shunt calibration value in %.

Shunt Drift Limit

Maximum allowed change in measured shunt calibration value in %.

Zero Offset Limit

Maximum allowed Zero offset compensation in %.

Zero Offset Drift Limit

Maximum allowed change in the zero offset compensation in %.

Working with the Virtual Station Tab

The Virtual Station tab is located in the controller menu bar when a controller has been selected in the Plant structure

A virtual station is a software abstraction of a controller. Within one controller it is possible to create several virtual stations. Each virtual station behaves like a controller. The various configurations can be assigned to virtual stations as needed.

It is possible to select a task, assign accessory configurations, assign a tool, monitor and manipulate incoming and outgoing signals via diagnostics and set communication protocol parameters from the virtual station menu. The virtual station icon is available for both a FlexController and a Power Focus 6000 controller.

The virtual station concept is not valid for a FlexController. The software architectural design is maintained for both controller types, and therefore the virtual station appears in the FlexController interface.

Controller features, such as the Low Reaction Tightening Strategies and controller-wide functions among others, require licenses distributed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). Whereas configuration of features is possible without specific licenses, the assignment and use of those features will require the correct license to be installed on the controller. Please refer to Licenses (FMS) for more detailed information on licenses.

In this Section
  • Virtual Station Overview
  • Virtual Station - Properties
  • Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station
  • Virtual Station - Protocols
  • Fieldbus Mapping in a Virtual Station
  • Assigning Accessories to a Virtual Station
  • Unassigning an Accessory from a Virtual Station
  • Assigning a General Virtual Station Configuration

Virtual Station Overview

To open the Virtual station workspace and view the list of virtual stations:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Select the Virtual station tab in the menu bar.

    The workspace area displays a list of virtual stations in the controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

Virtual station workspace information

Column

Description

Check box

Selects a virtual station.

Name

Shows the name of the virtual station.

Changed by

Which user that made changes

Controller updated

Last time the controller was updated

Controller updated by

Which user that has updated the controller

Virtual station workspace command buttons

Command

Description

Add

Creates a new virtual station.

Delete

Removes the selected virtual stations from the list.

To access the virtual station configuration menu:

Navigating to Virtual station configuration

  1. In the Plant structure workspace select a controller .

  2. Select the Virtual Station tab .
    The virtual station overview shows a list of virtual stations for the selected controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

  3. Double-click on a virtual station to open an existing configuration, or click Add to create a new virtual station configuration.

The following menus are displayed:

Workspace information

Menu

Description

Properties

Issues the configuration a name and description. Optional.

Protocols

Activation and configuration of external communication protocols.

Tool

Assigns a tool to the virtual station.

Tool configuration

Assigns a tool configuration to the virtual station.

Fieldbus mapping

Displays a fieldbus mapping if it is configured and assigned to the controller. This field is information only. The actual fieldbus mapping and configuration is done in theFieldbus and SoftPLC tab.

Task

Assigns a task to the virtual station or configures how a source signal selects the task to be performed.

Accessories

Assigns an accessory configuration and an address to an accessory and assigns the combination to a virtual station.

General

Used when assigning a General Virtual Station.

Manual Mode

Used to configure the Manual Mode function.

Licenses

Used for assigning and removing licenses and features to a virtual station.

For a FlexController, only the Properties, Fieldbus mapping and Task menus are available.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Virtual Station - Properties

A virtual station must have a name. This is configured in the Properties menu. The default name is Virtual station <index nr>. An optional description field is also available.

If the name field is left blank, a red error indicator is displayed .

Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station

The Task menu in the Virtual station window controls the task selection.

The Task menu is used to assign a task to the virtual station.

Task menu information

Function

Description

Name

Currently assigned task to the virtual station.

Unassign

Command button.

Deselects any task from the virtual station.

Choose

Command button.

Change the task manually or configure external sources to select a task. The Choose task pop-up window opens to configure the task selection.

Change

Command button.

If a task is already selected, then the Choose command button is replaced by Change. Select Change to select a new task.

Navigating to Virtual station configuration

  1. In the Plant structure workspace select a controller .

  2. Select the Virtual Station tab .
    The virtual station overview shows a list of virtual stations for the selected controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

  3. Double-click on a virtual station to open an existing configuration, or click Add to create a new virtual station configuration.

  1. Click Choose in the Task menu.

    The Choose task pop-up window appears.

  2. Select the desired task in the Sync Mode, Sources or Batch sequence tab.

  3. Click Choose. The Choose task pop-up window is closed.

    The Close button closes the pop-up window without making any changes.

  4. Update the controller through the push function.

The name field is updated in the Task menu.

The task selection using sources and identifier numbers and identifier strings to select a task is described in detail in the documentation for the sources configuration.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Virtual Station - Protocols

The Protocols menu may contain one or more implemented communication protocols and their parameter settings. The availability of protocols depends on the IAM license.

Customer specific communication protocols are also configured in the Protocols menu.

In this Section
  • Open Protocol

Open Protocol

Configuring open protocol

  1. In the Plant structure workspace select a controller .

  2. Select the Virtual Station tab .
    The virtual station overview shows a list of virtual stations for the selected controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

  3. Double-click on a virtual station to open an existing configuration, or click Add to create a new virtual station configuration.

  4. Click on Configure in the Protocols menu.

  • The virtual station Open protocol configuration switch allows a user to enable or to disable Open protocol communication between a virtual station and the integrator, which is part of the factory control equipment.

    Select On or Off to enable or disable the Open protocol communication

    The Open protocol uses the same factory ethernet connection on the controller that is used for configuration or for delivering tightening results.

    Each virtual station is uniquely identified by a port number. For each virtual station using the open protocol, a port number must be entered in the port field.

  • The legacy counter setting counts all tightenings in a sequence and outputs that number to secondary systems. To enable this setting, set Use legacy counter to On.

  • SoftPLC Index is used to map where in the shared memory the Open Protocol commands are to be written. The default value is 1 but it is possible to enter values 1 to 6.

     

As the default value for SoftPLC Index is always 1 and no check is made if it already has been used, there is a possibility that you may have configured the system so that the same index is configured several times when adding Virtual stations. In this case the Soft PLC will not be able to determine from which Virtual Station the incoming MID is originating from.

Fieldbus Mapping in a Virtual Station

A controller may have one Fieldbus communication module installed. This communication module serves all the virtual stations. The Fieldbus mapping menu shows which fieldbus configuration is mapped to the controller. Fieldbus is configured and the configurations are assigned and mapped in Fieldbus and SoftPLC

In this Section
  • Fieldbus Diagnostics

Fieldbus Diagnostics

To access the Fieldbus mapping diagnose function:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Virtual Station .

    The workspace area displays a list of virtual stations in the controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

  3. Double-click on a virtual station name to open an existing configuration or select Add to create a new virtual station configuration.

  4. The workspace shows the menu, including mapped fieldbus.

  5. Click the Diagnose button to enter the Fieldbus diagnose function.

The fieldbus diagnostics function provides the possibility to Monitor the incoming and outgoing signals, sent to and received from the fieldbus. It is also possible to manipulate the information, compose and send frames, via Forced mode. Fieldbus diagnostics can be used from:

  • Controller GUI

  • Web GUI

  • ToolsTalk

Fieldbus diagnostics - forced mode

Diagnostics mode

Activate Monitor mode or Forced mode.

Monitor mode: In monitoring mode it is possible to see the status of all configured fields in the incoming and outgoing frames, sent to and received from the fieldbus. Whenever there is a change in any of the bits of a received frame, the view is updated.

Forced mode: When entering forced mode, the data will freeze in its current state, the frame is locked. In forced mode it is possible to activate and deactivate signals manually, or enter values and force them on one or more signals. This is possible on the incoming frame, the outgoing frame, or both.

Boolean converter

Switch between System view and Bus view. The converter makes it possible to invert the signals sent to or received from the fieldbus.

Type

Type of signal.

Byte

Location in frame.

Bit

Location in frame.

Length

Length of signal in frame.

Name

Name of signal.

Has converter

Has converter is Yes if any converter is configured.

If Yes, the converter can be used to invert the signal. If No, the converter is not applicable.

Value

The Value column shows a list of signals and their values. The value of each signal in the incoming and outgoing frame is seen in the following formats: boolean, integer or string, depending on type. The values are editable in Forced mode. It is possible to change one signal, a few signals or all signals in the same frame.

After changing the values, click Send frame button for the new frame to be pushed to the controller and for the new values to be applied.

When leaving diagnostics mode, all values are reverted to as they were in the last saved frame of incoming and outgoing signals.

Only one diagnostics session can be active at a time. If the diagnostics is already in use, an information message is shown on the screen.

Assigning Accessories to a Virtual Station

This menu is only valid for a controller that supports a handheld tool.

A controller may have several accessories connected through a CAN bus. Each accessory must have a unique address on the bus within the range 1-15. It is possible to assign several accessories to a virtual station.

An accessory must have an accessory configuration assigned to it, before it is possible to assign the accessory to the virtual station.

To view the current accessory assignment to a virtual station:

Navigating to Virtual station configuration

  1. In the Plant structure workspace select a controller .

  2. Select the Virtual Station tab .
    The virtual station overview shows a list of virtual stations for the selected controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

  3. Double-click on a virtual station to open an existing configuration, or click Add to create a new virtual station configuration.

Accessories menu information

Function

Description

Check box

Selects an accessory configuration that can be unassigned from the virtual station.

Name

Name of the configuration assigned to the accessory.

Type

Type of accessory.

CAN node

The CAN address of the accessory.

Serial number

The serial number of the accessory.

Status

Can be either:

  • Connected.

  • Assigned but not connected.

The CAN node column shows the used addresses which can not be used when new accessories are connected. An assignment for a socket selector can include multiple addresses.

For socket selectors the order of the CAN nodes is important. The lowest position in the first socket selector is the first position in the assignment.

Accessory menu command buttons

Function

Description

Unassign

The selected accessory is unassigned from the virtual station. The accessory remains connected to the controller.

Choose

Adds a new accessory. The Accessories pop-up window opens.

Diagnose

Monitoring of I/O signal behavior and possibility to force signals to a desired state between controller internal logic and the accessory.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
In this Section
  • Adding an Accessory to a Virtual Station

Adding an Accessory to a Virtual Station

The selected accessory must have a unique and valid CAN bus address. An accessory configuration is assigned to an accessory and the accessory is assigned to a virtual station.

Navigating to Virtual station configuration

  1. In the Plant structure workspace select a controller .

  2. Select the Virtual Station tab .
    The virtual station overview shows a list of virtual stations for the selected controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

  3. Double-click on a virtual station to open an existing configuration, or click Add to create a new virtual station configuration.

To assign an accessory to the virtual station:

  1. Click the Choose button in the Accessories menu to open up the Accessories pop-up window.

  2. Select an accessory type from one of the tabs.

    • Internal I/O

    • Socket selector

    • I/O expander

    • Operator panel

    • Stacklight

    • Scanner

    • Indicatorbox

  3. Check to select a configuration in the list of Configurations.

  4. Check select an address in the list of Available CAN nodes if applicable.

  5. Click the Choose button and add one of the accessory options.

  6. Repeat the procedure for each accessory that is to be assigned to the virtual station.

  7. Click the Cancel button to close the pop-up window.

    The Accessories menu is updated and shows new assigned configurations.

An accessory address is set by a rotary switch on the accessory. See detailed product information documents for the accessory. Accessory address range is between 1 and 15.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Unassigning an Accessory from a Virtual Station

To unassign an accessory configuration and remove the connection to a virtual station, perform the following steps:

Navigating to Virtual station configuration

  1. In the Plant structure workspace select a controller .

  2. Select the Virtual Station tab .
    The virtual station overview shows a list of virtual stations for the selected controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

  3. Double-click on a virtual station to open an existing configuration, or click Add to create a new virtual station configuration.

  1. Mark the check box of the accessory configurations that is to be unassigned in the Accessories menu.

  2. Select the Unassign command button in the Accessories menu.

  3. To update the controller with any changes, select the Push changes command button .

The list in the accessory menu will be updated.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Assigning a General Virtual Station Configuration

Navigating to Virtual station configuration

  1. In the Plant structure workspace select a controller .

  2. Select the Virtual Station tab .
    The virtual station overview shows a list of virtual stations for the selected controller. The list is empty if no virtual stations have been created.

  3. Double-click on a virtual station to open an existing configuration, or click Add to create a new virtual station configuration.

To assign a General configuration to the virtual station

  1. In the virtual station configuration workspace, go to the General area.

  2. Select Change. In the pop-up window: The listed General configurations are the ones added in Configurations .

  3. Select one of the general configurations and select the Change button.

    The General menu is updated with the selected general configuration.

Only unassigned general virtual station configurations can be deleted.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
  • Working with the Configurations Tab

Working with the Controller Information Tab

The menus in the Controller Information tab provide information about a single selected controller.

Viewing the Controller Information menus:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to theController tab.

    The workspace area displays the Controller menus.

In the Controller workspace, the following menus are shown:

Controller information

Menu

Functionality

Controller information

Provides general information about the controller and the IAM module.

Licenses

Provides information about the different license types which have been issued to the controller.

Software

Provides information about the software configuration of the controller.

Hardware

Provides information about the hardware configuration of the PF6 controller.

Export / Import

Provides export of controller results and configurations, and import of controller configurations. A dialog box appears to for file location.

Health

Monitors and records environmental parameters and system health parameters.

The information displayed is for information only. No setting of parameters is possible in the menus.

In this Section
  • Controller Information and IAM Menu
  • Software Menu
  • Hardware Configuration
  • Export and Import
  • System Health Monitor

Controller Information and IAM Menu

The Intelligent Application Module (IAM) is located on the inside of the controller door. It contains the controller program, configuration parameters and stored results.

The IAM module can easily be removed and moved into another controller, which then will behave exactly as the previous controller.

Viewing the Controller information Menus and Current Configurations

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Controller .

    The workspace area displays the Controller menus.

Controller model information

Menu

Functionality

Model

Provides general information about the type of controller.

Serial number

Provides information about the serial number of the controller.

Service Ethernet port

Provides information about the IP address of the service port. Through this port a service engineer can access the controller without being connected to the factory network.

Controller IAM information

Menu

Functionality

Type

Atlas Copco provides different IAM types with different functionality.

Customer key

Is an identifier for application-specific or customer-specific configurations.

Serial number

Provides information about the serial number of the IAM module.

Software Menu

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Controller .

    The workspace area displays the Controller menus.

Controller software version

Menu

Functionality

Current version

The main active working software.

Stored version

A stored inactive software.

It is possible to switch between installed software versions and this has two advantages:

  • Controller software can be loaded to controllers in parallel to normal operation. If several controllers are to be updated, a switch can then be made very quickly on all controllers at the same time.

  • If a software upgrade results in unexpected results, a switch to the previous version is a quick back-up fix.

Relevant Information
  • Introduction to Controller Software and Data Management
  • Switching Controller Software
  • Updating Controller Software

Hardware Configuration

This menu provides information about the system hardware configuration.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Controller .

    The workspace area displays the Controller menus.

The Hardware menu lists the different hardware modules that make up the controller.

For each module, the following data is provided:

  • Serial number

  • Article number

  • Software version

Export and Import

The export and import function is used to export the events and tightening results accessible in the Results menu for analysis in external programs, as well as allowing transfer of tightening program, batch, and controller configurations between controllers.

The command Export can be used for the following reasons:

  • Exporting tightening results and events for further processing.

  • Exporting log files for debug assistance from an Atlas Copco service engineer.

  • Exporting the entire controller configuration that can be used to copy the configuration to another controller.

  • Comparing two exported configurations to see differences.

Exporting Controller Information
  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Controller .

    The workspace area displays the Controller menu.

  3. Click the Export button to export one of the following:

    Parameter

    Description

    Export

    Exports all controller information.

    Export Configuration

    Exports settings and configurations.

    Export Tool Log

    Exports logs (tightenings and hardware information) from connected tools. Available for SRB, TBP and STB.

    The export consists of atlas_tool_i.zip and ExportInfo.txt

  4. Select the location for saving the export file, click OK.

Importing Controller Information
  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Controller .

    The workspace area displays the Controller menu.

  3. To import controller configurations, click the Import command button.

  4. Click Open file. Select the file to import.

    The import file must be a previously exported file.

    When using the import function, all settings for tightening program, batch, accessories, and controller are replaced by the settings from the import file. However, settings for network, PIN, and results and events are not imported.

System Health Monitor

The equipment health monitor regularly measures parameters and stores them.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Controller .

    The workspace area displays the Controller menus.

    The Health menu displays environmental data and system health information.

Controller health monitor

Information

Value

Description

Refresh command button

Degree C or F

Reads information from the controller and displays the latest result.

Controller temperature

Degree C or F

Latest temperature recording expressed in month/day/year hour:minute:second.

Battery status

OK/NOK

Monitors the memory and real time clock battery in the controller computer board.

Status message NOK, means the battery needs to be changed as soon as possible to avoid loss of data or wrong results.

Latest recording expressed in month/day/year hour:minute:second.

History command button

Provides a list of monitor readings.

Working with the Settings Tab

  • Preferences
    • PIN Settings
      • Activating the PIN
      • Accessing the Controller When Locked By PIN
    • Tool service alarms
  • Server Connections
    • Controller Communication with the ToolsNet Server
  • Controller Date and Time
  • Events Menu
    • Event Configuration
    • Adding Events to the Library

Preferences

The settings menu contains a preferences section, which is used to select language, torque units and PIN protection of the controller interface.

To set controller preferences:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Settings .

    The workspace area displays the Settings menus.

Parameters for controller preference:

Parameter

Description

Default

Torque unit

Selects the unit in which torque measurement results shall be displayed for this controller in the controller GUI or web GUI.

Nm

Temperature unit

Selects the unit in which temperature measurement results shall be displayed for this controller in the controller GUI or web GUI.

Celcius

Language

Selects the language for the controller that shall be displayed for this controller in the controller GUI or web GUI.

English

Access via factory port

On/Off. Enables (On) or disables (Off) the communication with the controller.

On

Use PIN

A PIN can be enabled for this controller when accessed through the controller GUI or webHMI (factory network).

PIN only applies to users accessing Controller through its GUI or webHMI. User is not locked out from ToolsTalk 2 or from working with (configuring and pushing configuration) the controller from ToolsTalk 2 because of the activated PIN.

On: User accessing the controller must use PIN code in order to get write access to the controller.

Off: No PIN code is required for user to get write access to the controller.

Off

Use PIN for Service Port

A PIN can be enabled for the controller when accessed through the service port.

On: User accessing the controller must use PIN code in order to get write access to the controller.

Off: No PIN code is required for user to get write access to the controller.

  • Use PIN for Service Port is enabled only when the Use PIN is set to On.

  • Use PIN for Service Port uses the same Pin codes configured and Inactivity timeout as user going through the factory network.

Off

Pin codes

Select a 4 digit PIN code per added user. Enable/disable user PINs.

Inactivity timeout

The controller GUI or web GUI is automatically locked after an activity timeout.

120 s

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
In this Section
  • PIN Settings
  • Tool service alarms

PIN Settings

Using a PIN prevents unauthorized usage of the controller or accidental changes. A maximum of ten users can be added to the controller, each with their own PIN. Note that PINs are not linked to controller configurations and are used mainly for logging in reasons.

When changes are made to the PIN or if any modification is done on the controller GUI or WebHMI, the user that made the changes is logged. This will be displayed in the column Changed by in the External change notifications window, and added to the change history.

When PIN is activated, a PIN code is required when accessing the controller via:

  • The controller GUI

  • The web GUI

In this Section
  • Activating the PIN
  • Accessing the Controller When Locked By PIN

Activating the PIN

  1. Go to the Settings menu, set Use PIN to On.

  2. Select PIN CODES.

Adding PIN Codes for New Users

  1. Select Add in the Pin codes dialog window.

  2. Enter the username in the Name field.

  3. Select Set PIN to set the PIN for the user. The PIN must be a four-digit number in the range 0000–9999.

    In the Set PIN dialog window that opens, The PIN in both fields (Set PIN and Repeat PIN) need to match.

    Select OK.

  4. In the list of users, select the check box to the right of the user name you want to enable.

    When PIN is enabled, the controller is locked automatically after the configured inactivity time.

    To disable a PIN, clear the check box to the right of the user name you want to disable.

Deleting a User/PIN

  • In the list of users, mark the check box for each user PIN to delete and select the Delete button.

Accessing the Controller When Locked By PIN

When accessing the controller with PIN enabled, a prompt asking for the PIN will appear. This is the case whether the controller is accessed via the web GUI, or the controller GUI.

Tool service alarms

The settings menu contains a tool section, which is used to select tool alarms for Service indicator alarm and Show calibration alarm

To set tool alarms:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Settings .

    The workspace area displays the Settings menus.

Tool alarm parameters

Parameter

Description

Default

Location

Service indicator alarm

Selected in a switch.

Turn the alarm On or Off. The alarm is triggered when the service interval is reached.

Off

Show calibration alarm

Selected in a switch.

Triggers the calibration alarm if the tool has not been calibrated within the specified time. Last calibration date can be seen in the Tool menu. Default interval is one year but can be changed from the controller GUI or web GUI.

Off

Server Connections

  • Controller Communication with the ToolsNet Server

Controller Communication with the ToolsNet Server

A controller always sends tightening results to ToolsTalk 2. A controller can also send the results to ToolsNet 8 for further processing. The address to the ToolsNet 8 server must be configured in the controller.

To set the communication between the controller and the ToolsNet server:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Settings .

    The workspace area displays the Settings menus.

  3. Go to ToolsNet, enable or disable the communication with the ToolsNet server.

  4. If the communication is enabled, set the IP address and port number of the server.

License server parameters

Parameter

Description

Default

Comment

ToolsNet enabled

Enables/Disables communication to the server.

Off

Server host

ToolsNet server IP address.

 

Communication enabled.

Server port

ToolsNet server port.

 

Communication enabled.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Controller Date and Time

Each controller must have the date and time programmed for accurate reporting.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to the Settings tab.

    The workspace area displays the General settings menus.

  3. Select the source for the time reference.

  4. Enter additional parameters, depending on the selected time source.

  5. Select the controller's local time zone from the Time zone shortcut menu.

To achieve best time accuracy and stability it is recommended to use the NTP server that can communicate with all controllers.

The time source is selected from a shortcut menu, and can be one of the following:

  • Manually enter time and date into the controller. This can be done through all GUI interfaces.

  • Using the standardized Network Time Protocol (NTP). A server distributes time references to connected controllers. It is possible to configure up to two different NTP servers.

  • Using the ToolsNet server as the time reference, if the controller is connected and online to the ToolsNet server. When using ToolsNet as the time reference it is important that the server and the controller are set to the same time zone, even if they are in separate time zones.

To add and configure Date and time:

Controller time setting

Parameter

Condition

Description

Source

The selection is made from a shortcut menu.

Select the method to configure a controller time and date.

Time zone

The selection is made from a shortcut menu.

Select the time zone in which the controller is located.

Time

Source = Manual

Enter a time in the format Hours:Minutes:Seconds.

Date

Source = Manual

Enter a date from the calendar symbol.

SET command button

Source = Manual

Sends the entered date and time to the controller. To be able to execute this command, the controller must be online.

ADD command button

Source = NTP

Add an additional NTP server address.

DELETE command button

Source = NTP

Delete the selected NTP server address.

NTP server

Source = NTP

Enter the IP address of the NTP server.

Events Menu

Events are operational states and other pieces of information, for example errors, reported to the operator. All events can be configured and have different severity.

Event type

Function

Display

Events can be informative and are displayed for a short duration of time on the controller screen.

Log

Events can be informative and are displayed for a short duration of time on the controller screen and are also written to the log file. These will be displayed in the Events tab.

Acknowledge

Events that must be acknowledged by the operator. To acknowledge an event, the operator must press a button on an accessory, tap the controller touch screen or acknowledge the event through the web-GUI.

The event configuration determines how every event signals is treated.

Controller settings - events

A

Events search window

B

Events list

All available events are listed in the chapter References. Events have two categories:

  • Standard events are defined by Atlas Copco and are available in every deliverable.

  • Custom events are implemented by Atlas Copco on customer request and are only valid and available for specific customers.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
In this Section
  • Event Configuration
  • Adding Events to the Library

Event Configuration

Configuring event handling:
  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to the Settings tab and select Events.

  3. Search for a specific event using the search window or expand the sections by selecting them and scrolling through the Events to find the desired event codes.

  4. Select or deselect one or more of the following:

    • Acknowledge, if the event is to be displayed and acknowledged by the operator.

    • Log, if the event is to be displayed, written to the log file and shown in the Events tab.

    • Display, if the event is to be displayed on a screen.

    The Details field can be used to write customer specific comments.

  5. When ready, push the changes to the specific controller.

  6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for every controller that shall be configured.

Event code numbers 0000-7999 are standard events.

Event code numbers 8000-9999 are customer-specific events.

Relevant Information
  • Adding Events to the Library
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Adding Events to the Library

  1. Select Settings , then in the Events configuration tab select Manage. Choose Add to Library from the drop-down list.

  2. The Create global configuration dialog window opens containing two configuration options:

    • Auto revert, set as default.

    • Unlink

  3. Select Create, the event configuration is now locked and visible in the Global Event Library.

Updating global events through the GUI

Action

Result

Auto revert

Updating the events through the controller GUI or the web GUI are ignored, if the program is marked as a global event in ToolsTalk 2.

The update is made and sent back to ToolsTalk 2 where the change is recognized but not acknowledged. The original global event program is then immediately pushed back to the controller.

Unlink

Updating the events through the controller GUI or the web GUI causes the program to change from a global event to a local event, in the affected controller.

The update is made and sent to ToolsTalk 2 where the change is recognized. As a result the event is immediately removed from the distribution list to the controller.

The selection of auto revert or unlink must be made when a global event is configured for distribution to a controller. The selection cannot be changed at a later stage.

Working with Fieldbus, SoftPLC and Acyclic Data Tab

The Fieldbus, Acyclic and SoftPLC are located in the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab, when a single controller has been selected in the Plant structure .

A fieldbus is a communication link between a factory management system (fieldbus master) and a remote node (fieldbus subordinate).

The Fieldbus and SoftPLC is divided into four sections:

  • Overview

  • Fieldbus

  • SoftPLC

  • Acyclic

In this Section
  • Fieldbus Overview
  • Overview Configuration Tab
  • Fieldbus Configuration Tab
  • Working with Acyclic Fieldbus Configuration
  • SoftPLC Configuration Tab

Fieldbus Overview

A typical factory management control system that uses fieldbus communication can look like the figure below when it communicates with a controller.

Fieldbus communication system

A

Fieldbus master (PLC)

B

Frame header

C

User data to and from several virtual stations inside the Process Data Frame

D

Virtual station

E

Controller vith multiple virtual stations

A fieldbus master, normally a PLC, exchanges information with a number of remote nodes which are called fieldbus subordinates. The master communicates with one subordinate at a time. The master transmits a frame to the subordinate and receives another frame in response.

The PLC transmits data to a anybus module which then communicates to the controller that may contain identification data, task selection information and other signals.

A controller sends responses to the PLC through the anybus module that may contain event signals, status signals, tightening results and other signals.

The update frequencies of the process data may differ. The update frequency between the controller and the anybus module is around 100Hz and the update frequency between the anybus module and the PLC is around 500Hz.

The physical transmission link depends on the selected fieldbus type. A transmission consists of a Frame Header, containing address information, and a Process Data Frame, which contains all the data.

If the controller supports virtual stations, it is important to direct the correct information to each virtual station. The Process Data Frame may contain one or more Fieldbus maps, one for each virtual station.

In this Section
  • Fieldbus Configuration Parameters
  • Fieldbus Definitions
  • Fieldbus Data Types
  • Fieldbus Sizes

Fieldbus Configuration Parameters

An item is placed into the Fieldbus Map by defining the position of the least significant bit. This position is identified by a byte number and a bit number.

Item position

Information

Description

Starting byte

The byte number in which the least significant byte of the item is located. A numeric number in the range from zero to size minus one.

The numbering starts from zero (0). The least significant byte or bit is number 0.

Starting bit

The bit number in which the least significant bit of the item is located. Starting from the previous selected starting byte. A numeric number in the range from zero to seven.

The numbering starts from zero (0). The least significant byte or bit is number 0.

Length

A numeric value representing the number of bits in the item.

Range

Information only. Provides information of minimum length, the maximum length and the default length of the selected item.

Converter

A drop-down list of available signal converters. This is used if the SoftPLC has any requirements on how items are represented in a digital format.

The item converters are used to convert items between different data types.

Item converters

Information

Description

Boolean inversion

Inverts the digital signal from active high (1) to active low (0).

Fixed-point

 

Fieldbus Definitions

An Item is a digital signal. It can for example be signals, as they are described in the controller reference section:

  • A single bit of information, like Tightening OK.

  • Several bits of information, like an Event code.

An Item can be several bits of information representing a counter value, an identification number or a tightening result.

An Item can be a string of characters.

Fieldbus items

Information

Description

Fieldbus Item

Boolean:

The signal can be a simple boolean expression, occupying one single bit position.

Examples are digital IO signals.

Integer:

The data occupies one or more bits of data in the array.

Character or string:

The signal can be a alphanumeric character string, occupying one or several byte positions.

Fieldbus definitions

Information

Description

Fieldbus Map

An array of data. The Size must be an even number of bytes. The fieldbus map is created in the Fieldbus window in the Fieldbus menu. Fieldbus items are placed in the fieldbus map to create a unique array for the master-subordinate communication. Items are placed into the array by defining the starting position and the length, expressed in number of bits.

Process Data Frame

An array of data. The size must be an even number of bytes. The Process Data Frame is created in the Fieldbus window in the Fieldbus menu. Fieldbus maps are placed into the Process Data Frame when they are assigned to a Virtual Station. The position of the map within the frame is defined by the Offset, which is calculated from the beginning of the frame.

Fieldbus Configuration

Fieldbus mapping configurations are done in the Fieldbus window in the Fieldbus menu. Configuration parameters consist of both common parameters and type specific parameters.

A list of parameter entry boxes are displayed after the fieldbus type has been selected.

Filedbus item positions

Information

Description

Offset

A pointer variable. The signal can be a simple boolean expression, occupying one single bit position.

Examples are digital IO signals.

Starting Byte

A pointer variable. Points to a byte within the fieldbus map that contains the LSB of an item.

Starting Bit

A pointer variable. Points to a bit in the previously defined byte within the fieldbus map that contains the LSB of an item.

Item Length

A size variable expressed in a number of bits.

LSB

Least Significant Bit or Byte.

Name

Description

Fieldbus Transmission

A datagram sent over the network. The transmitting node combines a Frame Header, containing address information, with a Process Data Frame that is sent to the network. The receiving node detects its address in the Frame Header and retrieves the Process Data Frame.

Frame Header

Network address information and other data to ensure an error free transmission over the network

Fieldbus Master

Typically a PLC that initiates the communication to a fieldbus subordinate. The master transmits a data frame and receives another frame from the subordinate.

Fieldbus Subordinate

A remote node responding to a transmission from a fieldbus master. When the subordinate detects a transmission, it receives a frame and responds by sending another frame in return to the sender.

Fieldbus Data Types

Each fieldbus has its own capacity regarding the amount of data it could transfer over the bus.

  • Cyclic data: Cyclic data (also called as "implicit" or "essential" data) is typically PLC data/process data such as Start, Stop, OK, NOK signals and so on. Cyclic data transfers occur on a regular basis (for example, 100ms) between the master and the controller fieldbus and must be updated as often as possible as it contains commands that are crucial to the operation.

  • Acyclic data: Acyclic data (also called as "information") is usually tightening data. Acylic data is outside the cyclic data fieldbus mapping and an acyclic data transfer occurs only on a request from the master to the controller fieldbus.

  • Async data: Async data is tightening data that is part of the cyclic data transfer and is part of the mapping and is meant to be for those fieldbus types that do not support acyclic data (CC Link). The async data function can be used in order to send the tightening results with cyclic data in packages over the fieldbus to the PLC. The PLC then merges all the packages into one tightening result. The async data from the controller is communicated with the I/O signal Fieldbus AsyncData from PF and the async data is communicated to the controller with the I/O signal Fieldbus AsyncData to PF. These signals are used for the async data handshake which is the same type of handshake done with acyclic data. The size of the Fieldbus AsyncData from PF can be considered as the instance size or record size and indicates how many bytes of data is transferred for each async data handshake request.

    For example, if the total acyclic data configuration is 1024 bytes and Fieldbus AsyncData to PF is set as 64 bytes, then the total async data will be sent 16 times X 64 bytes each time. That is, for each request from the PLC, the controller fills theFieldbus AsyncData to PF with the next 64 bytes of data from the total async data.

    In theory, if you define Fieldbus AsyncData from PF as 2 bytes long, then you can send upto 32K bytes of data (which will need 16K data requests).

Relevant Information
  • Fieldbus Sizes

Fieldbus Sizes

Item

DeviceNet

Ethernet/IP

Profinet I/O

Profibus DP-V1a

CC Link

CC link IE

a only for Profibus DP-V1:Transfer speed for acyclic data is ~1 kB/s, depending on how often you trigger tightenings this will be the bottleneck for how much acyclic data you can transfer. For example, if you perform a tightening every 3 seconds you should not try to transfer more than 3 kB/tightening

Max. cyclic data (Read + Write)

512

512

512

128(368)

N/A

512

Min. cyclic data (Read + Write)

0

0

0

1

N/A

0

Max. cyclic data (Write)

256

256

256

128(244)

N/A

256

Min. cyclic data (Write)

0

0

0

0

N/A

0

Max. cyclic data (Read)

256

256

256

128(244)

N/A

256

Min. cyclic data (Read)

0

0

0

0

N/A

0

Max. acyclic data (Read + Write)

65535

65535

65535

65535

N/A

65535

Min. acyclic data (Read + Write)

0

0

0

0

N/A

0

Max. acyclic data (Write)

65535

65535

65535

65535

N/A

65535

Min. acyclic data (Write)

0

0

0

0

N/A

0

Max. acyclic data (Read)

65535

65535

65535

65535

N/A

65535

Min. acyclic data (Read)

0

0

0

0

N/A

0

 

CC Link Version 1

Occupied stations

Bit points (bits)

Word points (words)

Total (Bit + Word, in bytes)

1

32

4

12

2

64

8

24

3

96

12

36

4

128

16

48

CC link version 2

Occupied stations

1 Extension cycle

2 Extension cycles

4 Extension cycles

8 Extension cycles

Points

Total

Points

Total

Points

Total

Points

Points

1

32 bits

12 bytes

32 bits

20 bytes

64 bits

40 bytes

128 bits

80 bytes

4 words

8 words

16 words

32 words

2

64 bits

24 bytes

96 bits

44 bytes

192 bits

88 bytes

384 bits

176 bytes

8 words

16 words

32 words

64 words

3

96 bits

36 bytes

160 bits

68 bytes

320 bits

136 bytes

640 bits

272 bytes

12 words

24 words

48 words

96 words

4

128 bits

48 bytes

224 bits

92 bytes

448 bits

184 bytes

896 bits

368 bytes

16 words

32 words

64 words

128 words

Overview Configuration Tab

  • Fieldbus settings
    • Fieldbus Parameters General
      • Configuring tightening results without handshake protocol
    • Fieldbus parameters for DeviceNet
    • Fieldbus parameters for EtherNet/IP
    • Fieldbus parameters for ProfinetIO
    • Fieldbus parameters for Profibus
    • Fieldbus parameters for CC Link
    • Fieldbus parameters for CC Link IE
    • Acyclic Data in General Fieldbus Settings
      • Adding Data Instance Size
        • Deleting an Acyclic Fieldbus Mapping
  • SoftPLC settings
    • Changing the Offset
  • Virtual Station Mapping Configuration
    • Adding a Fieldbus Mapping
    • Adding an Acyclic Fieldbus Mapping
      • Editing Start and End Instances
    • Viewing a Fieldbus Map assigned to a Virtual Station

Fieldbus settings

The Connection status can show the following status messages:

Status

Description

Fieldbus_Online

The fieldbus module is online. The communication between the controller and the fieldbus master is active.

Fieldbus_Offline

The fieldbus module is offline. The communication between the controller and the fieldbus master is not active.

Fieldbus_NoModuleInstalled

No fieldbus module is detected in the controller.

Fieldbus_NotConfigured

A fieldbus module is detected in the controller but the module is not configured.

Fieldbus_Initializing

A fieldbus status during reset or as a result when global parameters have been changed. This is a temporary status until a steady status is displayed.

The fieldbus status can also show errors:

Error Code

Description

Action

Fieldbus_ModuleMismatch

Supported module. Parameter mismatch detected.

Contact Atlas Copco to read error log.

Fieldbus_UnsupportedModuleInstalled

Unsupported fieldbus module.

Contact Atlas Copco to read error log.

Fieldbus_ConfiguredModuleNot Installed

Configuration data created. No module detected.

Contact Atlas Copco to read error log.

Fieldbus_Unexpectedconfigurationerror

Mismatch between controller and ToolsTalk 2.

Contact Atlas Copco to read error log.

Changing some global parameters like frame size, fieldbus module address, will cause the fieldbus module to reset.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Select Fieldbus and SoftPLC in the Menu bar then select the Overview sub-tab.

  3. In Fieldbus settings select Fieldbus type from the drop-down menu.

  4. Enter the size in bytes of the entire Frame size for both the receive and transmit direction. The value must be an even integer number.

  5. Enter the fieldbus type specific parameters.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
In this Section
  • Fieldbus Parameters General
  • Fieldbus parameters for DeviceNet
  • Fieldbus parameters for EtherNet/IP
  • Fieldbus parameters for ProfinetIO
  • Fieldbus parameters for Profibus
  • Fieldbus parameters for CC Link
  • Fieldbus parameters for CC Link IE
  • Acyclic Data in General Fieldbus Settings

Fieldbus Parameters General

Field

Description

Default value

Fieldbus type

Select the fieldbus type from drop-down menu:

  • DeviceNet

  • EtherNet/IP

  • ProfinetIO

  • Profibus

  • CC Link

  • CC Link IE

Undefined

Update interval

Set how often a Process Data Frame should be sent. The value is expressed in milliseconds. Minimum value is 100 ms.

 

Lock tool when fieldbus offline

Selection switch On-Off. Determines the action taken by the controller if the fieldbus module loses communication with the fieldbus master (PLC).

Off

Read result handshake

Selection switch On-Off. When turned On, the setting will affect all virtual stations. The signal Read Result Handshake has to be mapped in the fieldbus configuration.

Any results produced when there are no results to acknowledge will immediately be sent to the PLC.

Results to acknowledge will be put in a queue and when acknowledged it will be cleared and the next result in the queue is sent. The time between the cleared result and the next result in the queue is dependent on the cycle time for the fieldbus set in the general fieldbus settings. If the setting is changed, or if the fieldbus mapping for the virtual station is changed, the results still in the queue will be flushed and not sent to the PLC.

Off

Set by network

Selection switch On-Off. Determines how the fieldbus module communication is configured.

  • On: Communication parameters set automatically in the fieldbus module. Parameters are determined by the network during the initial connection with the far end station.

  • Off: Communication parameters must be entered during the configuration.

Off

Sync on task selected

Off

Byte order Cyclic Data

Select which order of bytes is used for the cyclic data:

  • Set by network

  • Intel (little)

  • Motorola (big)

Set by network

Byte order Acyclic Data

Select which order of bytes is used for the acyclic data:

  • Intel (little)

  • Motorola (big)

Motorola (big)

Load async data automatically

Selection switch On-Off. When turned On, the first and only package of the async data is automatically loaded.

When enable this function, the fieldbus master must ensure that it is done reading data before starting a new cycle.

Off

In this Section
  • Configuring tightening results without handshake protocol

Configuring tightening results without handshake protocol

  1. Configure an acyclic configuration with final angle and final torque for each spindle.

  2. Configure a fieldbus configuration with the signal Fieldbus AsyncData From controller (In the tab From controller).

  3. Map both the fieldbus configuration and the acyclic configuration to a Virtual Station.

  4. In the general fieldbus configuration, choose Load async data automatically = On.

  5. After a tightening, the user can get results in the signal Fieldbus AsyncData From controller.

Fieldbus parameters for DeviceNet

The table below only lists specific parameters for DeviceNet. For the general parameters, see Fieldbus Parameters General.

Field

Description

Default value

Fieldbus node address

 

 

Baud rate

Speed of the communication link. Select speed from the drop-down menu.

125 kbps; 250 kbps; 500 kbps, Automatic.

Automatic

Connection mode

Select the type of communication between the fieldbus master (PLC) and the subordinate controller. Select from a drop-down menu:

  • Polled

  • Bitstrobe

  • Change of state

 

To controller

Total receive Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station receive frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

From controller

Total transmit Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station transmit frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

Relevant Information
  • Fieldbus Parameters General

Fieldbus parameters for EtherNet/IP

The table below only lists specific parameters for EtherNet/IP. For the general parameters, see Fieldbus Parameters General.

Field

Description

Default value

Fieldbus node IP address

Format is 0.0.0.0

 

Subnet mask

Format is 0.0.0.0

 

Gateway

Format is 0.0.0.0

 

To controller

Total receive Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station receive frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

From controller

Total transmit Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station transmit frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

Relevant Information
  • Fieldbus Parameters General

Fieldbus parameters for ProfinetIO

The table below only lists specific parameters for ProfinetIO. For the general parameters, see Fieldbus Parameters General.

Field

Description

Default value

Device name

Name of the device

Fieldbus node IP address

Format is 0.0.0.0

 

Subnet mask

Format is 0.0.0.0

 

Gateway

Format is 0.0.0.0

 

To controller

Total receive Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station receive frames. The size is expressed in number of Bytes.

From controller

Total transmit Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station transmit frames. The size is expressed in number of Bytes.

The parameter Device name identifies the fieldbus module on the PROFINET and uses the syntax described in RFC 5890.

Relevant Information
  • Fieldbus Parameters General

Fieldbus parameters for Profibus

The table below only lists specific parameters for Profibus. For the general parameters, see Fieldbus Parameters General.

Field

Description

Default value

Sync on task selected

If enabled the fieldbus frame shall be Re-synced at task changes

Extended mode

Chooses between the backward compatible152 bytes data mode and the 368 bytes data mode:

  • On: 368 bytes data mode.

  • Off: 152 bytes data mode.

Fieldbus node address

 

 

Max ADI size

Choose between the different application data instance sizes to be set as a maximum.

Data consistency is only guaranteed for data mapped over one single ADI, that is, if the data to be sent is larger, or broken over two ADIs, data consistency cannot be guaranteed. Setting a maximum ADI size, which is equal to the sent data type size and mapped correctly to the total frame size will guarantee data consistency.

The maximum data size to use for sending cyclic data, which must match the data size used in the Fieldbus master. Max size ADIs will be used until less than that size remains to map. For example, If Max ADI size is set as 8 bytes, then that will be used for mapping until less than 8 bytes remain, then 4, 2, 1 bytes will be used to transfer the rest of the data.

To controller

Total receive Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station receive frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

From controller

Total transmit Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station transmit frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

Relevant Information
  • Fieldbus Parameters General

Fieldbus parameters for CC Link

The table below only lists specific parameters for CC Link. For the general parameters, see Fieldbus Parameters General.

Field

Description

Default value

Baud rate

Speed of the communication link. Select speed from the drop-down menu.

156 kbps; 625 kbps; 2500 kbps; 5 Mbps; 10 Mbps.

156 kbps

Fieldbus node address

A unique address for each separate unit within the network

Version

Version 1: By default, the module automatically calculates the required number of Occupied Stations based on the mapped Process Data.

Version 2: By implementing the Network Settings in the CC-Link, it is possible to customize the implementation for CC-Link Version 2 and use larger data sizes through Extension Cycles.

Occupied stations

A parameter setting which is dependent on which Version has been chosen. This is used in combination with the Extension Cycles parameter.

Extension cycles

Parameter setting used for sending larger data sizes, used in combination with the Version and Occupied Station parameters.

To controller

Total receive Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station receive frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

From controller

Total transmit Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station transmit frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

Relevant Information
  • Fieldbus Parameters General

Fieldbus parameters for CC Link IE

The table below only lists specific parameters for CC Link IE. For the general parameters, see Fieldbus Parameters General.

Field

Description

Default value

Station number

Each device on the network must be assigned a unique Station Number.

Network number

The network can be segmented into several parts, each with a unique network number that is used for addressing.

To controller

Total receive Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station receive frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

From controller

Total transmit Process Data Frame. The frame size is a combination of all the virtual station transmit frames. The size is expressed in number of bytes.

Relevant Information
  • Fieldbus Parameters General

Acyclic Data in General Fieldbus Settings

  • Adding Data Instance Size
    • Deleting an Acyclic Fieldbus Mapping

Adding Data Instance Size

In the Fieldbus Settings, the user can set Data instance size, which is a general value used for size span calculations. An instance defines where should the first byte of the acyclic data be read.

This is possible only for the following Fieldbus types:

  • EtherNet IP

  • DeviceNet

  • Profinet IO

  • Profibus

  • CC Link IE

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab.

  3. Select the Overview sub-tab.

  4. Enter the value in the Data instance size field.

The value for Data instance size defines how big an instance should be. This is general for all instances in the acyclic fieldbus mapping with virtual stations. Default: 64, Maximum: 255 (256 bytes).

The size span calculation for CC link is done automatically.

In this Section
  • Deleting an Acyclic Fieldbus Mapping

Deleting an Acyclic Fieldbus Mapping

  1. Select the Acyclic From controller tab in the Virtual Station Mapping Configuration area.

  2. Select the check box for the fieldbus mapping that needs to be deleted and select Delete.

SoftPLC settings

Size

The inbound and outbound size allotted in the fieldbus for the PLC can be set in the To controller and From controller fields.

If the fieldbus for the PLC is not configured, the framesize will display 0 for both inbound and outbound size.

Offset

The order between fieldbus maps can be changed manually and the spacing between fieldbus maps can be controlled. Both of these two functions are controlled by the Offset parameter. This value defines the starting position of a fieldbus map in the Process Data Frame array.

In this Section
  • Changing the Offset

Changing the Offset

  1. In the To Controller section, type the offset of the fieldbus map within the Process Data Frame.

  2. In the From Controller section, type the offset of the fieldbus map within the Process Data Frame.

Validation is done automatically. If the new offset value is accepted, it is shown in black text. If the value is not accepted an error message is shown in red text which provides information about which offset rule that is violated.

The start address must be an even number.

Virtual Station Mapping Configuration

A virtual station in a controller and the fieldbus master communicate by exchanging a fieldbus map between each other.

One or more fieldbus maps are combined into a Process Data Frame, which is sent on the physical communication link between the controller and the fieldbus master.

Fieldbus Virtual Station Mapping Configuration

Column

Function

Check box

Select or deselect a mapping.

Virtual station

Name of virtual station.

Fieldbus configuration

The fieldbus map.

To/From controller offset

Starting point of the fieldbus map within the Process Data Frame.

Acyclic Virtual Station Mapping Configuration

Column

Function

Check box

Select or deselect a mapping.

Virtual station

Name of virtual station.

Acyclic configuration

The acyclic data map.

Start Instance

First instance number of the acyclic data. Default/minimum instance number: 2048.

End Instance

Last instance number of the acyclic data. Maximum instance number: 65535.

The maximum size of the instance varies between the different fieldbus types.

No of Instances

Number of instances that are required to send the acyclic data. For example, if the Data instance size is set as 64 and the Start Instance is 2048 and the End Instance is 2060, then the No of instances are 13 and the maximum size for the acyclic configuration will be 832 bytes . The No of instances are generated automatically based on the Start Instance and End Instance.

Size in Bytes

Maximum size of the acyclic configuration based on the selected Data instance size, Start Instance and the End Instance.

The total size of the acyclic data should not exceed 65536 bytes.

A virtual station can only have one acyclic fieldbus configuration mapped, but an acyclic fieldbus configuration can be mapped to many virtual stations.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
In this Section
  • Adding a Fieldbus Mapping
  • Adding an Acyclic Fieldbus Mapping
  • Viewing a Fieldbus Map assigned to a Virtual Station

Adding a Fieldbus Mapping

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Fieldbus and SoftPLC .

  3. Select the Overview tab.

  4. Select To controller or From controller and select Add in the Virtual Station Mapping Configuration field to add a fieldbus mapping to or from the controller.

  5. Select the FieldBus tab and select the Virtual station and Fieldbus configuration from the drop-down menu.

    The fieldbus signal configuration is created in the Fieldbus sub-tab.

  6. Select Add.

The fieldbus mappings are now visible in the Virtual Station Mapping Configuration.

Adding an Acyclic Fieldbus Mapping

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Fieldbus and SoftPLC .

  3. Select the Overview tab.

  4. Select Acyclic from Controller and select Add in the Virtual Station Mapping Configuration.

  5. Select the Acyclic FieldBus tab and select the Virtual station and Acyclic fieldbus configuration from the drop-down menu.

    The acyclic fieldbus configuration is created in the Acyclic sub-tab.

  6. Select Add.

The fieldbus mapping is now visible in the Virtual Station Mapping Configuration area under the Acyclic from controller tab.

Fieldbus maps are placed into the Process Data Frame in the order that they are assigned to a virtual station, or at the lowest possible entry point where the Fieldbus map can fit.

In this Section
  • Editing Start and End Instances

Editing Start and End Instances

It is possible to edit start and end instances for the fieldbus mapping.

The start and end instances are the fixed positions that defines where the acyclic fieldbus configuration should start and end. It is important to enter the correct range.

  1. Select the Acyclic from controller tab in the Virtual Station Mapping Configuration field.

  2. Edit the Start instance and End instance values if required.

    If the correct value is not entered, a warning "The fieldbus frame must fit its content" is displayed.

Lowest/First Possible Acyclic Data Instance Numbers

Fieldbus

To Controller Instance Number

From Controller Instance Number

Profinet-IO

1024

2048

Profibus-DP

1024

2048

Ethernet/IP

32768

4096

DeviceNet

1024

2048

CC-Link

Not supported

Not supported

CC-Link IE

1024

2048

  • After each tightening, the measured values for the configured items are available as acyclic data for the PLC to read from the system. The data is updated with new values after each tightening.

  • When the signal Cycle Complete is set to high, the data is ready to be read. The data is valid until the next tightening starts, that is until the input signal Start is sent.

  • The PLC issues a series of GET_RECORD commands to collect all the data.

Viewing a Fieldbus Map assigned to a Virtual Station

To view how a fieldbus map is assigned to a virtual station:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab then select the Overview sub-tab.

The Fieldbus Virtual Station Mapping Configuration menu displays a list of fieldbus maps, and to which virtual station they are assigned. The To Controller Offset column points to the address in the Process Data Frame where the fieldbus map starts.

Fieldbus Configuration Tab

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show the list of maps or to create a new fieldbus map.

Column

Description

Check box.

Name

Name: Shows the name of the map. The name is identical for both the receive map and the transmit map.

Size to

The size of the receive map to a virtual station. The value must be an even number of bytes.

Size from

The size of the transmit map from a virtual station. The value must be an even number of bytes.

Library link

Linked to global library Yes/No.

Last changed

When were the last changes made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Who made the last changes.

Controller updated

Controller updated, expressed in controller time.

Controller updated by

Who updated the controller.

In this Section
  • Creating, Importing and Deleting a Fieldbus Map
  • Creating a Fieldbus Signal Configuration
  • Understanding the Fieldbus Configuration and the Fieldbus Map
  • Automatic Placement of Fieldbus Maps in the Process Data Frame
  • Automatic Placement of Items in the Fieldbus Map
  • Editing or Viewing an Item in the Fieldbus Map
  • Deleting Items From the Fieldbus Map
  • Exporting a Fieldbus Map

Creating, Importing and Deleting a Fieldbus Map

  • Creating a New Fieldbus Map
  • Importing a Fieldbus Map
  • Deleting a Fieldbus Map

Creating a New Fieldbus Map

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show the list of maps.

  3. Select Add to create a new fieldbus configuration or double-click to edit an existing one.

    The Create new fieldbus configuration dialog window opens.

  4. Select the New tab.

  5. Issue the configuration with a name.

  6. Enter the Size to controller parameter. This is the receive size of the data frame to a virtual station, expressed in number of bytes. This value must be an even number.

  7. Enter the Size from controller parameter. This is the transmit size of the data frame from a virtual station, expressed in number of bytes. This value must be an even number.

    The transmit frame and the receive frame may have different size.

  8. Select Add to continue with the configuration by adding items to the setup.

The map size entered can not be larger than the Process Data Frame.

Relevant Information
  • Creating a Fieldbus Signal Configuration

Importing a Fieldbus Map

A previously exported fieldbus map can be reused as a template and be imported to a controller.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show the list of maps.

  3. Select Add.

    The Create new fieldbus configuration dialog window opens.

  4. Select the Import tab to reuse a existing map.

  5. Select the Open file command button to open a browser window.

  6. Select a file. The file type must be a JSON file. (*.json).

  7. Select Open. The browser window closes.

  8. Select Add to import the file. This action will also close the pop-up window and the list of maps is updated.

Deleting a Fieldbus Map

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show the list of maps.

  3. For each fieldbus map to be deleted, select the check box in the leftmost column in the fieldbus workspace. Select Manage, then Delete from the drop-down list.

The list of maps is updated.

Creating a Fieldbus Signal Configuration

In this area, you can create a new fieldbus signal configuration from the controller or to the controller.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show a list of maps.

  3. Double-click on the name of a map to view it or select Add to create a new one.

    The workspace shows the configuration menus.

  4. Select the To Controller tab or the From Controller tab in Fieldbus configuration menu.

  5. Select Add.

    The Create signal configuration dialog window opens.

  6. Select the item name in the list to select the item.

  7. Set the item starting position by typing the BYTE number in which the least significant BIT is located.

  8. Set the item starting position by typing the BIT in which the least significant BIT is located.

  9. Set the Length of the item, expressed in number of bits.

  10. Select an optional Converter value from the drop-down menu.

  11. Select Add.

  12. Repeat step 6-11 for every item to be added.

  13. Select Close to terminate the adding operation and to close the dialog window.

If the item is not placed manually into the map, ToolsTalk 2 will try to place the item at the lowest possible position. It is possible to later move the item within the map.

In this Section
  • Fieldbus Configuration Parameters
  • Async Data

Fieldbus Configuration Parameters

An item is placed into the Fieldbus Map by defining the position of the least significant bit. This position is identified by a byte number and a bit number.

Item position

Information

Description

Starting byte

The byte number in which the least significant byte of the item is located. A numeric number in the range from zero to size minus one.

The numbering starts from zero (0). The least significant byte or bit is number 0.

Starting bit

The bit number in which the least significant bit of the item is located. Starting from the previous selected starting byte. A numeric number in the range from zero to seven.

The numbering starts from zero (0). The least significant byte or bit is number 0.

Length

A numeric value representing the number of bits in the item.

Range

Information only. Provides information of minimum length, the maximum length and the default length of the selected item.

Converter

A drop-down list of available signal converters. This is used if the SoftPLC has any requirements on how items are represented in a digital format.

The item converters are used to convert items between different data types.

Item converters

Information

Description

Boolean inversion

Inverts the digital signal from active high (1) to active low (0).

Fixed-point

 

Async Data

Async data is used when acyclic data such as tightening results need to be sent over the process data.

If the signals Fieldbus AsyncData to PF and Fieldbus AsyncData from PF are added to a fieldbus map and then mapped to a virtual station, AsyncData is enabled and if an acyclic result configuration is mapped to the same virtual station, then the result is output to AsyncData and not to acyclic data.

Relevant Information
  • Creating a Fieldbus Signal Configuration
In this Section
  • Tightening Results in Async Data
  • Configuring Async Data

Tightening Results in Async Data

The following section provides an example of communication between the fieldbus master and controller using Async data when the I/O signals Fieldbus AsyncData to PF and Fieldbus AsyncData from PF are used.

  1. Fieldbus master receives the signal Cycle Complete when a tightening is completed and the tightening result is ready to be fetched on receiving the signal Cycle Complete after a tightening.

  2. Fieldbus master sends the I/O signal 10077 - Fieldbus AsyncData to PF, requesting the first package of result data which is read by the controller.

  3. Controller responds with I/O signal 107 - Fieldbus AsyncData from PF with a sub-package of the tightening result.

    The tightening result from the controller may not be bigger than the maximum size of the fieldbus frame.

  4. When the fieldbus master finished reading the first package, the command Fieldbus AsyncData to PF is set to zero indicating that the first sub message has been received and read.

  5. The controller responds with the an acknowledge message Fieldbus AsyncData from PF that a new sub package tightening result can be requested again.

  6. The fieldbus master reads the data frame and if the sequence number is negated, it indicates that the requested sub package is the last in queue.

  7. If the fieldbus master requests the tightening results and the queue is empty, then the controller responds with an empty data frame.

Configuring Async Data

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show a list of maps.

  3. Double-click on the name of a map to view it or select Add to create a new one.

    The workspace shows the configuration menus.

  4. Select the To Controller tab or the From Controller tab in Fieldbus configuration menu.

  5. Select Add.

    The Create signal configuration dialog window opens.

  6. Select the Fieldbus AsyncData to PF when the To Controller tab is selected or Fieldbus AsyncData from PF when the From Controller tab is connected.

  7. Enter the BYTE number in which the least significant BIT is located.

  8. Set the item starting position by typing the BIT in which the least significant BIT is located.

  9. Set the Length of the item, expressed in number of bits.

  10. Select Close to terminate the adding operation and to close the dialog window.

Understanding the Fieldbus Configuration and the Fieldbus Map

In the Fieldbus configuration menu it is possible to edit the fieldbus map. Items can be added, deleted or moved inside the map.

The fieldbus map

A

Tabs; selects the receive map or the transmit map

B

The map shown in a graphical presentation of how items are placed

C

The map shown in a table presentation of how items are placed

D

Command buttons to Add or to Delete items from the map

E

Colour coded example of item positions

If a row is selected in the list, the item is highlighted in the list and on the map.

If an item is selected on the map it is highlighted on the map and in the list.

An item can occupy one single bit or extend over several bits. An item position is always described with a starting position of the least significant bit. The starting position points to a byte and bit. The length parameter indicates how long the item stretches from right to left.

Items are added or edited in a pop-up window.

Pop-up window to add or edit items in the fieldbus map

A

Add item or Edit item pop-up window map

B

List of available items

C

Byte position

D

Bit position

E

Item length parameter field

F

Item information field

G

Command buttons

Automatic Placement of Fieldbus Maps in the Process Data Frame

A Fieldbus map is placed automatically in the Process Data Frame when it is assigned to a virtual station. It is possible to change the order later by editing the Offset position in the Fieldbus virtual station mapping configuraiton menu in the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab.

The following methods are used:

  • A Fieldbus map is placed in the order in which they are assigned to in the Process Data Frame.

  • Each map starts with an Offset value from the beginning of the frame.

  • A map is placed at the lowest possible location, just above the previous map or with offset zero for the first map.

  • If a map is deleted from the Process Data Frame, a gap will be created. When a new map is assigned to a virtual station, the placement rule will try to fill the gap.

  • If the map cannot fit in between existing maps, then the next free position in the array is tried.

The offset value may be changed manually in the Settings window. Care must be taken that Fieldbus maps do not overlap.

If ToolsTalk 2 detects any violation to the placement rules, an error indicator will appear beside the offset parameter. This indicates that maps overlap or that the map is outside the boundary. This may be corrected by changing the offset value.

A

Starting position of first Fieldbus map in the Process Data Frame; Offset = zero

B

Starting position of a Fieldbus map in the Process Data Frame; Expressed as an offset from the beginning of the PDF

C

Size of a Fieldbus map

D

Fieldbus map

E

Size of the Process Data Frame

F

Error example; Blue map overlaps starting position of “green” map

G

Map size

H

Starting position of “blue” map

J

Process Data Frame

K

First map in the Process Data Frame; Offset address is zero

Automatic Placement of Items in the Fieldbus Map

Items are placed automatically in the Fieldbus map. It is possible to change the order later by editing the Fieldbus window.

The following methods are used:

  • Items are placed in the order in which they are added to in the Fieldbus map, within the Fieldbus virtual station mapping configuration menu in Fieldbus and SoftPLC .

  • An item is placed at the lowest possible location with regards to byte, bit and length position.

  • If the item cannot fit in between existing items, the next free position in the array is tried.

  • If an item is deleted from the Fieldbus map, a gap will be created. When a new item is added, the placement algorithm will try to fill the gap.

  • If ToolsTalk 2 detects any violation of the placement rules. An error indicator will appear and indicate the error location. By placing the mouse cursor over the error indicator, more information about the rule violation is displayed.

Editing or Viewing an Item in the Fieldbus Map

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show a list of maps.

  3. Double-click on the name of the selected map.

    The workspace shows the configuration menus.

  4. Select either the To Controller tab, or the From Controller tab in Fieldbus configuration menu.

  5. Double-click the item name in the map table in the Fieldbus configuration menu.

    The Edit item dialog window opens.

  6. Edit the item starting position by typing the BYTE number in which the least significant BIT is located.

  7. Edit the item starting position by typing the BIT in which the least significant BIT is located.

  8. Edit the Length of the item, expressed in number of bits.

  9. Edit an optional Converter value from the drop-down menu.

  10. Select OK to confirm any changes and to close the dialog window.

The Fieldbus configuration menu is updated in both the map and in the table.

Deleting Items From the Fieldbus Map

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show a list of maps.

  3. Double-click on the name of the selected map.

    The workspace shows the configuration menus.

  4. Select the To Controller tab or the From Controller tab in Fieldbus configuration menu.

  5. For each item to be deleted from the map, select the check box in the leftmost position in the table of items in the Fieldbus configuration menu.

  6. Select Delete .

The Fieldbus configuration menu is updated in both the map and in the table.

Exporting a Fieldbus Map

The Fieldbus map defines how signal items are placed into the communication frame that is used between a virtual station and a remote location. This map can be exported as a template and be imported and reused by another controller.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure window .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab in the menu bar.

    Select the Fieldbus sub-tab to show the workspace and a list of maps.

  3. In the leftmost column in the fieldbus workspace, select the check box for the fieldbus map to be exported, and then select Manage followed by Export from the drop-down list.

  4. Browse to the desired location and select Save.

The map will be saved as a JSON file (*.json). The exported file can be imported to a different controller.

Working with Acyclic Fieldbus Configuration

Some of the data in a tightening result will be sent as acyclic data. The IO signal cycle_complete, usually indicates that the acyclic data is ready to be fetched by the PLC programmer.

The section below explains how to configure the acyclic data.

In this Section
  • Acyclic Data Configuration Overview
  • Example of a Tightening Result

Acyclic Data Configuration Overview

In the acyclic data configuration area, it is possible to add a new acyclic data configuration and once added, the different acyclic data configurations are displayed as a list.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Select the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab. .

  3. Select the Acyclic sub-tab.

The columns contain the following information:

Column

Description

Name

Name of the selectable configuration in virtual station mapping.

Select channel by

Bolt or Channel. This value defines if the Identifier of each result configuration item is bolt or channel..

Data layout

Compact or Fixed.

Last changed

Expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Last changed by

Configuration data last changed by <user>.

Controller updated

Expressed in controller time.

Controller updated by

Controller updated by <user>.

In this Section
  • Adding a New Acyclic Data Configuration

Adding a New Acyclic Data Configuration

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab .

  3. Select the Acyclic sub-tab.

  4. Select Add and select New in the Create new acyclic data configuration window.

  5. Enter the acyclic data configuration name and select Add.

    The Properties sub-tab for the newly created configuration opens.

    A new acyclic data configuration is added in the lowest possible position and the list is updated.

In this Section
  • Acyclic Data Configuration Menu
  • Configure Acyclic Data

Acyclic Data Configuration Menu

Double-click on an acyclic data configuration in the Acyclic tab to open the acyclic data configuration menu.

Properties menu:

Parameter name

Description

Name

Name of the selectable configuration in virtual station mapping.

Max size

This value will be manually set until it is mapped to a virtual station. This value makes sure that the configuration fits within the selected instances in mapping. The value is calculated from the required number of instances, according data record size.

First channel or bolt offset

Address of the first channel or bolt offset. This defines the size of the common area.

Bolt or channel template size

Size of the bolt or channel.

Select channel by

Bolt or Channel. This value defines if the Identifier of each result configuration item is bolt or channel.

Data layout

Select between:

  • Compact data layout - If the channel or bolt selected in the acyclic configuration does not exist in the current Sync Mode or system run, then that specific data will not be written on the fieldbus. Instead, the next channel/bolt that is present in the Sync Mode will be written in that space in the fieldbus data and will impact the offsets of all of the following bolts/channels. This only applies to whole bolts/channels and not to individual items or values inside a configured bolt/channel.

  • Fixed data layout - The entire configured acyclic data will be written on the fieldbus regardless of how the current Sync Mode, Tightening Program, or system is configured. If no data can be found for an item, then the Non existing values will be written instead. This can be the case for entire bolts/channels. Reasons as to why there is no data written could be that the bolt does not exist in the current Sync Mode, the channel is inhibited, no restriction/monitor has been chosen in the Tightening Program, or the step selected does not have a restriction/monitor.

Add header

Select the check box to indicate that a header must to be added to the acyclic configuration result. When the checkbox is marked, the offset will be updated with 6 bytes lower or higher, depending on the usage. This is also visible graphically. The header can only be added if there is space available. If items are added in the common area and there is no space for the header, it is disabled.

If the Compact data layout is chosen, it is strongly recommended to use the header in order to know the length of the acyclic data payload.

Non existing values

Non existing values for different data types are used if the configuration wants data that is not present in the tightening result or in the multistage configuration.

When a new acyclic fieldbus is created, the values will be set automatically from the controller.

Configure Acyclic Data

The Configure Acyclic Data area displays the visualization of the acyclic configuration set by max size, offset and template size. All configurations are in the byte level.

The acyclic data frame displayed on the left changes when items are added to the common, bolt or channel area.

If the values of offset and template size are zero, the common, bolt or channel area is greyed out and non-editable.

Data in the Common Area

The common area contains data that is global and is applicable to all the spindles in the same station. The common area data is displayed after the header and before the bolt/channel data.

Bolt or Channel Data

The data in the bolt or channel area is unique for the selected bolt or channel and the layout for the data in the bolt or channel area depends on the data layout chosen.

In this Section
  • Common Area Overview
  • Bolt or Channel Area Overview

Common Area Overview

The first occupied area contains the following items:

  • Multiple tightening result

  • Batch sequence result

  • Result notification

These items are "common" and are not specific to a bolt or a channel and contain the following parameters:

Parameter name

Description

Type

Value type of each item. Example: batch sequence result value, result notification or multiple tightening result value.

Offset

Item position in the byte array with acyclic data frames and is defined in bytes.

Size

Size in bytes. It is possible to configure this manually if the datatype is a string. If the datatype is not a string, the values are set automatically based on the data type.

Data type

Data type values. Example: String, Int8, Int16 and so on.

Name

Item name. Non editable.

Relevant Information
  • Acyclic Result Items
In this Section
  • Adding Acyclic Result Configuration in Common Area
  • Deleting Acyclic Result Configuration from Common Area

Adding Acyclic Result Configuration in Common Area

  1. Select Add in the Common area.

    The Create acyclic result configuration window opens.

  2. Select a parameter from the Multiple tightening, Result notification or Batch sequence drop-down menu.

  3. Select the Output Data Type, enter the offset value and enter the size if the Output Data Type selected was a string.

  4. Select Add and then select Close.

Deleting Acyclic Result Configuration from Common Area

  1. Select the check box for the configuration that needs to be deleted in the Common area.

  2. Select Delete.

Bolt or Channel Area Overview

In the bolt or channel configuration area, it is possible to configure the acyclic data items of the following types for a bolt or a channel:

  • MultiStage tightening

  • Program monitor

  • Program restriction

  • Step monitor

  • Step restriction

Bolt or channel area properties

Parameter name

Description

Type

Value type of each item. Example: MultiStage tightening, Program monitor, Program restriction, Step monitor or Step restriction.

Offset

Item position in the acyclic data frame and is defined in bytes.

Size

Size in bytes. It is possible to configure this manually if the datatype is a string. If the datatype is not a string, the values are set automatically based on the data type.

Data type

Data type values. Example: String, Int8, Int16 and so on.

Name

Item name. Non editable.

Identifier

Sets the ID of the bolt or channel selected.

Relevant Information
  • Acyclic Result Items
In this Section
  • Adding Acyclic Result Configuration in the Bolt or Channel Area
  • Creating Copies in the Bolt or Channel Area
  • Deleting Acyclic Result Configuration from Bolt or Channel Area

Adding Acyclic Result Configuration in the Bolt or Channel Area

  1. Select Add in the bolt or channel area.

    The Create acyclic result configuration window opens.

  2. Select a parameter from the Multistep tightening, Program monitor, Program restriction, Step monitor or Step restriction drop-down menu .

  3. Select the Output Data Type, enter the offset value, identifier and enter the size if the Output Data Type selected was a string.

    For Step monitor and Step restriction, select the step category and choose between Soft start, Rundown, Start and Final.

    Instead of the step number, indicate which step category results should be displayed.

    If there are several steps with the same step category, you can choose to show the step that is Last executed or Last in program (the step with higher order number) in the Step category chooser drop-down menu.

  4. Select Add and then Close.

Creating Copies in the Bolt or Channel Area

It is possible to add many bolts or channels at once using the Create copy tab in the bolt or channel area.

  1. Select the check box of the ID that needs to be copied and select Create copy.

    The Create copy of bolts or channels window opens.

  2. Enter the number of copies in the Amount of copies field.

    If there is no space for a copy, then a warning "The amount of copies cannot fit into the remaining space in the current configuration" is displayed.

  3. Select Create copy and then select Close.

A list of copies with sequential identifier numbers is now visible. The value of the copied ID is always the number after the largest number already existing. For example, if there are ID's 2, 5 and 6 already existing and ID with value 2 is copied, the value of the new ID will be 7. Double-click on the parameters to change any values.

Deleting Acyclic Result Configuration from Bolt or Channel Area

  1. Select the check box for the ID to delete all the configurations under that ID, or to delete an individual configuration, select the check box next to that configuration in the bolt or channel area.

  2. Select Delete.

Example of a Tightening Result

In this fieldbus map, the tightening result data starts at record number 2048 and each record is 64 bytes. The maximum size of the tightening data, including the header is 646 bytes in order to fit up to 64 channels.

Data

Data Type

Position in Frame

Byte

a The length of the data part and the sequence and length from the header, that is the length of data plus 4 bytes

Status

Integer

Header

0-1

Sequence

Integer

Header

2-3

Data lengtha

Integer

Header

4-5

Bolt number channel 1

Integer

Data

6-7

Final torque channel 1

Real

Data

8-11

Final angle channel 1

Real

Data

12-15

Bolt number channel 2

Integer

Data

16-17

Final torque channel 2

Real

Data

18-21

Final angle channel 2

.......................................

Real

Data

22-25

Bolt number channel 64

Integer

Data

636-637

Final torque channel 64

Real

Data

638-641

Final angle channel 64

Real

Data

642-654

The Functionality of the Header Fields

Signal

Data Type

Description

Status

Integer

Added for future use, at the moment always 0x8100

Sequence

Integer

Will always be -1

Data Length

Integer

The length of the data and the Sequence and Length from the header, i.e. length of data + 4 bytes

The Functionality of the Data Fields

Signal

Data Type

Description

Bolt Number Channel X

Integer

Bolt number of the channel according to the configuration in the sync mode used in the tightening. For channels that was not included in the tightening the bolt number will be set to 0

Final Torque Channel X

Real

Final Torque value from the tightening result for the channel. The value is always sent in the unit Nm. For a channel that was not included in the tightening or that did not produced a Final Torque value it will be set to 0x7F820000

Final Angle Channel X

Real

Final Angle value from the tightening result for the channel. The value is always sent in the unit deg. For a channel that was not included in the tightening or that did not produced a Final Torque value it will be set to 0x7F820000

The Final Torque and Final Angle values will be sent a floating point binary32 according to ISO/IEC/IEEE60559:2011. Data is transmitted in network order (Big-endian). If a value cannot be sent the special value 0x7F820000 will be sent. If interpreted as a floating point number, it corresponds to NaN (Not a Number).

The integer values are sent as signed 16 bit integers, i.e. the valid range are -32768 to 32767

For example, if a tightening was made with channel 1 and channel 3 and the following tightening data was produced:

Channel 1

  • Bolt number 1

  • Final Torque 10.23 Nm

  • Final Angle 341.4°

Channel 3

  • Bolt number 5

  • Final Torque 10.32 Nm

  • No final angle was produced

The tightening data is sent at instance number 2048 as following:

Byte

Field

Value

Comment

0-1

Status

0X8100

Will always be 0X8100

2-3

Sequence

-1

Will always be -1

4-5

Length

34

34 bytes, data for three channels + length and sequence number

6-7

Bolt Number Channel 1

1

8 - 11

Final Torque Channel 1

10.23

10.23 Nm

12-15

Final Angle Channel 1

341.4

341.4°

16-17

Bolt Number Channel 2

0

Not included in the tightening

18-21

Final Torque Channel 2

0x7F820000

No torque value available

22-25

Final Angle Channel 2

0x7F820000

No angle value available

26-27

Bolt Number Channel 3

5

28-31

Final Torque Channel 3

10.32

10.32Nm

32-35

Final Angle Channel 3

0x7F820000

No angle value available

SoftPLC Configuration Tab

  • SoftPLC Overview
  • Creating SoftPLC Signal Configurations
  • SoftPLC Virtual Station Mapping Configuration
  • Creating a New SoftPLC Project
    • Creating SoftPLC User Data
    • Setting Up SoftPLC Communications
  • Importing a SoftPLC Project Template

SoftPLC Overview

The SoftPLC is used to customize the behavior of PF6/PFFlex, sending and receiving fieldbus data, or exchanging I/O signals to and from the external SoftPLC. The external SoftPLC is used for control of machinery on assembly lines. Configuration and programming is done through a third party software called MultiProg, integrated with ToolsTalk 2, though running in a process of its own. The SoftPLC is found in the Fieldbus and SoftPLC tab and is visible for controllers supporting this function either by license and/or capability.

Controller features, such as the Low Reaction Tightening Strategies and controller-wide functions among others, require licenses distributed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). Whereas configuration of features is possible without specific licenses, the assignment and use of those features will require the correct license to be installed on the controller. Please refer to Licenses (FMS) for more detailed information on licenses.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Creating SoftPLC Signal Configurations

Interaction between accessories and the SoftPLC is done through exchanging I/O signals.

  1. Select Add in the SoftPLC Signal Configurations field to see the list with all supported I/O signals connected to this controller.

  2. Clear the irrelevant signals in order to exclude them from the SoftPLC signal configuration (all signals are selected by default).

  3. Name the signal configuration list.

The created signal configuration is then available as an option to select from the drop-down list when mapping the signal configurations to the virtual station.

The signals that are not included in a signal configuration (not checked), will still be visible in the SoftPLC configurator Multiprog, but crossed out.

SoftPLC Virtual Station Mapping Configuration

Creating a New SoftPLC Mapping

  1. Select Add in SoftPLC Virtual Station Mapping Configuration

  2. In the Create a New SoftPLC Mapping window, select the required Virtual station and the SoftPLC Signal Configuration from the drop-down menus.

    The same SoftPLC signal configuration can be used for multiple virtual stations.

    Each virtual station can use one SoftPLC signal configuration. When a virtual station is mapped with a particular signal configuration, it is no longer available in the drop-down menu when creating a new SoftPLC mapping. To make it available, delete the existing mapping for that virtual station.

    SoftPLC Index: Connect specific virtual stations on the controller to an ordered index in the SoftPLC environment. For example, if the SoftPLC refers to virtual station 2, this mapping will inform the SoftPLC exactly which virtual station currently is number 2.

    Select Update in the Project Virtual Stations to see any changes you made to a SoftPLC Signal Configuration or SoftPLC Mapping in the SoftPLC project. ToolsTalk 2 will not delete variables in the Multiprog SoftPLC project when updating, and it can only add or modify. Because of this, it is recommended to clear the global variables for Virtual stations or Fieldbus in Multiprog before updating.

Deleting a SoftPLC Mapping

  • Select the virtual station signal configuration mapping by marking the corresponding check box. Select Delete.

Creating a New SoftPLC Project

  1. Create a new SoftPLC Signal Configuration.

  2. Assign the SoftPLC Signal Configuration to the virtual station.

  3. Select SoftPLC ON in General SoftPLC Settings.

  4. Select Create New and the Multiprog opens automatically to a new SoftPLC project.

    This project will use the basic template and this template includes all functions available in Multiprog.

    The created and edited project is continuously saved to the local disc when the project is built and stored in Documents > Mp Temp. At the ToolsTalk 2 SoftPLC startup, when OPEN is selected, the stored data project is uploaded and used if the SoftPLC project has not been saved to the ToolsTalk 2 server.

  5. Edit the SoftPLC program in Multiprog and give the project a Name and Description in ToolsTalk 2.

    Add virtual station mappings with I/O signal configurations by selecting Update in the Project Virtual Stations field.

    Add Fieldbus data by selecting Update in the SoftPLC framesize in fieldbus field.

    The fieldbus frame size must be configured to contain a special SoftPLC input/output part to be able to send and receive fieldbus data directly to/from the SoftPLC.

  6. Select Save to check in the edited project to the ToolsTalk 2 server.

  7. Push the changes to the controller.

Deleting a SoftPLC Project

Deleting a project

  • Select Delete in the Project area. Select Delete again in the dialog window to confirm.

In this Section
  • Creating SoftPLC User Data
  • Setting Up SoftPLC Communications

Creating SoftPLC User Data

The integration is implemented so that we have shared memory mapped between the SoftPLC and the OpenProtocol adapter and upto six virtual stations are supported. A virtual station is allotted 100 bytes for the data to the SoftPLC and 100 bytes for the data from the SoftPLC. A total of 600 bytes is mapped in both directions in total.

The SoftPLC can interact with protocol adapters through a dedicated part of the shared memory.

  1. Select Add in the General SoftPLC Settings field.

  2. In the Create SoftPLC user data window, choose the relevant protocol from the drop-down.

  3. Fill in the To SoftPLC and From SoftPLC address fields with 0 for the Start addresses and 599 for the End addresses.

  4. Select Add.

    The Global_Variables* section in the Multiprog software will contain the output variables (opOUT_VSX) and input variables (opIN_VSX) for each virtual station with the following addresses.

    Virtual Stations

    Open Protocol user Data To SoftPLC

    Open Protocol user Data From SoftPLC

    Virtual Station 1

    %MB3.38400

    %MB3.40448

    Virtual Station 2

    %MB3.38500

    %MB3.40548

    Virtual Station 3

    %MB3.38600

    %MB3.40648

    Virtual Station 4

    %MB3.38700

    %MB3.40748

    Virtual Station 5

    %MB3.38800

    %MB3.40848

    Virtual Station 6

    %MB3.38900

    %MB3.40948

    If you are importing or updating a project that does not already have the above addresses set, then it must be manually added in Multiprog.

  5. Select SoftPLC ON or OFF.

    • On: If the SoftPLC process is lost the tool will be locked from performing any tightenings.

    • Off: If the SoftPLC process is lost the tool will still be able to perform tightenings.

  6. Perform open protocol operations in the controller.

  7. Push the changes to the controller.

Setting Up SoftPLC Communications

  1. In the open Protocol Client, subscribe user data with MID0241.

  2. Controller accepts the command by sending MID0005 to the Open protocol client.

  3. The Open protocol client uses MID0240 to download user data from the controller.

  4. Controller accepts the command by sending MID0005 to the Open protocol client.

  5. Controller uses MID0242 to send data out to the Open Protocol client.

  6. Open protocol client acknowledges with MID0243 that it has received user data.

    Refer to the document "OpenProtocol Appendix for PowerFocus 6000 SW1.5.docx " for further information.

Importing a SoftPLC Project Template

New SoftPLC projects can be created from an existing project template. The templates will serve as a basic suggestion which can be further adjusted. The selected project template is then copied, as to not overwrite the original project.

  1. Select Import Project and select an existing SoftPLC project.

  2. Edit SoftPLC project in the Multiprog.

    Add virtual station mappings with I/O signal configurations by selecting Update in Project Virtual stations.

    Add Fieldbus data by selecting Update in SoftPLC framesize in fieldbus.

  3. Select Save to check in the edited project to the ToolsTalk 2 server.

  4. Push the changes to the controller.

Select Update in Project Virtual Stations and the SoftPLC virtual station mappings are added or updated to the SoftPLC project, if not already included in the project.

Working with the Libraries Tab

The Library tab is located in left side menu bar, it includes global functions and provides the following functionality:

Library functions

Library

Function

Tightening program library

This library contains all global tightening programs available for the controllers to subscribe to. The global tightening programs may be copied from one controller or created in the library, modified and/or distributed to one or more controllers.

Configuration library

This library contains all global configurations available for the controllers to subscribe to. The configurations may be copied from one controller or created in the library, modified and/or distributed to one or more controllers.

Fieldbus configuration library

This library contains all global fieldbus configurations available for the controllers to subscribe to. The fieldbus configurations may be copied from one controller or created in the library, modified and/or distributed to one or more controllers.

Settings library

A library for Event configurations that can be distributed to other controllers. The events can be created here or in the Events section within the Settings and then added to the library. Editing an Event configuration will affect all controllers that subscribe to the configuration.

Program templates library

Create templates for Multistep tightening program. When creating a new multistep program, the template can be inserted (drag-and-drop) and act as a base to build the multistep program on.

Controller configuration library

The controller configuration library contains controller templates that can be used to create and modify controller configurations and distribute them to multiple controllers. The library is also very useful for copying and developing configurations in Station Setup mode without access to a ToolsTalk 2 server installation.

In this Section
  • Libraries - Distribution List
  • Tightening Program Library
  • Global Configurations Library
  • FIeldbus Configuration Library
  • Global Settings Library - Deleting a Global Events configuration
  • Global Settings Library
  • Program Templates
  • Controller Configuration Library

Libraries - Distribution List

The distribution list works like a subscription list. Whenever a change is made to one of the global configurations, the change is propagated to all subscribers. The distribution list manages the subscriptions.

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select one of the following to view the distribution:

    • Global Tightening Program .

    • Global Configuration library .

    • Global Fieldbus library .

    • Global Settings library .

  3. Select one or more check boxes in the chosen library section to view the content of the distribution list.

    The distribution list shows all controllers that subscribe to the currently selected configuration.

Tightening Program Library

  • Tightening Program Library Introduction
  • Tightening Program Library Workspace
  • Tightening Program Library - Adding a Global Tightening Program
  • Tightening Program Library - Deleting a Global Tightening Program
  • Tightening Program Library - Distributing Global Tightening Programs
    • Tightening program library - Distribution list
    • Tightening Program Library - Adding a Global Program to the Distribution List
    • Tightening Program Library - Removing a Global Program Subscription from the Distribution List
  • Tightening Program Library - Updating a Global Tightening Program
  • Tightening program library - Converting a local tightening program to a global program

Tightening Program Library Introduction

The combination of a tightening strategy selection and parameter values forms the tightening program, this is named as a tightening program. The tightening program can be either Global or Local.

A Local tightening program is valid for a single controller and a Global tightening program may have several controllers subscribing to the same tightening program.

A controller can subscribe to Global tightening programs. Whenever a change is made to a program, the change propagates to all controllers in ToolsTalk 2 which subscribe to the program.

The Tightening program library manages the global tightening programs and the controllers that subscribe to specific Tightening programs.

Updates to subscribers are made within the ToolsTalk 2 application. All affected controllers will show the Push indicator in the Line structure workspace.

ToolsTalk 2 can distinguish between a local and a global tightening program, although the controller itself has no knowledge of this. Therefore it is important to specify the action in ToolsTalk 2 if a tightening program is changed via either the controller GUI or the web GUI.

WARNING

Risk of injury

A change in configuration to the tightening program may cause unexpected torque, rotational direction, or speed in the system(s) where the tightening program is currently in use. This could result in severe bodily injury and/or property damage.

  • Check the tightening program configurations after adding a new program or after applying changes to an existing program.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Tightening Program Library Workspace

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Tightening program library .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global tightening programs.

Tightening library overview

Column

Description

Check box

Select a configuration.

Name

Shows the name of the configuration. A Push indicator can be next to the name.

Strategy

The tightening strategy selected for the configuration.

Global

A Yes in the column indicates that this is a global tightening program.

Target

The final target is either expressed in a torque value or in an angle value.

Last changed

When the last changes were made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Which user made the last changes.

Version

Controller software version that can support the Global tightening program library.

Not an actual column.

The list of configurations can be sorted in rising or falling alphabetical order, numerical order or time order. Click on the table header row to make an arrow visible and click on the arrow to change the current sorting direction. One arrow is shown at a time.

Controller type

Shows which controller type the tightening program is intended for.

Tightening library workspace command buttons

Command

Description

Add

  • New. Creates a new tightening program.

  • Import. Import a tightening program. File format is *.json

Manage

  • Distribute. Opens the Distribute Global Configurations dialog window. The selected Global tightening program can be added to the distribution list.

  • Export. Exports a selected tightening program. File format is *.json

  • Delete. Removes selected tightening program from the list.

Select one or more Global tightening programs check box to view the distribution list. The distribution list shows all controllers currently subscribing to the selected programs.

If no global tightening programs exist, the work space area is empty. Select Add to create a new tightening program or double-click on an existing program to view or edit parameters.

Tightening Program Library - Adding a Global Tightening Program

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Tightening Program .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global tightening programs.

  3. Select Add. The Create new tightening program dialog window opens.

  4. Enter the parameters described in the table below.

  5. Select Add in the dialog window. The window closes and the workspace shows the tightening program menus.

Create new Tightening Program parameters

Parameter

Description

Controller type

Select a controller type from the shortcut menu.

Controller software version

Select a controller software version from the shortcut menu.

Name

Issue the global tightening program with a name in the parameter entry field.

Strategy

Select a tightening strategy from the shortcut menu.

Target

Select a target type from the shortcut menu.

Target value

Enter the numeric target value for the final step in the parameter entry field or fields.

WARNING

Risk of injury

A change in configuration to the tightening program may cause unexpected torque, rotational direction, or speed in the system(s) where the tightening program is currently in use. This could result in severe bodily injury and/or property damage.

  • Check the tightening program configurations after adding a new program or after applying changes to an existing program.

Tightening Program Library - Deleting a Global Tightening Program

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Tightening Program .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global tightening programs.

  3. For each tightening program to be deleted, select the check box in the leftmost column.

  4. Select Manage and then select Delete.

    The global tightening program is removed from library and the list is updated.

The controllers subscribing to the deleted program do not lose the program. A deleted tightening program is removed from the list in the Tightening program library workspace. The tightening program is still present in the list in the Tightening workspace of the controllers that have subscribed to the global tightening program. The visible change is that the tightening program is transformed from being a global tightening program to a local tightening program. (The entry in the column Library link is cleared).

Tightening Program Library - Distributing Global Tightening Programs

  • Tightening program library - Distribution list
  • Tightening Program Library - Adding a Global Program to the Distribution List
  • Tightening Program Library - Removing a Global Program Subscription from the Distribution List

Tightening program library - Distribution list

The global tightening program distribution list is like a subscription list. Whenever a change is made to a global tightening program, the change is propagated to all subscribers. The distribution list manages the subscription.

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Tightening Program .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global tightening programs.

  3. Select one or more check box in the Global tightening program library to view the content of the distribution list.

    The distribution list shows all controllers that subscribe to the currently selected tightening programs.

Tightening Program Library - Adding a Global Program to the Distribution List

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Tightening Program .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global tightening programs.

  3. Use the check box to select one or more programs to be added to the distribution list.

  4. Select Manage and then select Distribute.

    The Distribute global configurations dialog window opens.

    The left-side column shows the selected Global tightening programs.

    The right side column show a list of controllers that are compatible with the selected programs and can be added to the distribution list.

    It is only possible to distribute between controllers of the same type and same software versions.

  5. Use the check box to select one or more controllers in the right-side column.

    If a controller already subscribes to the selected Global tightening programs it will not show up in the right-side column.

  6. Optional step: Select the down arrow to open additional configurations.

  7. Optional step: Select the action to be taken by ToolsTalk 2 if a global tightening program is changed by the controller GUI or web GUI.

  8. Select Add.

    The dialog window is closed.

ToolsTalk 2 can distinguish between a local and a global tightening program, although the controller itself has no knowledge of this. Therefore it is important to specify the action in ToolsTalk 2 if a tightening program is changed via either the controller GUI, or the web GUI. This action is defined in the distribution of a global tightening program in the tightening program library.

Tightening Program Library - Removing a Global Program Subscription from the Distribution List

The global tightening program distribution list is like a subscription list. Whenever a change is made to a global tightening program, the change is propagated to all subscribers. The distribution list manages the subscription.

Select one Global tightening program check box to view the content of the distribution list. The distribution list shows all controllers subscribing to the selected program.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Tightening program .

    The Tightening program workspace shows a list of tightening programs.

    The entry in the column Library link is marked with Yes for the selected tightening program.

  3. Select the check box for the selected tightening program.

  4. Select Unlink.

    The entry in the column Library link is cleared for the selected tightening program.

  5. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  6. Go to Tightening program library .

  7. Select the check box of the removed tightening program.

    The distribution list is updated and the controller name is removed from the list.

Tightening Program Library - Updating a Global Tightening Program

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Tightening Program .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global tightening programs.

  3. Double-click on the name field, the tightening menus are editable. The changes are auto saved to the tightening program.

A global tightening program can only be edited or updated if the tightening menus are opened via the library path.

WARNING

Risk of injury

A change in configuration to the tightening program may cause unexpected torque, rotational direction, or speed in the system(s) where the tightening program is currently in use. This could result in severe bodily injury and/or property damage.

  • Check the tightening program configurations after adding a new program or after applying changes to an existing program.

Updates to subscribers are made within the ToolsTalk 2 application. All affected controllers will show the Push indicator in the Plant structure workspace.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Tightening program library - Converting a local tightening program to a global program

It is possible to convert a local tightening program, that has been developed at one controller, to become a global tightening program. This tightening program can then be distributed to selected controllers.

  1. Select a controller from the Plant Strucure and select Tigthening Program .

  2. Select the check box for the program that is to be added to the Tightening Program library.

  3. Select Manage then choose Add to library form the drop-down list. The Create global configuration dialog window opens.

  4. Select Create. The program is added to the list in the Tightening Program library .

ToolsTalk 2 can distinguish between a local and global tightening program, although the controller itself has no knowledge of this. Therefore it is important to specify the action in ToolsTalk 2 if a tightening program is changed via either the controller GUI, or the web GUI.

Global Configurations Library

  • Configurations library introduction
  • Global Configurations Workspace
  • Global Configurations Library - Creating or Importing a Global Configuration
  • Global Configurations Library - Deleting a Global Configuration
  • Global Configurations Library - Creating a Global Configuration From An Existing
  • Global Configurations Library - Distributing a Global Configuration
  • Global Configurations Library - Editing a Global Configuration
  • Global Configurations Library - Removing a Global Configuration Subscription From the Distribution List

Configurations library introduction

The configuration can be either Global or Local.

A Local configuration is valid for a single controller and a Global configuration is valid for several selected controllers.

A controller can subscribe to Global configurations. Whenever any changes are made to a configuration it propagates to all controllers in ToolsTalk 2 that subscribe to the configuration.

The Global configurations library manages the global configurations and the controllers that subscribe to the configurations.

ToolsTalk 2 can distinguish between a local and global configuration. The controller itself has no knowing of local or global configurations. Thus it is important to specify the action in ToolsTalk 2 if a device configuration is changed from either the controller GUI or the web GUI.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Global Configurations Workspace

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Configurations library .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global configuration.

Configurations library overview

Column

Description

Check box

Select a configuration.

Name

Shows the name of the configuration. A Push indicator can be next to the name.

Type

The configuration type

Last changed

When the last changes were made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Which user made the last changes.

Version

Controller software version that can support the Global configuration.

Not an actual column.

The list of configurations can be sorted in rising or falling alphabetical order, numerical order or time order. Click on the table header row to make an arrow visible and click on the arrow to change the current sorting direction. One arrow is shown at a time.

Controller type

Shows which controller type the configuration is intended for.

Configurations library workspace command buttons

Command

Description

Add

  • New. Creates a new configuration.

  • Import. Import a configuration. File format is *.json

Manage

  • Distribute. Opens the Distribute Global Configurations dialog window. The selected Global configuration can be added to the distribution list.

  • Export. Exports a selected configuration. File format is *.json

  • Delete. Removes selected configuration from the list.

Select one or more Global configurations check box to view the distribution list. The distribution list shows all controllers currently subscribing to the selected configuration.

If no global configurations exist, the work space area is empty. Select Add to create a new configuration or double-click on an existing configuration to view or edit parameters.

Global Configurations Library - Creating or Importing a Global Configuration

Creating a Global Configuration:

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to the Configurations library in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

    The workspace shows a list of Global configurations.

  3. Select Add.

    The Create new configuration dialog window is shown.

  4. Enter the following parameters:

    • Select Type of configuration to be added, Controller type and Controller software version for the configuration to apply to.

  5. Select Add in the shortcut window.

  6. The configuration window for selected type of configuration is shown.

The configuration is auto saved to the Configurations library.

Importing an Already Existing Global Configuration:

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Configurations library .

    The workspace shows a list of Configurations.

  3. To add a new configuration to the list, select Add.

    The Create new configuration dialog window is displayed.

  4. Select the Import tab.

  5. Select Open file.

    A browser window opens for reading the import file.

  6. Select the desired import file. The file must be in the format <configuration_name>.json. Select Open.

  7. Select Add in the shortcut window.

  8. The configuration window for the imported configuration is displayed.

The configuration is auto-saved to the configurations library.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Global Configurations Library - Deleting a Global Configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Configuration library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global configurations.

  3. For each configuration to be deleted, select the check box in the leftmost column.

  4. Select Manage and then select Delete.

    The global configuration is removed from the library and the list is updated.

The controllers subscribing to the deleted configuration do not lose the configuration. A deleted global configuration is removed from the list in the Configuration library workspace. The configuration is still present in the list in the Configurations workspace of the configurations that have subscribed to the global configuration. The visible change is that the configuration is transformed from being a global configuration to a local configuration. (The entry in the column Library link is cleared).

Global Configurations Library - Creating a Global Configuration From An Existing

  1. Select a controller containing the desired configuration in the Plant structure .

  2. In the menu bar, go to Configurations .

  3. Select one or more configurations to add to the library and click Manage, then select Add to library.

  4. The selected local configuration will become a global configuration, stored in the Global configurations library.

    If local changes are made in the controller or web interface, there are two options:

    • Auto revert: Changes in the controller will not apply to the global configuration, the global configurations will still be applied.

    • Unlink: Changes in the controller will apply to the configuration in the controller, and the link to the global configuration will be cut. As a result, the global configuration is immediately removed from the distribution list to the controller.

  5. Select Library .

  6. In the upper menu bar, Select Global configurations .

    The workspace shows a list of Global configurations and the newly added configuration is now visible in the list.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Global Configurations Library - Distributing a Global Configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Configuration library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global configurations.

  3. Select the configuration check box . Select Manage and then select Distribute.

    It is only possible to distribute between controllers of the same type and same software versions.

  4. Use the check box to select each configuration which is to be included in the distribution.

  5. Select one or more controllers in the right-side of the dialog window. Select Add in the dialog window.

    Any updates to the global configuration will update the distributed copies. Changes in the global configuration will apply to the selected controllers.

    If local changes are made in the controller or web GUI, there are two options:

    • Auto revert: Changes in the controller will not apply to the configuration, the global configurations will still be valid.

    • Unlink: Changes in the controller will apply to the configuration and the link to the global configuration will be cut. As a result, the global configuration is immediately removed from the distribution list to the controller.

The changes are auto saved to the global configurations library.

All affected controllers will show the Push indicator in the Plant structure workspace.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Global Configurations Library - Editing a Global Configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select Global library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global configurations.

  3. Double-click the configuration to be edited. The configuration window for the selected type of configuration is shown.

The changes are auto saved to the global configurations library.

All affected controllers will show the Push indicator in the Plant structure workspace.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Global Configurations Library - Removing a Global Configuration Subscription From the Distribution List

The global configuration distribution list is like a subscription list. Whenever a change is made to a global configuration, the change is propagated to all subscribers. The distribution list manages the subscription.

Select one Global configuration check box to view the content of the distribution list. The distribution list shows all controllers subscribing to the selected configuration.

To remove the subscription of a Global configuration from one controller:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Configurations .

    The Configurations workspace shows a list of tightening programs.

    The entry in the column Library link is marked with Yes for the distributed configuration.

  3. Select the check box for the selected tightening program.

  4. Select Manage then Unlink from the drop-down menu.

    The entry in the column Library link is cleared for the selected configuration.

  5. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  6. Go to Configurations library .

  7. Select the check box of the removed configuration.

    The distribution list is updated and the controller name is removed from the list.

FIeldbus Configuration Library

The fieldbus configuration can be either Global or Local.

A Local fieldbus configuration is valid for a single controller and a Global fieldbus configuration is valid for several selected controllers.

A controller can subscribe to Global fieldbus configurations. Whenever any changes are made to a configuration it propagates to all controllers in ToolsTalk 2 that subscribe to the configuration.

The Global fieldbus configurations library manages the global fieldbus configurations and the controllers that subscribe to the configurations.

Updates to subscribers are done within the ToolsTalk 2 application. All affected controllers will show the Push indicator in the Line structure workspace.

ToolsTalk 2 can distinguish between a local and global fieldbus configuration, although the controller itself has no knowledge of this. Therefore it is important to specify the action in ToolsTalk 2 if a fieldbus configuration is changed via either the controller GUI, or the web GUI.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
In this Section
  • Fieldbus Configuration Workspace
  • Fieldbus Configuration Library - Creating or Importing a Global Fieldbus Configuration
  • Fieldbus Configuration Library - Deleting a Global Fieldbus Configuration
  • Fieldbus Configuration Library - Creating a Global Fieldbus Configuration from an Existing Fieldbus Configuration
  • Fieldbus Configuration Library - Distributing a Global Fieldbus Configuration
  • Fieldbus Configuration Library - Editing a Global Fieldbus Configuration
  • Fieldbus Configuration Library - Exporting a Global Fieldbus Configuration
  • Fieldbus Configuration Library - Removing a Fieldbus Configuration Subscription from the Distribution List

Fieldbus Configuration Workspace

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Fieldbus library .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global Fieldbus configuration.

Fieldbus library overview

Column

Description

Check box

Select a Fieldbus configuration.

Name

Shows the name of the Fieldbus configuration. A Push indicator can be next to the name.

Size to controller

Displays the receive size of the data frame.

Size from controller

Displays the transmit size of the data frame.

Last changed

When the last changes were made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Which user made the last changes.

Version

Controller software version that can support the Global Fieldbus configuration.

Not an actual column.

The list of configurations can be sorted in rising or falling alphabetical order, numerical order or time order. Click on the table header row to make an arrow visible and click on the arrow to change the current sorting direction. One arrow is shown at a time.

Controller type

Shows which controller type the Fieldbus configuration is intended for.

Fieldbus Configurations library workspace command buttons

Command

Description

Add

  • New. Creates a new Fieldbus configuration.

  • Import. Import a Fieldbus configuration. File format is *.json

Manage

  • Distribute. Opens the Distribute Global Configurations dialog window. The selected Global Fieldbus configuration can be added to the distribution list.

  • Export. Exports a selected Fieldbus configuration program. File format is *.json

  • Delete. Removes selected Fieldbus configuration program from the list.

Select one or more Global Fieldbus configuration check box to view the distribution list. The distribution list shows all controllers currently subscribing to the selected Fieldbus configuration.

If no global Fieldbus configurations exist, the work space area is empty. Select Add to create a new Fieldbus configuration or double-click on an existing configuration to view or edit parameters.

Fieldbus Configuration Library - Creating or Importing a Global Fieldbus Configuration

Creating a Fieldbus Configuration:

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Fieldbus library .

    The workspace shows a list of Fieldbus configurations.

  3. To add a new fieldbus configuration to the list, select Add.

    The Create new fieldbus configuration dialog window is displayed.

  4. Enter the following parameters to add a new fieldbus map:

    • Enter a Name

    • Enter Size to controller and Size from controller

    • Select Controller type and Controller software version for the device, from the shortcut menu.

  5. Select Add in the shortcut window.

  6. The configuration window for the added fieldbus configuration is displayed.

The fieldbus configuration is auto-saved to the fieldbus library.

Importing an Already Existing Fieldbus Configuration:

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Fieldbus library .

    The workspace shows a list of Fieldbus configurations.

  3. To add a new configuration to the list, select Add.

    The Create new fieldbus configuration dialog window is displayed.

  4. Select the Import tab.

  5. Select Open file.

    A browser window opens for reading the import file.

  6. Select the desired import file. The file must be in the format <fieldbus_configuration_name>.json. Select Open.

  7. Select Add in the shortcut window.

  8. The configuration window for the added fieldbus configuration is displayed.

The fieldbus configuration is auto-saved to the fieldbus library.

Relevant Information
  • Creating a New Fieldbus Map

Fieldbus Configuration Library - Deleting a Global Fieldbus Configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Fieldbus configuration library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global fieldbus configurations.

  3. To delete a fieldbus configuration, select the check box in the leftmost column and then select Delete

    The global fieldbus configuration is removed from library and the list is updated.

The controllers subscribing to the deleted configuration do not lose the configuration. A deleted global fieldbus configuration is removed from the list in the Fieldbus configuration library workspace. The fieldbus configuration is still present in the list in the Fieldbus workspace of the fieldbus that have subscribed to the global fieldbus configuration. The visible change is that the fieldbus configuration is transformed from being a global fieldbus configuration to a local fieldbus configuration. (The entry in the column Library link is cleared).

Fieldbus Configuration Library - Creating a Global Fieldbus Configuration from an Existing Fieldbus Configuration

  1. Select a controller (containing the desired fieldbus configuration) in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Select Fieldbus & SoftPlc in the menu bar.

  3. In the Fieldbus menu select one or more fieldbus signal configurations to add to the library. Select Manage then Add to library from the drop-down menu.

    • The Create global configuration dialog window opens. Select Create.

  4. The selected local configuration will become a global configuration, stored in the Global Fieldbus configuration library.

    If local changes are made in the controller or web GUI, the two options below are available:

    • Auto revert: Changes in the controller will not apply to the global fieldbus configuration, the global configurations will still be applied.

    • Unlink: Changes in the controller will apply to the fieldbus configuration in the controller, and the link to the global configuration will be cut. As a result, the global fieldbus configuration is immediately removed from the distribution list to the controller.

  5. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  6. Go to Global fieldbus library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global fieldbus configurations and the newly added fieldbus configuration is now visible in the list.

Fieldbus Configuration Library - Distributing a Global Fieldbus Configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Global fieldbus library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global fieldbus configurations.

  3. Select the check box for the fieldbus configuration to distribute. Select Manage then Distribute from the drop-down menu.

    It is only possible to distribute between controllers of the same type and same software versions.

    The Distribute Global Configurations dialog window opens.

  4. Select one or more controllers in the right-side of the dialog window. Select Add.

    Any updates to the global configuration will update the distributed copies. Changes in the global configuration will apply to the selected controllers.

    If local changes are made in the controller or web GUI, the two options below are available:

    • Auto revert: Changes in the controller will not apply to the global fieldbus configuration, the global configurations will still be valid.

    • Unlink: Changes in the controller will apply to the fieldbus configuration in the controller, and the link to the global configuration will be cut. As a result, the global configuration is immediately removed from the distribution list to the controller.

The changes are auto saved to the global fieldbus configurations library.

All affected controllers will show the Push indicator in the Plant structure workspace.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Fieldbus Configuration Library - Editing a Global Fieldbus Configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Global fieldbus library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global fieldbus configurations.

  3. Double-click the fieldbus configuration to edit.

  4. The configuration window for the selected fieldbus configuration is shown.

The fieldbus configuration is auto-saved to the global fieldbus configurations library.

All affected controllers will show the Push indicator in the Plant structure workspace.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Fieldbus Configuration Library - Exporting a Global Fieldbus Configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Global fieldbus configurations library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global fieldbus configurations.

  3. Select the check box of the global fieldbus configuration to be exported.

  4. Select Export.

    A browser window opens for saving the export file.

  5. The default file name is <configuration>.json Click Save.

Fieldbus Configuration Library - Removing a Fieldbus Configuration Subscription from the Distribution List

The global Fieldbus configuration distribution list is like a subscription list. Whenever a change is made to a global Fieldbus configuration, the change is propagated to all subscribers. The distribution list manages the subscription.

Select one Global Fieldbus configuration check box to view the content of the distribution list. The distribution list shows all controllers subscribing to the selected configuration.

Removing the Subscription of a Global Fieldbus Configuration from One Controller

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Fieldbus & SoftPlc .

    The Fieldbus workspace shows a list of tightening programs.

    The entry in the column Library link is marked with Yes for the distributed Fieldbus configuration.

  3. Select the check box for the selected Fieldbus configuration.

  4. Select Manage then Unlink from the drop-down menu.

    The entry in the column Library link is cleared for the selected Fieldbus configuration.

  5. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  6. Go to Fieldbus Configuration library .

  7. Select the check box of the removed Fieldbus configuration.

    The distribution list is updated and the controller name is removed from the list.

Global Settings Library - Deleting a Global Events configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select the Settings library tab in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

    The workspace shows a list of Global Settings configurations.

  3. For each configuration to be deleted, select the check box in the leftmost column.

  4. Select Manage, then choose Delete from the drop-down menu.

    The Global Settings configuration is removed from the library and the list is updated.

The controllers subscribing to the deleted configuration do not lose the configuration. A deleted global configuration is removed from the list in the Settings library workspace. The configuration is still present in the list in the Event Configurations workspace of the configurations that have subscribed to the global configuration. The visible change is that the configuration is transformed from being a global Event configuration to a local Event configuration (the Library link under Events in Settings is also cleared).

Global Settings Library

Parameter

Description

Check box

Select the Event configuration template.

Name

Shows the name of the Event configuration template.

Last changed

Last change, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Last changes made by...

Version

Controller software version that is supported by the Event configuration template.

Not an actual column.

The list of configurations can be sorted in rising or falling alphabetical order, numerical order or time order. Click on the table header row to make an arrow visible and click on the arrow to change the current sorting direction. One arrow is shown at a time.

Controller type

Shows which controller type the Event configuration is intended for.

Customer Key

Default value None when creating new Global Event configuration. Value taken from controller’s Iam.CustomerKey when creating Global event configuration from an existing controller.

Settings configuration command buttons

Command

Description

 

Add

  • New. Creates a new Event configuration template.

  • Import. Import an Event configuration template. File format is *.json

Manage

  • Distribute. Global Event configurations can be distributed to controllers that have the same CustomerKey. The list of controllers available for distribution will be pre-filtered by controller type + software version + customer key.

  • Export. Exports a selected Event configuration. File format is *.json

  • Delete. Removes selected Event configuration templates from the list.

If no previous Event configuration templates exist, the work space area will be empty. Select Add to create a new Event configuration template, or double-click on an existing template to view or edit the parameters.

In this Section
  • Global Settings Library - Creating or importing a Global Event configuration
  • Global Settings Library - Deleting a Global Events configuration
  • Global Settings Library - Distributing a Global configuration
  • Global Settings Library - Removing a global program subscription from the distribution list
  • Global Settings Library - Editing a Global Event configuration
  • Global Settings Library - Exporting a Global Event configuration

Global Settings Library - Creating or importing a Global Event configuration

Creating a global Event configuration:

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select the Settings library tab in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

    The workspace shows a list of Global Event configurations.

  3. Select Add.

    The Create new Event configuration dialog window is shown.

  4. Enter the following parameters:

    • Issue the configuration a Name.

    • Select the Controller type from the drop-down list.

    • Select the Controller software version for the configuration.

  5. Select Add in the dialog window.

  6. The events configuration window is shown. Expand each section to set the specific parameters.

The new configuration is auto saved to the Global Settings Library.

Importing an already existing global Event configuration:

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Global Settings library .

    The workspace shows a list of Global Event configurations.

  3. To add a new configuration to the list, select Add.

    The Create new Event configuration dialog window is displayed.

  4. Select the Import tab.

  5. Select Open file.

    A browser window opens for reading the import file.

  6. Select the desired import file. The file must be in the format <configuration_name>.json. Select Open.

  7. Select Add in the shortcut window.

  8. The Event configuration window for the imported configuration is displayed.

The configuration is auto-saved to the Event configurations library.

Global Settings Library - Deleting a Global Events configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select the Settings library tab in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

    The workspace shows a list of Global Settings configurations.

  3. For each configuration to be deleted, select the check box in the leftmost column.

  4. Select Manage, then choose Delete from the drop-down menu.

    The Global Settings configuration is removed from the library and the list is updated.

The controllers subscribing to the deleted configuration do not lose the configuration. A deleted global configuration is removed from the list in the Settings library workspace. The configuration is still present in the list in the Event Configurations workspace of the configurations that have subscribed to the global configuration. The visible change is that the configuration is transformed from being a global Event configuration to a local Event configuration (the Library link under Events in Settings is also cleared).

Global Settings Library - Distributing a Global configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select the Settings library tab in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

    The workspace shows a list of Global Event configurations.

  3. Select the check box of the Global Event to be distributed.

  4. Select Manage and choose Distribute from the drop-down menu.

    It is only possible to distribute between controllers of the same type and same software versions.

    The Distribute Global configurations dialog window opens.

  5. Select the check box of each configuration to be included in the distribution.

    Configurations type can be individually selected. Certain dependencies exist between configurations. When selecting to distribute a Global configuration, additional configurations may also be selected by default.

  6. Select one or more controllers in the right side of the dialog window.

  7. Select Add in the dialog window.

    The dialog window closes and the controller is added to the list in Distributed to. A new Library link will be added to the Events menu in Settings.

  8. The selected configurations are only distributed to the controllers in ToolsTalk 2.

The distribution of new configurations will result in existing configurations being deleted and replaced with the configurations from the Library templates.

Global Settings Library - Removing a global program subscription from the distribution list

Removing the Global settings link from the controller:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Go to Settings .

    The Events workspace shows the linked global setting.

  3. Select Manage then Unlink form the drop-down menu.

  4. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  5. Go to Global Settings library .

  6. Select the check box of the removed setting.

    The distribution list is updated and the controller name is removed from the list.

Global Settings Library - Editing a Global Event configuration

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select the Settings library tab in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

    The workspace shows a list of Global Event configurations.

  3. Double-click the configuration to be edited. The configuration window for the selected type of configuration is shown.

The changes are auto saved to the global settings configurations library.

All affected controllers will show the Push indicator in the Plant structure workspace.

Global Settings Library - Exporting a Global Event configuration

A Global Event template can be exported and then reused (imported) in another ToolsTalk 2 installation or in a ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup installation.

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select the Settings library tab in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

    The workspace shows a list of Global Event configurations.

  3. Select the check box of the controller template to be exported.

  4. Select Export

    A browser window opens for saving the export file.

  5. The default file name is <Configuration>.json, select Save.

The exported file can be given any name with the *.json extension.

Inside the exported *.json file the controller template is given the name from the controller column. When a controller template is imported, the name given to the controller template is taken from this field inside the *.json file, regardless of the file name. This means that an imported controller template may have a different name than the imported file name.

To avoid having controller templates with identical names it is advised to give the template a unique name before exporting and not to change the file name.

Program Templates

Library > Program templates

Create templates for Multistep tightening program. When creating a new multistep program, the template can be used as a base to build the multistep program on.

Click Add to create a new template.

Modify an existing template by double clicking on the template in the Program Template list. Multistep programs based on that template will not be affected since the template is copied, not linked, to the programs.

WARNING

Risk of injury

A change in configuration to the tightening program may cause unexpected torque, rotational direction, or speed in the system(s) where the tightening program is currently in use. This could result in severe bodily injury and/or property damage.

  • Check the tightening program configurations after adding a new program or after applying changes to an existing program.

Relevant Information
  • Multistep Template
In this Section
  • Program Templates Workspace
  • Importing a Tightening Program Template

Program Templates Workspace

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Program templates library .

    The workspace area shows a list of Global Tightening Program templates.

Program templates overview

Column

Description

Check box

Select a Tightening Program template.

Name

Shows the name of the Tightening Program template. A Push indicator can be next to the name.

Strategy

The tightening strategy selected for the Tightening Program template.

Target

The final target is either expressed in a torque value or in an angle value.

Last changed

When the last changes were made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Which user made the last changes.

Version

Controller software version that can support the Global Tightening Program template.

Not an actual column.

The list of Tightening Program templates can be sorted in rising or falling alphabetical order, numerical order or time order. Click on the table header row to make an arrow visible and click on the arrow to change the current sorting direction. One arrow is shown at a time.

Controller type

Shows which controller type the Tightening Program template is intended for.

Tightening Program template library workspace command buttons

Command

Description

Add

  • New. Creates a new Tightening Program template.

  • Import. Import a Tightening Program template. File format is *.json

Manage

  • Export. Exports a selected Tightening Program template. File format is *.json

  • Delete. Removes selected Tightening Program template from the list.

Select one or more Global Tightening Program templates check box to view the distribution list. The distribution list shows all controllers currently subscribing to the selected Program template.

If no global Tightening Program templates exist, the work space area is empty. Select Add to create a new Tightening Program template or double-click on an existing Tightening Program template to view or edit parameters.

Importing a Tightening Program Template

A previously exported Tightening Program template can be imported in a ToolsTalk 2 installation or in a ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup installation.

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Program Templates .

    The workspace shows a list of Tightening Program templates.

  3. Select Add and then select the Import tab in the Create new Tightening Program template window.

  4. Select Open file and select the desired import file. The file must have the format <tightening_program_template_name>.json. Select Open.

    The workspace shows an updated list of Tightening Program templates.

    The exported file can be given any name with the *.json extension. The *.json file contains a Tightening Program template name that is shown in the list of Tightening Program templates. When a Tightening Program template is imported, the name given to the Tightening Program template is taken from inside the *.json file, regardless of the file name. This means that an imported Tightening Program template may have a different name than the imported file name. To avoid Tightening Program templates having identical names, it is advised to give the template a unique name before exporting and not to change the file name.

Controller Configuration Library

  • Controller Library Introduction
  • Controller Library Workspace
  • Controller Configuration Library - Creating a New Controller Template
  • Controller Configuration Library - Deleting Controller a Template
  • Controller Configuration Library - Creating a Template From an Existing Controller
  • Controller Configuration Library - Distributing a Controller Template
  • Controller Configuration Library - Editing or Configuring a Controller Template
  • Controller Configuration Library - Exporting a Controller Template
  • Controller Configuration Library - Importing a Controller Template

Controller Library Introduction

The Controller template is an entire virtual controller. It allows a user to create, edit and analyze all controller configurations without having access to a physical controller. A controller template can be created from the beginning with all parameter values empty. A controller template can be created by copying an existing controller with valid configurations and parameters.

A Controller template does not show information about tools, as no tools are connected. Hardware related information and configurations are not possible. Configurations of supporting functions, like various servers, are not possible from a template. When a template is distributed to a controller, these parameters must be checked or added.

Controller Library Workspace

Parameter

Description

Check box

Select controller template.

Controller

Shows the name of the controller template.

Last change

Last change, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed by

Last changes made by...

Version

Controller software version that is supported by the controller template.

Not an actual column.

The list of configurations can be sorted in rising or falling alphabetical order, numerical order or time order. Click on the table header row to make an arrow visible and click on the arrow to change the current sorting direction. One arrow is shown at a time.

Controller type

Shows which controller type the configuration is intended for.

Controller template command buttons

Command

Description

Add

  • New. Creates a new controller template.

  • Import. Import a controller template. File format is *.json

Manage

  • Distribute. Selects configurations from a template that are to be distributed to one or several controllers.

  • Export. Exports a selected controller template. File format is *.json

  • Delete. Removes selected controller templates from the list.

If no controller templates exist, the work space area is empty. Click Add to create a new controller template, or double-click on an existing template to view or edit parameters.

Controller Configuration Library - Creating a New Controller Template

The Controller template is an entire virtual controller. It allows a user to create, edit and analyze all controller configurations without having access to a physical controller. A controller template can be created from the beginning with all parameter values empty. A controller template can be created by copying an existing controller with valid configurations and parameters.

A Controller template does not show information about tools, as no tools are connected. Hardware related information and configurations are not possible. Configurations of supporting functions, like various servers, are not possible from a template. When a template is distributed to a controller, these parameters must be checked or added.

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Controller configuration .

    The workspace shows a list of Controller templates.

  3. Select Add.

    The Create new controller template dialog window is shown.

  4. Enter the following parameters:

    • Issue the controller template with a name.

    • Select the controller type from the drop-down menu.

    • Select the controller software version from the drop-down menu.

  5. Select Add.

    The dialog window closes and the list of controller templates is updated.

It is important to select the correct controller software version. A template can only be distributed to controllers which have the same software version.

Controller Configuration Library - Deleting Controller a Template

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select Controller configuration .

    The workspace shows a list of Controller templates.

  3. Select the check box of the controller template to be deleted.

  4. Select Manage and choose Delete from the drop-down menu. The template is deleted form the list.

Controller Configuration Library - Creating a Template From an Existing Controller

The Controller template is an entire virtual controller. It allows a user to create, edit and analyze all controller configurations without having access to a physical controller. A controller template can be created from the beginning with all parameter values empty. A controller template can be created by copying an existing controller with valid configurations and parameters.

A Controller template does not show information about tools, as no tools are connected. Hardware related information and configurations are not possible. Configurations of supporting functions, like various servers, are not possible from a template. When a template is distributed to a controller, these parameters must be checked or added.

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. Select Manage and choose Add to library from the drop-down menu.

    All the controller configurations, except hardware and tool dependencies, are copied to the controller configuration library.

  3. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  4. Select Controller configuration in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

    The workspace shows a list of Controller configurations and the newly created controller configuration that can be used as a template is shown in the list.

    The name of the controller template is copied from the source controller name.

It is recommended to issue the controller template a unique name in the library.

Controller Configuration Library - Distributing a Controller Template

The Controller template is an entire virtual controller. It allows a user to create, edit and analyze all controller configurations without having access to a physical controller. A controller template can be created from the beginning with all parameter values empty. A controller template can be created by copying an existing controller with valid configurations and parameters.

A Controller template does not show information about tools, as no tools are connected. Hardware related information and configurations are not possible. Configurations of supporting functions, like various servers, are not possible from a template. When a template is distributed to a controller, these parameters must be checked or added.

A controller template or parts thereof can be distributed to one or several controllers. A distribution means that configurations are copied from the template and overwrite the configurations at the destination controllers whenever this is allowed.

The controller template software version, must be the same as the destination controller software version. If they do not match, the distribution is not possible

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Controller configuration .

    The workspace shows a list of Controller templates.

  3. Select the check box of the controller template to distribute.

  4. Select Manage and choose Distribute from the drop-down menu.

    It is only possible to distribute between controllers of the same type and same software versions.

    The Distribute controller template dialog window opens.

  5. Select the check box of each configuration to be included in the distribution.

    Configurations type can be individually selected. Certain dependencies exist between configurations. When selecting to distribute a template configuration, additional configurations may also be selected by default.

  6. Select one or more controllers in the right side of the dialog window.

  7. Select Distribute in the dialog window.

    The dialog window closes.

  8. The selected configurations are only distributed to the controllers in ToolsTalk 2.

The configurations selected for distribution will result in that the existing configurations are deleted and are replaced with the controller configurations from the template.

Relevant Information
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller

Controller Configuration Library - Editing or Configuring a Controller Template

Editing a controller template is very similar to normal controller configuration. Almost all menu icons and parameter settings are identical to what can be done to a real controller in the ToolsTalk 2 GUI.

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Controller configuration .

    The workspace shows a list of Controller templates.

  3. Double-click on the name field in the list of controller templates.

    The controller workspace is identical to a real controller. To show that this is a controller template, the background color of the controller menu is a lighter grey instead of dark.

Controller Configuration Library - Exporting a Controller Template

The Controller template is an entire virtual controller. It allows a user to create, edit and analyze all controller configurations without having access to a physical controller. A controller template can be created from the beginning with all parameter values empty. A controller template can be created by copying an existing controller with valid configurations and parameters.

A Controller template does not show information about tools, as no tools are connected. Hardware related information and configurations are not possible. Configurations of supporting functions, like various servers, are not possible from a template. When a template is distributed to a controller, these parameters must be checked or added.

A controller template can be exported and then reused (imported) in another ToolsTalk 2 installation or in a ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup installation.

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Controller configuration .

    The workspace shows a list of Controller templates.

  3. Select the check box of the controller template to be exported.

  4. Select Manage and choose Export from the drop-down menu.

    A browser window opens for saving the export file.

  5. The default file name is <controller_template_name>.json Select Save.

The exported file can be given any name with the *.json extension.

Inside the exported *.json file the controller template is given the name from the controller column. When a controller template is imported, the name given to the controller template is taken from this field inside the *.json file, regardless of the file name. This means that an imported controller template may have a different name than the imported file name.

To avoid controller templates with identical names it is advised to give the template a unique name before exporting and not to change the file name.

Controller Configuration Library - Importing a Controller Template

The Controller template is an entire virtual controller. It allows a user to create, edit and analyze all controller configurations without having access to a physical controller. A controller template can be created from the beginning with all parameter values empty. A controller template can be created by copying an existing controller with valid configurations and parameters.

A Controller template does not show information about tools, as no tools are connected. Hardware related information and configurations are not possible. Configurations of supporting functions, like various servers, are not possible from a template. When a template is distributed to a controller, these parameters must be checked or added.

A previously exported controller template can be imported in a ToolsTalk 2 installation or in a ToolsTalk 2 Station Setup installation.

  1. Select Library in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Controller configuration .

    The workspace shows a list of Controller templates.

  3. Select Add and then select the Import tab in the Create new controller template window.

  4. Select Open file and select the desired import file. The file must have the format <controller_template_name>.json. Select Open.

    The workspace shows an updated list of Controller templates.

    The exported file can be given any name with the *.json extension. The *.json file contains a controller template name that is shown in the list of controller templates. When a controller template is imported, the name given to the controller template is taken from inside the *.json file, regardless of the file name. This means that an imported controller template may have a different name than the imported file name. To avoid controller templates having identical names, it is advised to give the template a unique name before exporting and not to change the file name.

Working with the System Administration Tab

The System administration tab in ToolsTalk 2 is located in the left side menu bar and provides the following functionality:

System administrations functions

System administration Tabs

Description

Controller Software and Data Management

Manages software updates to all controllers. Organize controllers into Custom sections.

Scheduled Task

Controller configurations can be exported and imported at scheduled intervals.

Compare Configuration

Side by side comparison of two exported files.

Functionality Management System (FMS)

Manages the distribution of licensed functionality among the connected controllers.

User Groups

Different permissions to see or edit information in ToolsTalk 2 can be given to various user groups.

Controller Software and Data Management

  • Export controller results and settings.

  • Import controller settings.

  • Load new controller software.

  • Switch between controller software installations.

  • Generate report.

  • Organize controllers in Custom sections.

Export controller configuration parameters and leave the controller program unchanged.

Import a new controller configuration.

Software update changes the controller's software. Controller name, IP address, and server connections can be manually entered.

Scheduled Tasks

  • Export controller results and settings.

  • Import controller settings.

  • Scheduling of export and import task to selected controllers.

  • Database maintenance

  • Push controller configuration

Export/import changes a controller's configuration parameters and leaves the controller's program unchanged. Controller names, IP addresses and server connections are unaffected by these operations.

Functionality Management System

  • Add licensed functionality to a controller.

  • Remove licensed functionality from a controller.

  • Manage a pool of licensed functionality.

  • Load additional functionality from Atlas Copco when needed and return functionality when not needed any more.

User Groups

  • Create different user groups.

  • Manage the rights to view folders and individual controllers.

  • Manage the rights to configure ToolsTalk 2 functionality.

  • Manage the rights to configure controller parameters and functionality.

In this Section
  • Controller Software and Data Management
  • Scheduled Tasks
  • Functionality Management System (FMS)
  • Comparing Configurations
  • User Groups
  • Program Approval

Controller Software and Data Management

  • Introduction to Controller Software and Data Management
  • Exporting and Importing Controller Configurations and Tool Logs
  • Updating Controller Software
  • Switching Controller Software
  • Generating a Controller Software Report
  • Managing Custom Sections

Introduction to Controller Software and Data Management

Go to System administration , and then select Controller Software and Data Management .

  • Export controller results, configurations and settings.

  • Import controller settings.

  • Load new controller software.

  • Switch between controller software installations.

  • Generate report.

  • Organize controllers in Custom sections.

  • Search for controllers.

Export/import: Changes the controller's configuration parameters and leaves the controller's software program unchanged.

Software update: Changes a controller's software and leaves the controller's configuration parameters unchanged.

Controller names, IP addresses and server connections are unaffected by these operations.

Column

Description

Controller

Controller name.

Controller Type

Which controller type that applies.

Factory port

On: For controllers with enabled communication via factory port.

No text is displayed if the connection is disabled (set to off in the controller settings).

Current version

Current software version.

Red: Software is not in the approved software list. Add it to the list by clicking the Add command button and enter the current software version.

Black: Software is in the approved software list.

Stored version

Stored inactive software version.

Operation

Shows any ongoing operation such as:

Task status and result during import and export, and software update task status and result.

Select the box to the left of the controller name to activate the options listed in the table below.

Button

Description

Restart

To restart the selected controller

Generate Report

Generates the SoftwareVersionReportcsv.csv file and opens a dialog pop-up window for storage selection.

Software

  • Activate stored software: Switches program execution to the stored version. The previous active program reverts to the inactive stored state.

  • Software update: Loads a new program into the controller, into the stored version program space.

Export/Import

  • Export: Exports controller configurations, parameters and results. The file name should be written in the following format: Filename.tar.gz

  • Export Configuration: Exports settings and configurations. The exported file will have a file name and extension that looks like <Filename>.tar.gz.

  • Import: Imports controller configurations and parameters. The file name should be written in the following format: Filename.tar.gz

Button

Description

Edit

Activate and deactivate the Edit mode for organizing Custom sections.

+

Adds a Custom sections folder or subfolder. Only visible in Edit mode.

-

Deletes a Custom sections folder or subfolder. Only visible in Edit mode.

The export and import function also exists in Controller Configurations and in the Scheduled Export and Import . The file format and the results are the same.

The right-side of the workspace window contains a list of approved software which is authorised to execute in a controller. Non-approved software is marked in red in the Current Version column.

Command

Description

Add

Opens a shortcut menu to enter a new software version to the list.

Delete

Removes one or more selected software versions from the list.

The Generate report creates a SoftwareVersionReportcsv.csv file containing a matrix with the following information in the columns:

  • Controller name.

  • Current software version.

  • Stored software version.

  • Indication if the current software is approved or not.

To organize the controllers in the Plant structure and to access the shortcut options below, click on the controller name. The background color of the controller name will change to light blue.

A maximum of 20 controllers can be selected at any one time.

Right-click on a controller to get the below options.

Shortcut menu

Description

Add new controller

Add a new controller to the Plant structure controller list.

Connect controller

Set controller status to online.

Disconnect controller

Set controller status to offline. The controller name will be struck through

Reset operation status

Force controller status to reset. Clears the current status and resets to idle. This does not interrupt the started process and acts as a failsafe if the connection is lost.

Delete

Deletes a controller from the Plant structure controller list.

If a controller is deleted from the All controllers folder it will be permanently deleted.
If a controller is deleted from a subfolder, only the copy of the controller is deleted. The controller will still be accessible in the All controllers folder.

Searching for Controllers

In the Controller Software and Data Management workspace, there are two search fields. One field only searches for controllers in Custom sections and the other one searches for all controllers in the controller list.

  • In the search field, enter at least two letters of the controller name.

    It is possible to search for either the controller name, or Type. In the main controller list, it is also possible to search for Software version (Current version).

Relevant Information
  • Administrating Scheduled Tasks
  • Working with the Controller Information Tab

Exporting and Importing Controller Configurations and Tool Logs

The export/import function is used to export the events and tightening results accessible in the Results menu for analysis in external programs, as well as allowing transfer of tightening program, batch, and controller configurations between controllers.

The command Export/Import can be used for the following reasons:

  • Exporting tightening results and events for further processing.

  • Exporting log files for debug assistance from an Atlas Copco service engineer.

  • Exporting the entire controller configuration that can be used to copy the configuration to another controller.

  • Comparing two exported configurations to see differences.

  • Importing controller configurations.

Exporting

  1. Select theSystem administration tab .

  2. Go to Controller software and data management .

  3. Select the check box of the controller. It is only possible to export a controller configuration if the controller is online.

  4. Select Export/Import to export one of the following:

    Parameter

    Description

    Export

    Exports all controller information.

    The exported file will have a file name and extension that looks like <Filename>.tar.gz.

    Export Configuration

    Exports settings and configurations.

    The exported file will have a file name and extension that looks like <Filename>.tar.gz.

    Export Tool Log

    Exports logs (tightenings and hardware information) from connected tools. Available for SRB, TBP and STB.

    The export consists of atlas_tool_i.zip and ExportInfo.txt

  5. Select the location for saving the export file, select OK.

The filename consists of one part to identify the controller and of one part which is a time stamp.

Importing a controller configuration

The purpose of the Import command is to copy a controller setting and to reuse a previously exported source file and shall have a file name and extension that looks like <Filename>.tar.gz.

  1. Select System administration in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Select Controller software and data management in the upper menu bar in the workspace window.

  3. Select the check box of the controller. It is only possible to import to a controller configuration if the controller is online.

  4. Select Export/Import.

    The Import to selected dialog window opens.

  5. Select Open file and browse to the selected file.

  6. Select the file and select Open.

  7. The file path is shown and the Import button is active. Select Import.

After restarting, the imported file is now in use with a new configuration setting.

A file import does not change the program of the controller. It changes every setting and configuration except the factory IP address.

Updating Controller Software

Updating and switching controller software are two different tasks that are tightly connected. The controller can have two different software versions installed, one active version and one passive version. It is a simple process to switch between the two versions. Switching controller software is the task that switches active and passive software.

Loading New Software to the Controller:

  1. Select the System administration tab .

  2. Go to Controller software and data management .

  3. Select the check box of the controller. It is only possible to update the controller software if the controller is online.

  4. Select Software then Software update from the drop-down menu.

    The Software update dialog window opens.

  5. Select Open file and browse the selected file.

    The file name should end with -px2it.zip

  6. Mark the file and select Open.

  7. The file path is shown and the button Software update is active. Select the button to start loading the software.

Switching Controller Software

Updating and switching controller software are two different tasks that are tightly connected. The controller can have two different software versions installed, one active version and one passive version. It is a simple process to switch between the two versions. Switching controller software is the task that switches active and passive software.

Activating Stored Software in the Controller

  1. Select the System administration tab in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Controller software and data management .

  3. Select the check box for the controller. It is only possible to execute the command if the controller is online.

  4. Select Software then Activate stored Software from the drop-down menu.

  5. The Software update column in the workspace will show the following messages:

    1. Activating stored software.

    2. Stored software activated, controller restarting.

Generating a Controller Software Report

The Controller update workspace shows all the controllers and both their current running software and the stored software.

Generating a List On File:

  1. Select the System administration tab in the left-side menu bar.

  2. Go to Controller software and data management .

  3. Select Generate report.

    The browser dialog window opens.

  4. Select a file location and select Save.

The SoftwareVersionResultcsv.csv file will be written to the selected location.

Managing Custom Sections

  1. Go to the System administration tab , and then select Controller Software and Data Management .

  2. In Custom sections, select Edit to enter the Edit mode. Edit will change color to light blue to indicate it has been selected and two new buttons appear, a + and a -, .

When in Edit mode, the following organizing options are available:

  • Creating a new folder

  • Creating a new subfolder

  • Deleting a folder or subfolder

  • Copying a controller to a folder

  • Changing the display order of folders and controllers

To exit the Edit mode:

  • Select Edit to exit the edit mode. Edit will change color and the + and - buttons will disappear.

Creating a New Folder

  1. To the left of the Edit button, select the + button

    or

    Right-click anywhere in the folder area and choose Add folder in the shortcut menu.

    A New folder will be created and added to the list.

  2. Select the New folder . The color will change to light blue to indicate that it has been selected.

  3. Press F2, re-name the folder and press Enter.

Creating a New Subfolder

  1. To the right of the folder name, click the + button

    or

    Right-click on an existing folder and select Add folder in the shortcut menu.

    A New folder will be created and added to the list.

  2. Select the New folder. The color will change to light blue to indicate that it has been selected.

  3. Press F2, re-name the folder and press Enter.

Deleting a Folder or Subfolder

  • To the right of the folder name, select the - button

    or

    Right-click on an existing folder and click Delete in the shortcut menu.

    The folder will be deleted and the copies of the controllers will be removed.

When a folder containing subfolders is deleted, all the subfolders are deleted too.

Copying a Controller to a Folder

  1. Select All controllers, or the appropriate Custom section, from the drop-down menu above the controller list.

  2. Select a controller. The color will change to light blue to indicate that it has been selected.

    One or many controllers can be selected.

    Press Ctrl+ Left click to add one controller at the time to the selection.

    Press Shift+ Left click to add multiple controllers at once to the selection.

  3. Drag the selected controllers to the destination folder.

Changing the Order of Folders and Controllers

  • Drag the selected folder or controller to its new position.

Scheduled Tasks

Go to the System administration tab , and select Scheduled Task . The workspace displays the following information.

Column

Description

Check box

Select a task by using the check box.

Name

Task type.

Last changed

Time stamp for latest changes.

Changed by

Task modified by...

Latest run

Last time the task was executed.

Running

Status information of a currently running task.

Command

Description

Execute now

One or more tasks can be selected and forced to execute immediately, without waiting for the set scheduled date and time. The Backup location settings must be defined in order for 'Execute now' to work.

Add

Create a new task. Select task type.

Delete

Delete one or more tasks from the task table.

The list of controllers on the right side displays which controllers that are affected by the scheduled task. The list is only populated if one or more tasks are selected.

In this Section
  • Administrating Scheduled Tasks
  • Controller Selection
  • Export Controller Configuration
  • Import Controller Configuration
  • Database Maintenance
  • Push Controller Configuration
  • Backup License Distributions

Administrating Scheduled Tasks

  1. Go to System administration .

  2. Go to Scheduled task .

Double-click on an existing task to view the configuration.

Menu

Description

Properties

Issue the task a name and description.

Schedule

Time and interval settings for the task.

Controllers

Select which controllers are affected by the task.

Results

The result of the task.

Import file

Only visible if the task type is import controller configuration.

Backup location

Only visible if the task type is export controller configuration.

Adding a New Scheduled Task

  1. Select Add.

  2. Select a Scheduled task type:

    • Export controller configurations

    • Import controller configurations

    • Database Maintenance

    • Push controller configuration

    • Export License Distributions

Execute Now

  1. Select a task by selecting the corresponding check box.

  2. Select Execute now in order to run the task immediately.

Deleting a Scheduled Task

  1. Select a task by selecting the corresponding check box, and then select Delete to remove the selected task.

    The deleted task is removed from list of scheduled tasks.

Editing a Scheduled Task

  1. Double-click on the task to be edited.

  2. Edit the scheduled task.

Changes are automatically saved and no Push is needed.

The export and import function also exists in Controller configurations and in the Controller software and data management . The file format and the results are the same in both cases.

Relevant Information
  • Export and Import

Controller Selection

Valid for the Import, Export, and Push controller configuration scheduled tasks.

Select the controllers on which to run the scheduled task.

Parameter

Description

Schedule all controllers

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run on all controllers that are connected to ToolsTalk 2 and that are visible in the plant structure .

The controller list will not be visible when set to Yes.

When set to No, the controller list will be visible and individual selections are possible.

Toggle all

All controllers are automatically marked and the task will run on all controllers.

It is possible to deselect individual controllers.

Select the controllers on which to run the scheduled task. The task will affect the selected controllers only.

Important difference between Toggle all and Schedule all controllers:

Toggle all

Easy to select or deselect individual controllers.

A static list. If new controllers are added, they are not automatically included.

Schedule all controllers

Any changes in the structure with connected controllers will not alter the scheduled task.

Dynamic list, all controllers are affected.

Important notice:

If an import is made to several controllers using the same import file, the controller name field is overwritten by the name of the controller in the imported file. Resulting in all controllers having the same name.

Further import or export with named controllers will fail, as the name will not be recognized anymore.

One way to overcome this issue is to set the Schedule all controllers to Yes.

Export Controller Configuration

This menu is visible if the Scheduled task type is Export controller configuration.

Parameter

Description

Backup location

Enter a valid path to the location to which the export file is to be written. The default value is empty with an error indicator that shows the server does not recognize the location as a valid path.

The path must be valid when the scheduled task is executed.

File name

The exported file is in the format : *.tar.gz

It can later be used to import configurations to controllers or sent to Atlas Copco for debugging purpose or failure analysis.

The default filename is something like PFExport_<controller-name>_<Date-code>.tar.gz.

System variables can be used to differentiate and to create unique filenames.

Folder per controller

When set to Yes, each export will be saved in a separate sub folder.

When set to No, the exports will be saved in the Save Location folder.

Folder name

System variables can be used to differentiate and to create unique folder names.

System variables can be used to specify file names and folder names for the export. They are added at runtime, to the file name or folder to create unique export files or locations.

The system variables are written inside brackets, and the following may be used:

  • [ControllerName]

  • [IpAddress]

  • [ControllerSerialNumber]

It is possible to combine text with system variables. An example is Station_3_[ControllerName]_[IpAddress]. If the controller name is ABC and its IP address is 10.25.25.180, the resulting filename at runtime will be Station_3_ABC_10.25.25.180.tar.gz.

A scheduled file export can only occur if the controller is online at the time of the export and that the export path is valid.

Schedule

Parameter

Description

Enabled

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the scheduled configurations.

When set to No, the scheduled task will not run.

Weekdays

Mark one or more weekdays when the task will run.

Time

Select a run time from the drop-down menu.

Start date

Select a start date for the run time from the calender icon.

Select end date

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule until the end date.

When set to No, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule from the start date.

After a task is executed, the results are shown in the Results menu.

Results

Parameter

Description

Status

The scheduled task status after running the task can show OK or NOK.

Controller

Displayed if available for the task.

Latest run

Time and date when the scheduled task was executed.

Error

Error code examples if the status is NOK.

  • ControllerNotOnline

  • ControllerNotFound

  • NoWriteAccessToStorage

  • ExportFailed

  • ImportFailed

  • FileNotFound

  • TimedOut

Import Controller Configuration

This menu is visible if the Scheduled task type is Import controller configuration.

Menu item

Description

File name

The file and name must be a previously exported configuration file. It must be in the format : *.tar.gz

Browse

The command opens the browser window to locate the file to import.

The file is loaded into ToolsTalk 2 and the scheduled task runs at the scheduled times.

A file import does not change the program of the controller. It changes every setting and configuration except the factory IP address.

A scheduled file import can only occur if the controller is online at the time of the import.

Schedule

Parameter

Description

Enabled

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the scheduled configurations.

When set to No, the scheduled task will not run.

Weekdays

Mark one or more weekdays when the task will run.

Time

Select a run time from the drop-down menu.

Start date

Select a start date for the run time from the calender icon.

Select end date

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule until the end date.

When set to No, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule from the start date.

After a task is executed, the results are shown in the Results menu.

Results

Parameter

Description

Status

The scheduled task status after running the task can show OK or NOK.

Controller

Displayed if available for the task.

Latest run

Time and date when the scheduled task was executed.

Error

Error code examples if the status is NOK.

  • ControllerNotOnline

  • ControllerNotFound

  • NoWriteAccessToStorage

  • ExportFailed

  • ImportFailed

  • FileNotFound

  • TimedOut

Database Maintenance

Events such as controller configurations, libraries, tightening programs, device settings, results, etc. are automatically added to the previously saved events in the database. To clear the database in order to save space, and to make the system more efficient, the history data can be deleted, keeping only the latest results of all the events. Taking "snapshots" of the latest results of all the events can be scheduled in the Database Maintenance feature.

Archive data: Select yes to save (archive) the history data in the database. History data will be deleted after every snapshot if selecting no. Note that the results of the taken snapshots are saved regardless.

Only one instance of Database Maintenance task type can be defined at a time.

Schedule

Parameter

Description

Enabled

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the scheduled configurations.

When set to No, the scheduled task will not run.

Weekdays

Mark one or more weekdays when the task will run.

Time

Select a run time from the drop-down menu.

Start date

Select a start date for the run time from the calender icon.

Select end date

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule until the end date.

When set to No, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule from the start date.

After a task is executed, the results are shown in the Results menu.

Results

Parameter

Description

Status

The scheduled task status after running the task can show OK or NOK.

Controller

Displayed if available for the task.

Latest run

Time and date when the scheduled task was executed.

Error

Error code examples if the status is NOK.

  • ControllerNotOnline

  • ControllerNotFound

  • NoWriteAccessToStorage

  • ExportFailed

  • ImportFailed

  • FileNotFound

  • TimedOut

Push Controller Configuration

This menu is visible if the Scheduled task type is selected to Push controller configuration.

Schedule

Parameter

Description

Enabled

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the scheduled configurations.

When set to No, the scheduled task will not run.

Weekdays

Mark one or more weekdays when the task will run.

Time

Select a run time from the drop-down menu.

Start date

Select a start date for the run time from the calender icon.

Select end date

When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule until the end date.

When set to No, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule from the start date.

After a task is executed, the results are shown in the Results menu.

Results

Parameter

Description

Status

The scheduled task status after running the task can show OK or NOK.

Controller

Displayed if available for the task.

Latest run

Time and date when the scheduled task was executed.

Error

Error code examples if the status is NOK.

  • ControllerNotOnline

  • ControllerNotFound

  • NoWriteAccessToStorage

  • ExportFailed

  • ImportFailed

  • FileNotFound

  • TimedOut

Backup License Distributions

This Scheduled Task is used for creating backups of the License Distributions on a regular basis. The backups are stored on the ToolsTalk2 server and in the event of a ToolsTalk 2 license downgrade, the backup can then be used to restore the controllers with the reserved licenses again.

Only one instance of Backup License Distributions task type can be defined at a time.

Setting Up the Backup License Distributions Task.

Properties

  • Name

    Enter a name for the backup.

  • Description

    Enter a description for the backup.

Schedule

  • Enabled

    • When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the scheduled configurations.

    • When set to No, the scheduled task will not run.

  • Weekdays

    Mark one or more weekdays when the task will run.

  • Time

    Select a run time from the drop-down menu.

  • Start date

    Select a start date for the run time from the calender icon.

  • Select end date

    • When set to Yes, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule until the end date.

    • When set to No, the scheduled task will run according to the schedule from the start date.

Backup Location

  • File name

    Enter a file name for the backup.

Results

  • Status

    The scheduled task status after running the task can show OK or NOK.

  • Latest run

    Time and date when the scheduled task was executed.

  • Error

    • NoWriteAccessToStorage

    • ExportFailed

    • TimedOut

In this Section
  • Restoring the License Distributions from a Backup

Restoring the License Distributions from a Backup

In the event of a ToolsTalk2 license downgrade, the License Distribution backup can be used to restore the License Distributions to the controllers again. The restore is performed by first downloading the License Distributions Backup, and then importing the downloaded backup.

Downloading a License Distributions Backup

  1. Select the System Administration tab , and then go to the Scheduled Tasks tab .

  2. In the workspace, double-click on the Backup License Distribution task.

  3. In Results, select to download the License Distribution backup that is to be restored.

  4. In the Save As dialog , browse to a location for the download, and then select Save.

Importing a License Distributions Backup

The downloaded file will now be accessible for import via the Functionality Management System tab , using the License Distributions Import function.

Relevant Information
  • Managing License Distributions

Functionality Management System (FMS)

  • Functionality Management System Introduction
  • Functionality Management System Definitions
  • Editing the Distribution of License Types and Features
  • Managing License Distributions
  • Distribution of Feature Items
    • Editing the Distribution of License Types and Features

Functionality Management System Introduction

The Functionality Management System (FMS) allows Atlas Copco customers to use additional desired features, when they are needed, through a dynamic licensing scheme.

After receiving a purchase order, the customer’s account in Atlas Copco License Portal (ACLP) will automatically receive the purchased features within 24 hours and these features can be downloaded as a license file.

This capability file (included in the license agreement) is loaded in the Local License Server (LLS) where it is decoded and available for distribution.

A pool of features is created and may be used across a number of controllers. A desired feature item can be uploaded to the controller when needed, and be returned to the pool when it is not needed anymore.

In the Atlas Copco License Portal (ACLP) it is possible to manage an account with all features, entitle and return licenses to/from a license server.

The creation and management of a customer account in the ACLP is not covered in this documentation.

Functionality Management System Definitions

Distribution of functionality to controllers

License distribution

Function

Local License Server (LLS)

A unit that holds the pool of feature items and that can distribute the feature items to the license manager in a controller.

Atlas Copco license portal (ACLP)

A unit that can send a license file, containing all the desired feature items, to the customer.

License

Access rights to feature items. The license states the conditions for how the feature items may be used.

License Manager

A function in the controller that loads, manages and returns feature items.

Virtual Station Type

A license for a fixed collection of features bundled together. Can be assigned in its entirety to a virtual station.

Virtual Station Feature

A license for an individual controller feature, e.g. TurboTight or TrueAngle.

Controller Feature

A license for a controller-wide feature, e.g. Step Sync or Soft PLC. These are assigned per controller and are not restricted to any virtual station on that controller.

Feature item

A piece of software code that can be loaded into the controller to provide additional functionality. The usage conditions are covered by the license agreement.

Intelligent Application module (IAM)

A storage module that contain all the controller programs, configurations and results. Certain modules may also include additional loaded feature items.

Reservation list

The distribution server has a pool of feature items. Some of them are allocated to controllers and some are free for distribution. The reservation list contains information on how feature items are allocated.

Borrow time

Applicable in a networked distribution environment. A controller must periodically check with the LLS and synchronize its feature items with the reservation list.

Expired license

Changes may be made in the controller configuration or program, and a mismatch between the loaded feature items and the content of the reservation list may occur. In this case an error event will be displayed if a feature item is used that has expired on the controller.

Capability file

The binary file that is downloaded from the ACLP. It contains all the valid feature items. When it is decoded and stored on the server, a pool of feature items is available for distribution to the controllers.

Editing the Distribution of License Types and Features

The available License Types and Features can be either added, or removed from the controllers.

  1. Select the System Administration tab .

  2. Select the Functionality Management System tab to display an overview of the License Distribution on the controllers.

  3. Select the Edit button for a specific controller. A dialog window with the available license types and features opens.

  4. Select each of the tabs to enter the count for each license type, or feature, that shall be available on the controller.

  5. Select OK to save and continue.

Managing License Distributions

The ToolsTalk2 server automatically stores an internal backup of the last successful License Distributions state. This backup can be exported from the system.
In the event of a ToolsTalk2 license downgrade, where the hosted Flexera license service database has been reset (deleted), a new license file will have to be generated from the Atlas Copco Customer License Portal (ACLP) and uploaded into ToolsTalk2 via the Functionality Management System tab . With the database reset, the License Distributions are also reset and will have to be restored. Use the Export/Import License Distributions to perform the restore.

Exporting License Distributions
  1. Select the System Administration tab , and then the Functionality Management System tab .

  2. Select the MANAGE button, and then select License Distributions... from the list.

  3. Select the Export tab.

  4. Specify a location for the export, and then select Export.

Importing License Distributions requires that the license file has first been uploaded, so that the system knows how many licenses are available to distribute.

Importing License Distributions
  1. Select the System Administration tab , and then the Functionality Management System tab .

  2. Select the MANAGE button, and then select License Distributions... from the list.

  3. Select the Import tab.

  4. Browse to the import file location, and then select Import.

WARNING! This action will remove any existing reservations and restore the License Distributions to the state in the imported file.

Relevant Information
  • Distribution of Feature Items

Distribution of Feature Items

In the Functionality Management System (FMS) workspace, a user can manage licenses on all the controllers that are connected to the Local License Server (LLS) and online to the ToolsTalk 2 server.

  1. Select the System Administration tab .

  2. Select the Functionality Management System tab to display an overview of the License Distribution on the controllers.

The view and information below assumes that a capability file has been received from Atlas Copco, and that it is loaded into the LLS.

License Distribution Overview

The License Distribution Overview is made up of several Sub-Tabs, these are explained below.

Controller

The Controller sub-tab displays the pool of Licensed Feature Items, that are distributed across controllers. For a more detailed overview, select a specific row to expanded it and view the controller's current capabilities

Controller

Column

Functionality

Edit

For editing the number of licences distributed on the controllers.

Controller

Name issued to the controller.

Virtual Station Types

The amount of licences, by type, distributed to each controller.

Virtual Station Features

Features that are present on each Virtual Station.

Controller Features

Features that are present on each controller.

Virtual Station Types

The Virtual Station Types sub-tab displays the pool of Licensed Virtual Station Feature Types, that are distributed across controllers.

Virtual Station Types

Column

Functionality

Virtual Station Types

Type of License.

Controller Name

Name issued to the controller.

Count

The amount of Licensed Feature Types distributed to the controllers.

Available

The amount of Licensed Feature Types available to distribute to the controllers.

On controller

The amount of controllers on which the Licensed Feature Types are active.

Reserved

The amount of controllers on which the Licensed Feature Types are reserved.

When a license is assigned to a controller from ToolsTalk 2, that license is reserved for that controller in the License server. When the controller connects and syncs with the license server, the license will be in both the states Reserved and On controller.

Total

The amount of Licensed Feature Types available in total.

Virtual Station Features

The Virtual Station Features sub-tab displays the pool of Licensed Virtual Station Feature Items, that are distributed across controllers.

Virtual Station Features

Column

Functionality

Virtual Station Features

Type of Feature

Controller Name

Name issued to the controller.

Count

The amount of Licensed Feature Items distributed to the controllers.

Available

The amount of Licensed Feature Items available to distribute to the controllers.

On controller

The amount of controllers on which the Licensed Feature Items are active.

Reserved

The amount of controllers on which the Licensed Feature Types are reserved.

When a license is assigned to a controller from ToolsTalk 2, that license is reserved for that controller in the License server. When the controller connects and syncs with the license server, the license will be in both the states Reserved and On controller.

Total

The amount of Licensed Feature Items available in total.

Controller Features

The Controller Features sub-tab displays the pool of Licensed Controller Feature Items, that are distributed across controllers, these are dictated by the Tool License

Controller Features

Column

Functionality

Controller Features

Type of Feature

Controller Name

Name issued to the controller.

Count

The amount of Licensed Feature Items distributed to the controllers.

Available

The amount of Licensed Feature Items available to distribute to the controllers.

On controller

The amount of controllers on which the Licensed Feature Items are active.

Reserved

The amount of controllers on which the Licensed Feature Types are reserved.

When a license is assigned to a controller from ToolsTalk 2, that license is reserved for that controller in the License server. When the controller connects and syncs with the license server, the license will be in both the states Reserved and On controller.

Total

The amount of Licensed Feature Items available in total.

FMS Portable

The FMS Portable sub-tab displays the amount of FMS Portable Devices, that are distributed across controllers.

FMS Portable

Column

Functionality

FMS Portable

ID number of the FMS Portable device.

Controller Name

Name issued to the controller.

FMS Workspace Features

Command Button

Command button

Functionality

Manage

  • Download request... - The Capability file is retrieved from the LLS and can be sent to the ACLP for updating.

  • Upload features... - The Capability file file received from ACLP is loaded into the LLS.

  • License Distributions... - For exporting and importing License Distributions.
    For further information, see separate section in the User Guide.

The Capability file is a binary file that contains the license items. The file is created in the Atlas Copco Licensing Portal (ACLP) and downloaded to the customer. When decoded in the distribution server, a pool of features is created that can be distributed to the controllers in two ways:

  • A networked distribution system using the Functionality Management System server which is controlled through the ToolsTalk 2 user interface.

  • A manual distribution system using a secure USB flash drive that is inserted into each controller and managed through the controller user interface. It is described in detail in the controller documentation.

General Information

Column

Functionality

Host Id

A unique identity of the distribution server on which the capability file is loaded.

ToolsTalk2 License

The name of the current functionality level.

ToolsTalk2 Virtual Stations

Number of configured virtual stations / total virtual stations available for configuration

Relevant Information
  • Managing License Distributions
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
  • SoftPLC Overview
In this Section
  • Editing the Distribution of License Types and Features

Editing the Distribution of License Types and Features

The available License Types and Features can be either added, or removed from the controllers.

  1. Select the System Administration tab .

  2. Select the Functionality Management System tab to display an overview of the License Distribution on the controllers.

  3. Select the Edit button for a specific controller. A dialog window with the available license types and features opens.

  4. Select each of the tabs to enter the count for each license type, or feature, that shall be available on the controller.

  5. Select OK to save and continue.

Comparing Configurations

It is possible to make a quick comparison between two configurations by uploading the configuration files to compare. The files must first be exported. Export configuration is done either in the:

  • System administration section, Controller software and data management .

    Or in the:

  • Controller section .

Comparing Two Configurations:

  1. Go to the System administration tab , and click on Compare Configurations .

  2. Select the browse button to locate and upload the file.

    The exported file will have a file name and extension that looks like <Filename>.tar.gz.

    Select the second browse button and find the file to compare with the first file.

  3. Select Compare.

The workspace displays a list of parameters for the two selected configurations. The parameters that are exactly the same for both configurations are visible but not highlighted. The parameters that differs compared with the other file are highlighted in yellow.

Relevant Information
  • Export and Import
  • Exporting and Importing Controller Configurations and Tool Logs

User Groups

  • User Groups Overview
  • User Group Prerequisites
  • Creating, Deleting or Editing a User Group
  • User Group Permissions Menu
  • Folder User Rights
  • Controller User Rights
  • Global Functions User Rights

User Groups Overview

This feature is only visible for users that have user rights as Administrator in ToolsTalk 2.

The User group function in ToolsTalk 2 provides the following functions:

  • Creating or deleting user groups.

  • Assigning user access rights to folders and controllers.

  • Assigning user rights to change controller configurations and parameter settings.

  • Assigning user rights to distribute library functions to several controllers and ToolsTalk 2 administrative tasks.

Viewing the user groups:

  1. Select System administration in the left menu bar.

  2. Select User group in the top menu bar.

Each row in the workspace table represents one user group that can be given different user rights.

The columns have the following headers from left to right:

Column

Description

Check box

To select or deselect a user group.

Name

User group name.

Description

Optional field.

AD group

Active Directory group name. Created by the IT department.

Not an actual column.

The list of configurations can be sorted in rising or falling alphabetical order, numerical order or time order. Click on the table header row to make an arrow visible and click on the arrow to change the current sorting direction. One arrow is shown at a time.

The top row in the table is named Administrators. This user group cannot be deleted.

Command

Description

Add

Create a new user group. A dialog window opens.

Delete

Delete one or more user groups from the group table.

User Group Prerequisites

It is possible to create several user groups in ToolsTalk 2. Each of the user groups can be given different user rights to create, read, update and delete parameters, configurations and folders in ToolsTalk 2.

A network administrator in the company IT department must create one or more Active Directory (AD) groups. An AD group can be assigned to one user group in ToolsTalk 2. Each user group in ToolsTalk 2 can be given one unique set of user rights.

Thus, for every combination of ToolsTalk 2 user rights one AD group must be created. Individual users are assigned to one or more AD groups. All members in the user group have the same user rights in ToolsTalk 2

For example, create the following four groups:

  • Operators on line 1.

  • Line manager for line 1.

  • Factory production engineer.

  • Production quality manager.

Individual users are assigned to one or more of the groups.

Create also four user groups in ToolsTalk 2 (using the same group names). To each user group one AD group is assigned. Create the following user rights:

  • Operators on line 1; can only see tightening results from line 1, and can not change any configuration parameters.

  • Line manager for line 1; can see all controllers and has additional user rights to change configuration parameters for controllers on line 1.

  • Factory production engineer; can change configuration parameters on line 1 and line 2, but can not see all tightening results.

  • Production quality manager; can see all the tightening results and event logs from the entire factory.

Creating, Deleting or Editing a User Group

  1. Select the System administration icon in the left menu bar.

  2. Select the User group icon in the top menu bar.

    The workspace window shows a table of user groups.

    • To delete a user group, select the check box and click Delete.

    • To edit the user rights of a user group, double click on the row in the table. The workspace shows the configuration menus.

    • To add a new user group, click Add. The Create group pop-up window appears and the following parameters must be entered:

      • User group name.

      • Optional user group description.

      • Name of an existing AD group.

  3. Select Add to save and close the window.

    The workspace window shows an updated table of user groups.

User group properties

Column

Description

Name

The ToolsTalk 2 name of the user group

Description

Optional information field.

AD group

Active Directory group name, created by the IT department. Contains individual users who must have the user rights to access the ToolsTalk 2 server.

Enabled Yes/No

Valid only for super administrator credentials.

This function disables the user groups during a downgrade instead of deleting them.

  • Set Enabled to No before downgrading ToolsTalk2.

  • Set Enabled to Yes after upgrading ToolsTalk2 and the license is in place. This starts the client for those specific users in that group, with same permissions set as before the downgrade.

if the Enabled is not set to Yes after the upgrade, the client will not start for those specific users in that group and a warning "'You do not have access to the application" is displayed.

User Group Permissions Menu

  1. Select the System administration icon in the left menu bar.

  2. Select the User group icon in the top menu bar.

    The workspace window shows a table of user groups.

  3. Double-click on one row in the table to enable the editing of a user group.

    The Group permissions menu has three tabs to set user rights.

User group rights

Column

Description

Folders

Assigns user rights to access and modify folders in the plant structure.

Controllers

Assigns user rights to access and modify controllers in the selected folders.

Global functions

Assigns user rights to perform ToolsTalk 2 system administration tasks and global library functions.

  1. Select the Folders tab, and select which folders the user group can access.

    If a folder is invisible, controllers contained in the folder are unaccessible.

  2. Select the Controllers tab, and select what user rights the group has on the controllers.

    If a controller is visible, all configurations and parameters can be read.

  3. Select the Global functions tab, and select which global functions in ToolsTalk 2 the user group can access.

Relevant Information
  • Controller User Rights
  • Folder User Rights
  • Global Functions User Rights

Folder User Rights

The first step in user rights is to assign which folders in the plant structure that are accessible.

  1. Select the System administration icon in the left menu bar.

  2. Select the User group icon in the top menu bar.

    The workspace window shows a table of user groups.

  3. Double click on one row in the table to display the menus for editing.

  4. Click the desired tab in the Group permissions menu.

  5. Set desired user rights for the selected user group. A selected check box indicates that the feature is active.

    The possible combinations are described in the table.

    Changes are automatically saved.

The plant structure contains a folder named All controllers. This folder contains all controllers that are connected to the ToolsTalk 2 server.

Customized folders and sub-folders can be created for improved visibility and for logical grouping of controllers.

User rights to folders

Parameter

Description

Condition

Same permission on all folders

Radio button

If marked, the selected user rights are applicable for all folders in the plant structure (new included).

If unmarked:

If the plant structure is changed, it may be necessary to update the user rights for certain folders.

Manually set permissions on each folder

If marked, the selected user rights are applicable only for the selected folders in the plant structure.

Read

Checkbox

The user group can see the folder and its content.

If unmarked:

The folder and its content is invisible to the user group.

Update

Checkbox

The user group can move, copy and delete controllers to/from the folder.

Create & Delete

Checkbox

With Create & Delete permission for a folder, the user can create and delete a sub-folder within a folder.

With Create & Delete permission for folder All controllers, the user can also delete a controller from ToolsTalk 2.

With Create & Delete permission for all folders (new included), the user also has the possibility to delete main folders.

A folder with no marked user rights is invisible to the user group in the plant structure .

The minimum user rights level for a folder is Read. This level makes a folder visible and its content of subfolders and controllers are also visible.

If a controller is visible, its configurations and parameters can at least be read. Additional user rights can be assigned to the user group.

Controller User Rights

The second step in user rights is to assign what permissions the group has on selected controllers that are accessible in the plant structure .

If a controller is visible, configurations and parameters can be read. Additional designated user rights can be given to the user group.

  1. Select the System administration icon in the left menu bar.

  2. Select the User group icon in the top menu bar.

    The workspace window shows a table of user groups.

  3. Double click on one row in the table to display the menus for editing.

  4. Click the desired tab in the Group permissions menu.

  5. Set desired user rights for the selected user group. A selected check box indicates that the feature is active.

    The possible combinations are described in the table.

    Changes are automatically saved.

User rights to controllers

Parameter

Description

Condition

Same permission on all controllers (new included)

Radio button

If marked, the selected user rights are applicable for all visible controllers in the plant structure (new included.

If unmarked:

If the plant structure is changed, for example if new controllers are added, it is necessary to update the user rights for the controllers.

Manually set permissions on each controller

Radio button

If marked, the selected user rights are applicable only for selected controllers in the plant structure.

Update

Check box

Members of the user group can:

  • Change controller configurations and settings that already exist on the controller.

  • Revert the changes, Push the changes to the controller and Unlink global configurations.

  • Restart a controller from Controller in the plant structure.

Create & Delete

Check box

Members of the user group Create & Delete have the permissions to:

  • Create and delete configurations on the controller.

  • Paste configurations to the controller (copied from other controllers or from a library).

  • Export and Import controller data to/from file from controller in Plant structure.

Open the folder and display the content.

Close the folder and hide the content.

(X/Y)

X controllers out of totally Y controllers in the marked folder, do have the selected privilege

A folder with no marked user rights is invisible to the user group in the plant structure .

The minimum user rights level for a folder is Read. This level makes a folder visible and its content of subfolders and controllers are also visible.

If a controller is visible, its configurations and parameters can at least be read. Additional user rights can be assigned to the user group.

Global Functions User Rights

The third step in user rights is to assign which global functions in ToolsTalk 2 are accessible.

  1. Select the System administration icon in the left menu bar.

  2. Select the User group icon in the top menu bar.

    The workspace window shows a table of user groups.

  3. Double click on one row in the table to display the menus for editing.

  4. Click the desired tab in the Group permissions menu.

  5. Set desired user rights for the selected user group. A selected check box indicates that the feature is active.

    The possible combinations are described in the table.

    Changes are automatically saved.

If a user group has the Create & Delete user rights level for a controller, it is possible to create and edit all controller configurations.

Global functions is a group of ToolsTalk 2 administrative functions and library functions with icons in the left side menu. A user group can be given different user rights to global functions.

If no user rights are allowed for a function, the function is inaccessible to the user and the icon is hidden from the user.

User group rights to global and administrative functions - reports

Function

Selection

Description

Global function: Reports

Results

Enabled

If marked, the user group can see the Results workspace for the selected controller.

If unmarked, the icon is not visible in ToolsTalk 2

Events

Enabled

If marked, the user group can see the Events workspace for the selected controller

If unmarked, the icon is not visible in ToolsTalk 2

User group rights to global and administrative functions - system administration

Function

Selection

Description

Global function: System administration

Schedule export and import

Enabled

If marked, the user group can see and configure parameters for scheduling export and import of configurations and parameters.

If unmarked, the icon is not visible in ToolsTalk 2

Controller software and data management

Enabled

If marked, the user group can see and configure software updates for selected controllers.

If unmarked, the icon is not visible in ToolsTalk 2

Functionality management system

Enabled

If marked, the user group can manage licensed functionality and load and remove functionality from selected controllers.

If unmarked, the icon is not visible in ToolsTalk 2

User group administration

Enabled

If marked, the user group can see and configure user group user rights.

If unmarked, the icon is not visible in ToolsTalk 2

program Approval

Enabled

If marked, the user group can send programs for approval and also approve or reject a program.

If unmarked, the icon is not visible in ToolsTalk 2.

User group rights to global and administrative functions - system administration

Function

Selection

Description

Global function: Library

Controller configuration library

Program library

Configuration library

Fieldbus library

Read

If marked, the user group can see and read parameters in the library.

If unmarked, the icon is not visible in ToolsTalk 2

Controller configuration library

Program library

Configuration library

Fieldbus library

Update

If marked, the user group can see and edit parameters in the library. Controllers that subscribe to the library are automatically updated.

Controller configuration library

Program library

Configuration library

Fieldbus library

Create & Delete

If marked, the user group can create, edit and delete configurations in the library. Controllers that subscribe to the library are automatically updated.

Controller configuration library

Program library

Configuration library

Fieldbus library

Distribute

If marked, the user group can create, edit and delete configurations in the library. Controllers that subscribe to the library are automatically updated.

In addition, the distribute user rights allows the user group to distribute global configurations to controllers that previously have not subscribed to library configurations.

Global configurations will be created in affected controllers.

Program Approval

This section describes the approval process for tightening or loosening programs. The program approval is managed by a user with approval privileges, and applies to the Power Focus 6000, PF6 FlexSystem and the StepSync controllers.

Relevant Information
  • User Group Permissions Menu
In this Section
  • Sending a Program for Approval
  • Program Approval Workspace

Sending a Program for Approval

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure workspace .

  2. On the toolbar, select Tightening program .

    The Tightening program overview shows a list of tightening programs.

  3. Select the check box for the program that needs to be sent for approval.

    Only programs that have been pushed to the controller can be sent for approval.

  4. Select Manage and then select Send for approval.

    The program is now visible and ready to be approved or rejected in the Program Approval tab.

Copying and pasting a tightening program does not copy the approval statues. The copied program will have the status Undefined.

Relevant Information
  • Global Functions User Rights

Program Approval Workspace

  1. Go to System administration and select Program Approval .

    The Program Approval overview shows a list of controllers which have pending program approvals.

  2. Select the controller to expand and see the list of programs.

Column

Description

Check box

Select a program by marking the check box.

Name

Name of the tightening or loosening program.

Last Changed

Last changes made, expressed in ToolsTalk 2 time.

Changed By

Indicates which user made the last changes.

Last Approved

Last approval to the program, expressed in controller time.

Last Approved By

Indicates which user last approved the program.

Approval Status

Approval status of the program.

In this Section
  • Approval Statuses
  • Approving or Rejecting a Program

Approval Statuses

Status

Description

Undefined

All new programs created in theToolsTalk 2 software and the controllers will have the status undefined.

Pending approval

The program is sent for approval.

Approved

The program is approved and may be used on the controller.

Unapproved

The program is being changed/optimized. The program can be sent for approval once it is finalized.

Rejected

The program is rejected by the approver and needs correction.

All programs can be used irrespective of the approval statuses. Approval statues do not affect operational function of any programs.

Once a program enters the approval workflow, it will always have a status. Only programs that have never been sent for approval have the status "Undefined"

Approving or Rejecting a Program

Only users with program approval user rights can approve or reject a program that is sent for approval. This feature is only available in licence level Line Manager.

  1. Go to System administration and select Program Approval .

    The Program Approval overview shows a list of controllers which have pending program approvals.

  2. Select the controller to expand and see the list of programs.

  3. Mark the checkbox for the program you would like to approve/reject.

  4. Select Manage and select Approve or Reject.

Working with Push Configuration Changes

ToolsTalk 2 contains mirrored data per each controller that is connected to the ToolsTalk 2 server. Data is automatically copied from the controller to ToolsTalk 2 at first connection, at reconnecting or at any configuration made in the controller or in the web interface.

Data from ToolsTalk 2 to the controller is not sent automatically. The operator must push data to the controller for the changes to apply.

A controller that is offline can have its configuration settings or parameter values changed by the ToolsTalk 2 application, the data is then stored and can be pushed later.

If any configuration settings are changed in ToolsTalk 2, the Push indicator appears next to the controller name in the structure listing and also next to the tightening programs that have been changed.

  • Configurations can be made in the ToolsTalk 2 interface regardless whether the controller is online or offline.

  • Configurations can only be pushed to a controller in online state. If the controller is offline, the command is ignored.

  • A push can be made to multiple controllers simultaneously.

  • As soon as the Push command is successfully executed, the indicator disappears.

In this Section
  • Pushing Configurations to a Controller
  • Reverting Controller Configurations

Pushing Configurations to a Controller

WARNING

Risk of injury

A change in the configuration of the tightening program may cause unexpected torque, rotational direction, or speed in the system(s) where the tightening program is currently in use. This could result in severe bodily injury and/or property damage.

  • Check the tightening program configurations after adding a new program or after applying changes to an existing program.

Pushing Configurations to One or More Controllers:
  1. There are several different ways to push changes to a controller:

    • Select the Push indicator icon next to the controller name in the controller list.

    • Select the Manage button in the tab menu, then Push changes from the drop-down list.

    • Select the Push Changes button in the upper information bar.

  2. After selection, the Controllers to push dialog window appears.

  3. There are optional ways to push the configurations:

    A

    Select this check box in order to push all configurations at once. This will apply to all controllers in the list.

    B

    All configurations for the selected controllers will be pushed. Select controllers by marking the corresponding check box.

    C

    Expand the list of configurations for a controller and handpick what configurations to be pushed. The remaining configurations will still be in the list after the selected ones have been pushed.

  4. Select the Push command button (D).

  5. Select Cancel or close the window to exit.

Reverting Controller Configurations

Changes made in the ToolsTalk 2 application are automatically saved. The Push symbol , indicates that changes have been made to a controller, but are not yet pushed.

  1. Select the Manage button, and then select Revert from the drop-down menu.

  2. In the Revert controller warning dialog, select OK to revert the controller configurations, or CANCEL to cancel the reverting process.

The Revert operation removes all configurations stored in ToolsTalk 2 for the selected controller. It will also remove any blocking for the selected controller. Any changes made in the controller or web interface are copied to the database, just as usual.

Reports

In this section, you can learn about available reports.

In this Section
  • Results and Events
  • Adding Controller Event Notifications

Results and Events

ToolsTalk 2 has the capability to show more detailed tightening results than the smaller screen on the controller GUI.

Tightening results from the controller are automatically sent from the controller to ToolsTalk 2 as soon as the tightening is finished.

The controller has also the option to send the tightening results to ToolsNet 8 for further processing and statistical analysis.

In ToolsTalk 2 it is possible to view the results and to create reports from one controller at a time. Each task is displayed as one result. A single tightening can show results in a table with key parameters or as a tightening graph. A batch sequence shows all the individual tightenings in the order they were performed.

Statistical analysis, result filtering and tightening analysis can be performed using ToolsNet 8. More information on how this is done is described in the ToolsNet 8 documentation.

 

Icon

Description

The workspace area shows tightening results from the selected controller. The results can be shown both in table format and in graphical traces.

Controller events are shown according to the configurations in Settings .

In this Section
  • Working with the Results Tab
  • Working with the Events Tab

Working with the Results Tab

The tightening results are displayed in a condensed list that can be individually or collectively chosen to analyze further.

Select Show only NOK reslults at the bottom of each page to only view the results with NOK status.

Tightening Result

GUI part

Description

Holding pin

Select the holding pin icon to pin the result to the pinned tab.

Trace icon

Select the trace icon to view a graphical view of the results in the Trace workspace.

Save icon

This command creates a zip-file with the result data. A pop-up dialogue window is opened to save the file at a desired location.

Shunt calibration

Shows if shunt calibration is displayed.

Overall Status

Total status of the tightening, OK or NOK.

Type

Virtual station name

Name of the virtual station.

Sync Mode Index and name

Index and name of the sync mode used in the tightening.

Time Stamp

Time stamp for the tightening, that is, time and date.

Channel Result

For each channel an overall result is reported with the following content:

GUI part

Description

Trace

Select the trace icon to view a graphical view of the results in the Trace workspace.

Save

This command creates a csv-file with the result data. A pop-up dialogue window is opened to save the file at a desired location.

Bolt Name

The number and name of the bolt. Set in Sync Mode > “Name of the sync mode” > Bolt configuration > Bolt and Bolt name.

Status

Total status of the tightening, OK or NOK.

Multistep Name

The name of the tightening program. Set in Tightening and Multistep Program > “Name of the tightening program” > Basic settings > Name .

Channel

The channel number.

Target Angle

The Target Angle will display the Target Angle value configured for the tightening strategy, which is used to perform the tightening.

Final Angle

The actual measured angle of the last tightening step It is the Step Monitor Peak Angle located in the last tightening step that reports this parameter.

Final Torque

Final Torque for the tightening. It is the Step Monitor Peak Torque located in the last tightening step that reports this Parameter.

Target torque

Target torque.

Elapsed time

Time from tightening start to end.

Shunt calibration

Select this icon to display the shunt calibration data.

Step Results

Each step in the multistep tightening program reports data. Most of this data is coming from the monitors and restrictions that are active during the step, so the data is only reported if a monitor or restriction of the correct type is configured.

Step Result Parameter

Description

Step

The number of the step.

Status

Status of the step, OK or NOK.

Step type

Step type in the multistep program.

Path

Indicates there in the program the step is located, that is, if it is in the tightening path or a repair or termination path.

Peak torque (Nm)

Measured final torque including the torque induced during the internal break. Typically the peak torque is higher than the shut-off torque.

Elapsed time

Time from tightening start to end.

Angle

 

Result Reporter

The list shows the values from the result reporters. If there is a result reporter defined for a program monitor/restriction, the value from that monitor/restriction is reported. If there is no result reporter defined for a program monitor/restriction, the value from the latest executed result reporter in main path will be reported.

Evaluation order if several reporters of the same type are defined in a program:

  1. result reporter on program monitor/program restriction.

  2. result reporter on monitor/restriction of the last executed step in main path.

Values on the highest level of the multistep result set by the corresponding result reporter:

  • final angle set by result reporter final angle

  • final torque set by result reporter final torque

  • current set by result reporter current

Trace

On a result click on the Trace icon if it is active. . The result graph is displayed. It is possible to view several traces simultaneously by selecting several traces.

The Trace workspace shows detailed graphical information on one or several tightening result.

On the workspace, use the mouse wheel to zoom in or zoom out. Or you can select an area to zoom in. Double click the trace area to go back.

Examples:

Select an area to zoom in:

To move the trace, press the wheel button of the mouse:

In the trace graph, delta information based on the selected axis types can be displayed. Right click the two points you want to compare to show the delta between them. Drag the point to modify the target.

Drag the delta to move it or press Delete to delete it.

Trace settings/preferences

Description

Show limits

Check this box to If one curve is shown, limit values can be shown if they are used in the tightening program.

Show Min/Max

Show minimum or maximum measured value.

Peak Sync

Different curves may look the same, but are placed differently in the graph.

This option creates an overlay of the curves and synchronizes their peak values.

|X-Axis|

Show the absolute value for X-axis.

Y1

Choose the information to be shown in the Y1-axis:

  • Torque

  • Angle

  • Speed

  • Current

  • Gradient

Y2

Choose the information to be shown in the Y2-axis:

  • None

  • Torque

  • Angle

  • Speed

  • Current

  • Gradient

Y3

Choose the information to be shown in the Y3-axis:

  • None

  • Torque

  • Angle

  • Speed

  • Current

  • Gradient

X

Choose which information to be shown X-axis:

  • Time

  • Angle

Remove all Δ

Remove all the deltas.

Save...

This command creates a picture of the graphical area. A pop-up dialogue window is opened to save the file at a desired location. The file name is by default export.png.

Remove all

This button clears the trace plot area.

The traces are still in the results and can be accessed again in "live results" workspace.

Shunt Calibration

  • Click the shunt calibration icon on a result to get the shunt calibration parameters.

Before a tightening each tool performs a shunt calibration and zero offset compensation.

 

 

Multistep name

Name of the tightening program the tool runs.

Gain

Relative to measured zero torque.

Gain Difference

Gain difference compared to previous calibration.

Gain Limit High

High limit relative to measured zero torque.

Gain Limit Low

Low limit relative to measured zero torque.

Gain Max Change

Maximum amount the gain may change compared to previous calibration.

Offset

Signed offset relative to ideal zero torque.

Offset Difference

Offset difference compared to previous calibration.

Offset Limit High

High limit relative to ideal zero torque.

Offset Limit Low

Low limit relative to ideal zero torque.

Offset Limit Low

Low limit to ideal zero torque.

Offset Max Change

Maximum amount the offset may change compared to previous calibration.

Shunt Failed

True or False.

Zero Offset Failed

True or False.

Pinned - Holding area for investigation

Tightening results can temporarily be stored into the Pinned area. This is useful for detailed analysis of a tightening, and prevents the tightening result to be dropped from the window as new results are received.

  • Manually: On a result, select the Pin icon.

    The tightening result is copied to the Pinned area for investigations. It is possible to pin several results to the temporary storage.

  • Automated: Select the Auto pin drop-down menu and enter number of results to be pinned. Select Start. The next incoming result will be pinned automatically, continuing until the entered number has been reached, or until pressing Stop.

Remove all results from the pinned area

To remove individual results, unpin it by selecting the Pin icon .

Live Results

A controller sends tightening results to ToolsTalk 2 as soon as the task is completed, and the result is added to the top of the Live results. A limited number of results can be stored. When the list is full, the oldest result is dropped from the list.

On the top level the result for a synchronized tightening with several channels contain the following information:

GUI part

Description

Red bar

The leftmost position in the Live results table may be a red bar icon , indicating erroneous tightenings for quick identification of errors. This corresponds to NOK.

Holding pin

Select the holding pin icon to pin the result to the pinned tab.

Save icon

This command creates a .csv file with the result data. A dialog window is opened as to save the file in a desired location.

Trace icon

Select the trace icon to view a graphical view of the results in the Trace workspace.

Overall Status

OK or NOK.

NOK is always in combination with the red bar icon, to quickly identify erroneous tightenings.

Virtual station name

Name of the virtual station.

Sync Mode Index and name

Index and name of the sync mode used in the tightening.

Time Stamp

Time stamp for the tightening, that is, time and date.

Working with the Events Tab

To view controller events:

  1. Select a controller in the Plant structure .

  2. Go to Events .

The workspace area shows events from the selected controller. Events are changes in the controller operating state.

For each controller, a maximum of 1024 latest received events can be stored in the ToolsTalk 2 database when the controller is online. However, when the controller is offline, the latest ten of the results occurring during the time are stored and will be transferred to ToolsTalk 2 when the controller goes online.

Result Parameter

Description

Severity

Shown as a symbol.

Date and time

Shown as the set time in the controller.

Code

Events code number.

Description

Description of the event.

Details

More detailed information about the event.

Virtual Station

Virtual station name.

Group

Controller, Drive, Tool or Carrier.

Channel

Channel where the event is triggered.

Carrier

Carrier number.

Serial number

Serial number of the device.

Severity symbols

Symbol

Description

Event of type error.

Event of type warning.

Event of type information.

In this Section
  • Severity Types

Severity Types

Events are divided into three categories; Information, Warning and Error.

Information Event

Information events signal a noteworthy event that has occurred from actions performed by the user or the system. Information events do not require any specific user actions.

Warning Event

Warning events signal a potentially serious condition that could affect the system performance or result in injury.

Error event

Error events signal a serious condition, such as a failed service, that almost exclusively requires the user to make changes to the setup or the configuration in order to continue.

Adding Controller Event Notifications

This section explains how to enable notifications for different controller events. If you want to receive notifications for a particular controller event, the Log and Display checkbox should be ticked for those events in the Events sub-tab in the Settings menu.

  1. Select in the top right corner of the workspace.

  2. In the ToolsTalk 2 User Settings dialog box, you can choose to switch Off all notifications or enable the following notifications:

    • Show All

    • Show Errors and Warnings

    • Show Errors Only

  3. Select Save and Close.

    Based on what controller events are enabled (Log and Display boxes ticked) in the Settings/Events menu and the value selected in the ToolsTalk 2 User Settings (Errors, Warnings or both), all the events that are received from the connected controllers are displayed in the Controller Events Notifications window as and when they are received.

    Select a controller in the list to expand and see all the notifications related to that controller.

    Each notification has the following values described:

    Item

    Description

    Severity

    The severity is identified by icons:

    • - Error

    • - Warning

    • - Information

    Code

    Event code identification.

    Description

    Event code description.

    Date and Time

    Time stamp when the event occurred, expressed in controller time.

    Group

    System description.

Relevant Information
  • Event Configuration
  • Severity Types

Troubleshooting and Service

This section provides assistance in troubleshooting problems, should they arise, and contains information to help you maintain and service the product.

In this Section
  • Troubleshooting During Installation
  • Troubleshooting During Startup

Troubleshooting During Installation

Restart the ToolsTalk Industrial Technique Host service after upgrading ToolsTalk 2.

Error

Solution

Error code 1920

Failed to start. Verify you have correct permission

Database authentication error. For the SQL database mixed mode authentication must be configured.

Use the SQL management studio to correct the authentication. A restart of the computer is most likely needed before another installation attempt can be made.

The InstallShield Wizard detects if installations have already been made, when using an installation file. If older installations are present on the computer, they may not be detected.

It is therefore recommended to remove old instances of the program and of the database catalog before starting a new installation.

Troubleshooting During Startup

Error

Solution

Application starts, but the desired controller is not seen.

Controller network connection is not correct.

Make sure the controller is connected correctly to the factory network.

Applicable if a network connection is used.

Application starts, but the desired controller is not seen.

Controller configuration to the ToolsTalk 2 is not correct.

Make sure the server connections in the controller configuration point to the correct ToolsTalk 2 server.

Error message "Network connection lost or server unavailable" displayed when the ToolsTalk 2 is started.

The client application is not connected properly to the server application.

Check that the server application has started.

The application should start automatically. If this does not happen then a solution can be to remove the application (uninstallation) and reinstall the application.

Relevant Information
  • System Information

References

  • Fieldbus Signals
    • Input Signals
      • Abort Sequence - 10012
      • Batch Decrement - 10002
      • Batch Increment - 10001
      • Bypass Tightening Program - 10008
      • Channel Command - 10054
      • Disable Fieldbus - 10049
      • Disable Test Bolt - 10057
      • Disable tool - 30000
      • Dynamic Batch Size - 10074
      • Enable Operation - 10055
      • Fieldbus AsyncData To PF - 10077
      • Fieldbus Lock Loosening - 20021
      • Fieldbus Lock Tightening - 20020
      • Flush Read Result Queue - 30005
      • Select Input Bit 4 - 10066
      • ID for Dynamic Batch Size - 10073
      • Lock Loosening - 20003
      • Lock Tightening - 20002
      • Lock Tool Active High - 20004
      • Lock Tool Active Low - 20061
      • Master Unlock - 10005
      • Pulse Stop - 10030
      • Read Result Handshake Ack - 30004
      • Reset All Identifiers - 10115
      • Reset Batch - 10003
      • Reset Batch Sequence - 10053
      • Reset Cycle Status - 10056
      • Reset Latest Identifier - 10114
      • Reset Sequence Status - 10118
      • Reset System Error - 10062
      • Reset Too Many NOK - 10013
      • Select Input - 10020
      • Select Input and Dynamic Batch Size - 30007
      • Select Input Bit 0 - 10016
      • Select Input Bit 1 - 10017
      • Select Input Bit 2 - 10018
      • Select Input Bit 3 - 10019
      • Select Input Bit 5 - 10067
      • Select Input Bit 6 - 10068
      • Select Input Bit 7 - 10069
      • Select Input Bit 8 - 10070
      • Select Input Bit 9 - 10071
      • Select Loosening - 10029
      • Select Next Identifier Number - 10116
      • Select Previous Identifier Number - 10117
      • Start Loosening - 10011
      • Start Loosening, Pulse - 10072
      • Start Tightening - 10010
      • Start Tightening Pulse - 10024
      • Start Tools - 10028
      • Start Tools, Pulse - 10113
      • To SoftPLC - 10065
      • Unlock Tool on Complete - 10051
    • Output Signals
      • Active Identifier String - 186
      • Active Identifier String 1 - 188
      • Active Identifier String 2 - 189
      • Active Identifier String 3 - 190
      • Active Identifier String 4 - 191
      • Batch Completed - 30
      • Batch Completed NOK - 37
      • Batch Completed OK - 36
      • Batch Count - 31
      • Batch Running - 32
      • Batch Sequence Completed NOK - 46
      • Batch Sequence Completed OK - 45
      • Batch Sequence Done - 48
      • Batch Sequence Running - 47
      • Bolt Tightening Status - 79
      • Channel Hardware Status - 81
      • Channel Tightening Status - 80
      • Configuration Version - 88
      • Controller Switched On - 42
      • Current Running Batch - 180
      • Cycle Complete - 77
      • Cycle NOK - 76
      • Cycle OK - 75
      • Cycle Running - 78
      • Cycle Ready To Start - 82
      • Emergency Stop - 20036
      • Event Code - 30001
      • Event Code Severity - 30003
      • Event Present - 161
      • Fieldbus AsyncData From PF - 107
      • Fieldbus Disconnected - 96
      • From SoftPLC - 10064
      • Last Received Identifier String - 187
      • Loosening is Locked - 28
      • Loosening NOK - 74
      • Loosening OK - 70
      • Max Consecutive NOK Reached - 35
      • No System Error - 83
      • No System Warning - 102
      • Program Start - 132
      • Read Result Queue Flushed - 30006
      • Received Identifier 1 - 192
      • Received Identifier 2 - 193
      • Received Identifier 3 - 194
      • Received Identifier 4 - 195
      • Remaining Batch - 33
      • Selected Mode Id - 72
      • Selected Sequence Bit 0 - 139
      • Selected Sequence Bit 1 - 140
      • Selected Sequence Bit 2 - 141
      • Selected Sequence Bit 3 - 142
      • Selected Sequence Bit 4 - 143
      • Selected Sequence Bit 5 - 144
      • Selected Sequence Bit 6 - 145
      • Selected Sequence Bit 7 - 146
      • Selected Sequence Bit 8 - 147
      • Selected Sequence Bit 9 - 163
      • Selected Sequence Id - 84
      • Sequence Aborted - 160
      • Service Indicator Alarm - 137
      • Size of Sequence - 181
      • Software Major Version - 86
      • Software Minor Version - 87
      • Software Release Version - 85
      • Station Ready - 71
      • Test Bolt Activated - 91
      • Tightening is Locked - 27
      • Tightening NOK - 4
      • Tightening OK - 3
      • Tool Loosening - 22
      • Tool Tightening - 21
    • Input/Output Signals
      • Clear Results - 39
      • Disable Open Protocol Commands - 10060
      • External Identifier - 10045
      • External Monitored 1 - 10035
      • External Monitored 2 - 10036
      • External Monitored 3 - 10037
      • External Monitored 4 - 10038
      • External Monitored 5 - 10039
      • External Monitored 6 - 10040
      • External Monitored 7 - 10041
      • External Monitored 8 - 10042
      • Fieldbus Keep Alive - 30002
      • Generic IO 1 - 50
      • Generic IO 10 - 59
      • Generic IO 2 - 51
      • Generic IO 3 - 52
      • Generic IO 4 - 53
      • Generic IO 5 - 54
      • Generic IO 6 - 55
      • Generic IO 7 - 56
      • Generic IO 8 - 57
      • Generic IO 9 - 58
      • Generic Rising Edge 1 - 169
      • Generic Rising Edge 10 - 178
      • Generic Rising Edge 2 - 170
      • Generic Rising Edge 3 - 171
      • Generic Rising Edge 4 - 172
      • Generic Rising Edge 5 - 173
      • Generic Rising Edge 6 - 174
      • Generic Rising Edge 7 - 175
      • Generic Rising Edge 8 - 176
      • Generic Rising Edge 9 - 177
    • Subsignals - Input
      • Inhibit No Result
      • Inhibit NOK result
      • Inhibit OK result
      • Force pset
      • Force bolt id
    • Subsignals - Output
      • All signals
      • Cycle running
      • Inhibited
      • In Selected Mode
      • Running repair
      • Running termination
      • Tightening running
      • Loosening running
      • Last cycle OK
      • Last cycle NOK
      • Last cycle Inhibited
      • Last cycle Not included
      • Last cycle Terminated by other
      • Last cycle Hardware error
      • Tool Led Mirror Green
      • Tool Led Mirror Yellow
      • Tool Led Mirror Red
      • Last tightening OK
      • Last tightening NOK
      • Last loosening OK
      • Last loosening NOK
      • Last cycle Timeout
      • Last cycle Torque High
      • Last cycle Torque Low
      • Last cycle Angle High
      • Last cycle Angle Low
  • Soft PLC Signals
  • Acyclic Result Items
  • Overall Status Additional Information
  • File Formats For Export and Import
  • Printing Scenarios
  • System Information

Fieldbus Signals

  • Input Signals
    • Abort Sequence - 10012
    • Batch Decrement - 10002
    • Batch Increment - 10001
    • Bypass Tightening Program - 10008
    • Channel Command - 10054
    • Disable Fieldbus - 10049
    • Disable Test Bolt - 10057
    • Disable tool - 30000
    • Dynamic Batch Size - 10074
    • Enable Operation - 10055
    • Fieldbus AsyncData To PF - 10077
    • Fieldbus Lock Loosening - 20021
    • Fieldbus Lock Tightening - 20020
    • Flush Read Result Queue - 30005
    • Select Input Bit 4 - 10066
    • ID for Dynamic Batch Size - 10073
    • Lock Loosening - 20003
    • Lock Tightening - 20002
    • Lock Tool Active High - 20004
    • Lock Tool Active Low - 20061
    • Master Unlock - 10005
    • Pulse Stop - 10030
    • Read Result Handshake Ack - 30004
    • Reset All Identifiers - 10115
    • Reset Batch - 10003
    • Reset Batch Sequence - 10053
    • Reset Cycle Status - 10056
    • Reset Latest Identifier - 10114
    • Reset Sequence Status - 10118
    • Reset System Error - 10062
    • Reset Too Many NOK - 10013
    • Select Input - 10020
    • Select Input and Dynamic Batch Size - 30007
    • Select Input Bit 0 - 10016
    • Select Input Bit 1 - 10017
    • Select Input Bit 2 - 10018
    • Select Input Bit 3 - 10019
    • Select Input Bit 5 - 10067
    • Select Input Bit 6 - 10068
    • Select Input Bit 7 - 10069
    • Select Input Bit 8 - 10070
    • Select Input Bit 9 - 10071
    • Select Loosening - 10029
    • Select Next Identifier Number - 10116
    • Select Previous Identifier Number - 10117
    • Start Loosening - 10011
    • Start Loosening, Pulse - 10072
    • Start Tightening - 10010
    • Start Tightening Pulse - 10024
    • Start Tools - 10028
    • Start Tools, Pulse - 10113
    • To SoftPLC - 10065
    • Unlock Tool on Complete - 10051
  • Output Signals
    • Active Identifier String - 186
    • Active Identifier String 1 - 188
    • Active Identifier String 2 - 189
    • Active Identifier String 3 - 190
    • Active Identifier String 4 - 191
    • Batch Completed - 30
    • Batch Completed NOK - 37
    • Batch Completed OK - 36
    • Batch Count - 31
    • Batch Running - 32
    • Batch Sequence Completed NOK - 46
    • Batch Sequence Completed OK - 45
    • Batch Sequence Done - 48
    • Batch Sequence Running - 47
    • Bolt Tightening Status - 79
    • Channel Hardware Status - 81
    • Channel Tightening Status - 80
    • Configuration Version - 88
    • Controller Switched On - 42
    • Current Running Batch - 180
    • Cycle Complete - 77
    • Cycle NOK - 76
    • Cycle OK - 75
    • Cycle Running - 78
    • Cycle Ready To Start - 82
    • Emergency Stop - 20036
    • Event Code - 30001
    • Event Code Severity - 30003
    • Event Present - 161
    • Fieldbus AsyncData From PF - 107
    • Fieldbus Disconnected - 96
    • From SoftPLC - 10064
    • Last Received Identifier String - 187
    • Loosening is Locked - 28
    • Loosening NOK - 74
    • Loosening OK - 70
    • Max Consecutive NOK Reached - 35
    • No System Error - 83
    • No System Warning - 102
    • Program Start - 132
    • Read Result Queue Flushed - 30006
    • Received Identifier 1 - 192
    • Received Identifier 2 - 193
    • Received Identifier 3 - 194
    • Received Identifier 4 - 195
    • Remaining Batch - 33
    • Selected Mode Id - 72
    • Selected Sequence Bit 0 - 139
    • Selected Sequence Bit 1 - 140
    • Selected Sequence Bit 2 - 141
    • Selected Sequence Bit 3 - 142
    • Selected Sequence Bit 4 - 143
    • Selected Sequence Bit 5 - 144
    • Selected Sequence Bit 6 - 145
    • Selected Sequence Bit 7 - 146
    • Selected Sequence Bit 8 - 147
    • Selected Sequence Bit 9 - 163
    • Selected Sequence Id - 84
    • Sequence Aborted - 160
    • Service Indicator Alarm - 137
    • Size of Sequence - 181
    • Software Major Version - 86
    • Software Minor Version - 87
    • Software Release Version - 85
    • Station Ready - 71
    • Test Bolt Activated - 91
    • Tightening is Locked - 27
    • Tightening NOK - 4
    • Tightening OK - 3
    • Tool Loosening - 22
    • Tool Tightening - 21
  • Input/Output Signals
    • Clear Results - 39
    • Disable Open Protocol Commands - 10060
    • External Identifier - 10045
    • External Monitored 1 - 10035
    • External Monitored 2 - 10036
    • External Monitored 3 - 10037
    • External Monitored 4 - 10038
    • External Monitored 5 - 10039
    • External Monitored 6 - 10040
    • External Monitored 7 - 10041
    • External Monitored 8 - 10042
    • Fieldbus Keep Alive - 30002
    • Generic IO 1 - 50
    • Generic IO 10 - 59
    • Generic IO 2 - 51
    • Generic IO 3 - 52
    • Generic IO 4 - 53
    • Generic IO 5 - 54
    • Generic IO 6 - 55
    • Generic IO 7 - 56
    • Generic IO 8 - 57
    • Generic IO 9 - 58
    • Generic Rising Edge 1 - 169
    • Generic Rising Edge 10 - 178
    • Generic Rising Edge 2 - 170
    • Generic Rising Edge 3 - 171
    • Generic Rising Edge 4 - 172
    • Generic Rising Edge 5 - 173
    • Generic Rising Edge 6 - 174
    • Generic Rising Edge 7 - 175
    • Generic Rising Edge 8 - 176
    • Generic Rising Edge 9 - 177
  • Subsignals - Input
    • Inhibit No Result
    • Inhibit NOK result
    • Inhibit OK result
    • Force pset
    • Force bolt id
  • Subsignals - Output
    • All signals
    • Cycle running
    • Inhibited
    • In Selected Mode
    • Running repair
    • Running termination
    • Tightening running
    • Loosening running
    • Last cycle OK
    • Last cycle NOK
    • Last cycle Inhibited
    • Last cycle Not included
    • Last cycle Terminated by other
    • Last cycle Hardware error
    • Tool Led Mirror Green
    • Tool Led Mirror Yellow
    • Tool Led Mirror Red
    • Last tightening OK
    • Last tightening NOK
    • Last loosening OK
    • Last loosening NOK
    • Last cycle Timeout
    • Last cycle Torque High
    • Last cycle Torque Low
    • Last cycle Angle High
    • Last cycle Angle Low

Input Signals

  • Abort Sequence - 10012
  • Batch Decrement - 10002
  • Batch Increment - 10001
  • Bypass Tightening Program - 10008
  • Channel Command - 10054
  • Disable Fieldbus - 10049
  • Disable Test Bolt - 10057
  • Disable tool - 30000
  • Dynamic Batch Size - 10074
  • Enable Operation - 10055
  • Fieldbus AsyncData To PF - 10077
  • Fieldbus Lock Loosening - 20021
  • Fieldbus Lock Tightening - 20020
  • Flush Read Result Queue - 30005
  • Select Input Bit 4 - 10066
  • ID for Dynamic Batch Size - 10073
  • Lock Loosening - 20003
  • Lock Tightening - 20002
  • Lock Tool Active High - 20004
  • Lock Tool Active Low - 20061
  • Master Unlock - 10005
  • Pulse Stop - 10030
  • Read Result Handshake Ack - 30004
  • Reset All Identifiers - 10115
  • Reset Batch - 10003
  • Reset Batch Sequence - 10053
  • Reset Cycle Status - 10056
  • Reset Latest Identifier - 10114
  • Reset Sequence Status - 10118
  • Reset System Error - 10062
  • Reset Too Many NOK - 10013
  • Select Input - 10020
  • Select Input and Dynamic Batch Size - 30007
  • Select Input Bit 0 - 10016
  • Select Input Bit 1 - 10017
  • Select Input Bit 2 - 10018
  • Select Input Bit 3 - 10019
  • Select Input Bit 5 - 10067
  • Select Input Bit 6 - 10068
  • Select Input Bit 7 - 10069
  • Select Input Bit 8 - 10070
  • Select Input Bit 9 - 10071
  • Select Loosening - 10029
  • Select Next Identifier Number - 10116
  • Select Previous Identifier Number - 10117
  • Start Loosening - 10011
  • Start Loosening, Pulse - 10072
  • Start Tightening - 10010
  • Start Tightening Pulse - 10024
  • Start Tools - 10028
  • Start Tools, Pulse - 10113
  • To SoftPLC - 10065
  • Unlock Tool on Complete - 10051

Abort Sequence - 10012

When a Batch sequence abort request is received, the Batch sequence functionality aborts the batch sequence only after getting the ongoing tightening result.

Name in SoftPLC: ABORT_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Decrement - 10002

Incrementally decreases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_DECREMENT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Increment - 10001

Incrementally increases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_INCREMENT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Bypass Tightening Program - 10008

Skips the next tightening program in the running batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: BYPASS_PSET

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Channel Command - 10054

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_COMMAND

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

uint32 array

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

This signal contains subsignals, refer to Subsignals - Input for all the subsignals.

Disable Fieldbus - 10049

Disables the fieldbus.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_FIELDBUS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Test Bolt - 10057

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_TESTBOLT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable tool - 30000

If the signal is set to True, a tool is immediately stopped and locked.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Dynamic Batch Size - 10074

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Enable Operation - 10055

Name in SoftPLC: ENABLE_OPERATION

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Fieldbus AsyncData To PF - 10077

Name in SoftPLC:

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

uint8 array

16

2048

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus Lock Loosening - 20021

A Virtual Station is locked when starting a loosening if the signal is set from a connected and supported accessory.
An ongoing loosening is aborted immediately when Fieldbus Lock Loosening is set to True, due to the Stop Drive setting.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Fieldbus Lock Tightening - 20020

A Virtual Station is locked when starting a tightening if the signal is set from a connected and supported accessory.
An ongoing tightening is aborted immediately when Fieldbus Lock Tightening is set to True, due to the Stop Drive setting.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Flush Read Result Queue - 30005

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Select Input Bit 4 - 10066

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

ID for Dynamic Batch Size - 10073

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE_TPID

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

1

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

1

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Lock Loosening - 20003

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tightening - 20002

Tool locked for tightening by digital input.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active High - 20004

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active Low - 20061

Locks the tool when this signal is low.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Master Unlock - 10005

Unlocks most locks defined in lock page.

Name in SoftPLC: MASTER_UNLOCK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Pulse Stop - 10030

If this signal is generated any ongoing tightening or loosening will be stopped. Used in combination with 10024 or 10072.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_STOP_PULSE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Read Result Handshake Ack - 30004

Enable the Read Result Handshake feature in the Fieldbus device for making the controller available for the signal Rear Result Handshake Ack.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Reset All Identifiers - 10115

In Source batch string used to reset all received string identifiers from string receiving sequence at once. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_ALL_IDENTIFIERS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch - 10003

Resets the batch counter to 0. No batch OK (nxOK). If batch OK is activated, it will be deactivated.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch Sequence - 10053

Resets the Batch Sequence. Unlocks a tool that is locked by Tool Lock on Complete.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Cycle Status - 10056

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_CYCLE_STATUS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Latest Identifier - 10114

In Source batch string used to reset latest received string from string receiving sequence. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_LATEST_IDENTIFIER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Sequence Status - 10118

Resets signals Batch Sequence Done/OK/NOK and Sequence Aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_SEQUENCE_STATUS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset System Error - 10062

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_SYSTEM_ERROR

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Too Many NOK - 10013

Reset the batch after receiving lock Too Many NOK

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_TOO_MANY_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input - 10020

Selects Tightening Program withing Source Tightening/Batch within sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_INPUT_VALUE

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

1

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Select Input and Dynamic Batch Size - 30007

It is used to set the Batch Size for a specific "Identifier Number" in a Source Tightening Task, running "External batch control".

Batch size can be set to 1-250.

If Batch size is set to 0, it is treated as infinite batch. The user is not able to un-set a Batch back to a state where it has no size, once it has been set.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

16

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

16

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Select Input Bit 0 - 10016

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_0

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 1 - 10017

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 2 - 10018

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 3 - 10019

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 5 - 10067

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 6 - 10068

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 7 - 10069

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 8 - 10070

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 9 - 10071

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Loosening - 10029

Selects loosening as default operation mode and used in combination with Start Tools -10028 signal.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_LOOSENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Relevant Information
  • Start Tools - 10028

Select Next Identifier Number - 10116

It is possible to use the signal Select Next Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

  • Batch Sequence

  • Source Tightening

  • Source Batch

    • Number Identifier method

    • String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Next Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Next Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number.
If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 1,2,4,5,1,2,4... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the next identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task.
The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the next larger one.

When the biggest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next bigger identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the identifier number has been added to the Source Tightening list, but no tightening program has ever been assigned to it, it is skipped while looping through the Source Tightening list.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Next Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Next Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Next Identifier Number iterates and selects 1,2,4,8,0,1,2...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Next Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_NEXT_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Previous Identifier Number - 10117

It is possible to use the signal Select Previous Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

  • Batch Sequence

  • Source Tightening

  • Source Batch

    • Number Identifier method

    • String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number.
If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 5,4,2,1,5,4,2... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the previous identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task.
The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the previous lower one.

When the smallest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next smaller identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number iterates and selects 8,4,2,1,0,8,4...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Previous Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_PREVIOUS_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Loosening - 10011

Active signal starts loosening. Once digital input goes inactive the loosening must be stopped.

Name in SoftPLC: START_LOOSENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Loosening, Pulse - 10072

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_PREVIOUS_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tightening - 10010

Active signal starts tightening. Once input goes inactive the tightening must be stopped.

Name in SoftPLC: START_TIGHTENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tightening Pulse - 10024

The tightening starts at signal. Runs until the tightening is finished, or until the 30 sec timeout in tightening program occurs.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_START_PULSE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tools - 10028

Active signal which starts the tool (default operation mode is tightening). As soon as signal goes inactive the tool must be stopped. Used in combination with Select Loosening - 10029 signal.

Name in SoftPLC: START_DRIVE_CONTINIOUS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Relevant Information
  • Select Loosening - 10029

Start Tools, Pulse - 10113

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To SoftPLC - 10065

Name in SoftPLC: TO_PLC

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

uint8 array

1

1

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Complete - 10051

Unlocks a tool that is locked by "Tool Lock on Complete".

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_COMPLETE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Output Signals

  • Active Identifier String - 186
  • Active Identifier String 1 - 188
  • Active Identifier String 2 - 189
  • Active Identifier String 3 - 190
  • Active Identifier String 4 - 191
  • Batch Completed - 30
  • Batch Completed NOK - 37
  • Batch Completed OK - 36
  • Batch Count - 31
  • Batch Running - 32
  • Batch Sequence Completed NOK - 46
  • Batch Sequence Completed OK - 45
  • Batch Sequence Done - 48
  • Batch Sequence Running - 47
  • Bolt Tightening Status - 79
  • Channel Hardware Status - 81
  • Channel Tightening Status - 80
  • Configuration Version - 88
  • Controller Switched On - 42
  • Current Running Batch - 180
  • Cycle Complete - 77
  • Cycle NOK - 76
  • Cycle OK - 75
  • Cycle Running - 78
  • Cycle Ready To Start - 82
  • Emergency Stop - 20036
  • Event Code - 30001
  • Event Code Severity - 30003
  • Event Present - 161
  • Fieldbus AsyncData From PF - 107
  • Fieldbus Disconnected - 96
  • From SoftPLC - 10064
  • Last Received Identifier String - 187
  • Loosening is Locked - 28
  • Loosening NOK - 74
  • Loosening OK - 70
  • Max Consecutive NOK Reached - 35
  • No System Error - 83
  • No System Warning - 102
  • Program Start - 132
  • Read Result Queue Flushed - 30006
  • Received Identifier 1 - 192
  • Received Identifier 2 - 193
  • Received Identifier 3 - 194
  • Received Identifier 4 - 195
  • Remaining Batch - 33
  • Selected Mode Id - 72
  • Selected Sequence Bit 0 - 139
  • Selected Sequence Bit 1 - 140
  • Selected Sequence Bit 2 - 141
  • Selected Sequence Bit 3 - 142
  • Selected Sequence Bit 4 - 143
  • Selected Sequence Bit 5 - 144
  • Selected Sequence Bit 6 - 145
  • Selected Sequence Bit 7 - 146
  • Selected Sequence Bit 8 - 147
  • Selected Sequence Bit 9 - 163
  • Selected Sequence Id - 84
  • Sequence Aborted - 160
  • Service Indicator Alarm - 137
  • Size of Sequence - 181
  • Software Major Version - 86
  • Software Minor Version - 87
  • Software Release Version - 85
  • Station Ready - 71
  • Test Bolt Activated - 91
  • Tightening is Locked - 27
  • Tightening NOK - 4
  • Tightening OK - 3
  • Tool Loosening - 22
  • Tool Tightening - 21

Active Identifier String - 186

Set when an identifier string has been received and accepted by the work-task; it is necessary that even sequence or tightening program are running.
If running Source batch-string, it is set when all scans have been received and a sequence had been selected. In that case it includes concatenated string consisted of saved positions.
For other work-tasks it includes the “VIN” number.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_IDENTIFIER_STRING

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Active Identifier String 1 - 188

Signal corresponding to the first configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 1 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active.
The strings is filtered with saved position.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_1

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Active Identifier String 2 - 189

Signal corresponding to the second configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 2 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active.
The strings is filtered with saved position.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_2

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Active Identifier String 3 - 190

Signal corresponding to the third configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 3 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active.
The strings is filtered with saved position.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_3

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Active Identifier String 4 - 191

Signal corresponding to the fourth configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 4 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active.
The strings is filtered with saved position.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_4

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Batch Completed - 30

The batch counter is equal to the batch size number. Result can be OK or NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Completed NOK - 37

Batch finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Completed OK - 36

Batch finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Count - 31

Current number in the batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COUNT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Batch Running - 32

Indicates that a batch in a batch sequence is running.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_RUNNING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Completed NOK - 46

Batch sequence finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Completed OK - 45

Batch sequence finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Done - 48

Indicates when a sequence is completed, both in case Batch Sequence Completed OK and Batch Sequence Completed NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_COMPLETED

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

Event

Boolean

1

1

Invert

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Batch Sequence Running - 47

Indicates if the Batch Sequence is running or not.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCHSEQUENCE_RUNNING

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Bolt Tightening Status - 79

Name in SoftPLC: BOLT_TIGHTENING_STATUS

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

uint32 array

32

32

FordResultStatus

State

4

4

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

This signal contains subsignals, refer to Subsignals - Output for all subsignals.

Channel Hardware Status - 81

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_HARDWARE_STATUS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

uint32 array

1

64

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

This signal contains subsignals, refer to Subsignals - Output for all subsignals.

Channel Tightening Status - 80

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_TIGHTENING_STATUS

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

uint32 array

1

64

FordResultStatus

State

4

4

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

This signal contains subsignals, refer to Subsignals - Output for all subsignals.

Configuration Version - 88

Name in SoftPLC: CONFIGURATION_VERSION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Controller Switched On - 42

Set to true at start up of IO Exchange

Name in SoftPLC: IO_ON

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Current Running Batch - 180

Shows the index of the current running batch in a sequence. If socket selector is used it will show zero if none, more than one or wrong socket is selected. For source tightening it will show 1 if batch mode is used and a batch is running.

Name in SoftPLC: CURRENT_RUNNING_BATCH_IX

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Cycle Complete - 77

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_COMPLETE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Cycle NOK - 76

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Cycle OK - 75

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Cycle Running - 78

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_RUNNING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Cycle Ready To Start - 82

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_READY_TO_START

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Emergency Stop - 20036

Name in SoftPLC: EMERGENCY_STOP

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Event Code - 30001

Relay an event when it is triggered. Momentary, on for two cycle times.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_CODE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Event Code Severity - 30003

Event Code Severity is an output signal which is activated when the triggered event has severity of error or warning.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_CODE_SEVERITY

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Event Present - 161

Indicates if event is triggered. It is only triggered on accessories if event requires an ACK.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_PRESENT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus AsyncData From PF - 107

Name in SoftPLC:

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

uint8 array

48

2048

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus Disconnected - 96

Name in SoftPLC: FIELDBUS_DISCONNECTED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

From SoftPLC - 10064

Allocated bytes for data transfer from PLC to accessories.

Name in SoftPLC: FROM_PLC

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

uint8 array

8

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus:FALSE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Last Received Identifier String - 187

Set directly when an identifier has been received in the work-task.
For Source batch-string, it is set at every scanning in scan process, thus it is changed for every scanning and sent even if it does not match in length.
String set is in raw format and not only "saved positions" in the string.
For other work-tasks this signal is equal to Active Identifier String signal.

Name in SoftPLC: LAST_RECEIVED_ID_STRING

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Relevant Information
  • Active Identifier String - 186

Loosening is Locked - 28

The loosening is disabled.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Loosening NOK - 74

NOK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening OK - 70

OK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Max Consecutive NOK Reached - 35

Indicates Max coherent NOK tightening counter is reachead.

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_COHERENT_NOK_REACHED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

No System Error - 83

Name in SoftPLC: NO_SYSTEM_ERROR

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

No System Warning - 102

Name in SoftPLC: NO_SYSTEM_WARNING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Program Start - 132

Defines the starting level for a tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: PROGRAM_START

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Read Result Queue Flushed - 30006

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Received Identifier 1 - 192

Signal corresponding to the first configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 1 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 1 might not correspond to the first configured string, but to the first received string.
The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_1

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Received Identifier 2 - 193

Signal corresponding to the second configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 2 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 2 might not correspond to the second configured string, but to the second received string.
The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_2

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Received Identifier 3 - 194

Signal corresponding to the third configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 3 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 3 might not correspond to the third configured string, but to the third received string.
The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_3

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Received Identifier 4 - 195

Signal corresponding to the fourth configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 4 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 4 might not correspond to the fourth configured string, but to the fourth received string.
The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_4

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Remaining Batch - 33

Remaining tightenings in a batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: REMAINING_BATCH

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Selected Mode Id - 72

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_MODE_ID

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

1

32

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Selected Sequence Bit 0 - 139

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_0

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 1 - 140

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 2 - 141

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 3 - 142

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 4 - 143

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 5 - 144

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 6 - 145

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 7 - 146

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 8 - 147

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 9 - 163

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Id - 84

Shows the index of the selected batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_BATCH_SEQUENCE_ID

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

1

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

1

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Sequence Aborted - 160

Output signal indicating if sequence was aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: SEQUENCE_ABORTED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Service Indicator Alarm - 137

Service alarm configured in the Tool maintenance, provides a mechanism to remind the users when it is time to service the tool.

Name in SoftPLC: SERVICE_INDICATOR_ALARM

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Size of Sequence - 181

Shows the size of the currently running sequence. Only set when a sequence is loaded and not reset when sequence is done.

Name in SoftPLC: SIZE_OF_RUNNING_SEQUENCE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Software Major Version - 86

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MAJOR_VERSION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Software Minor Version - 87

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MINOR_VERSION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Software Release Version - 85

Version of the software running.

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_RELEASE_VERSION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Station Ready - 71

Indicates when the Virtual Station is ready.

Name in SoftPLC: STATION_READY

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Test Bolt Activated - 91

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_MODE_ID

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening is Locked - 27

The tightening is disabled; it is not possible to make any tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Tightening NOK - 4

At least one result of the tightening is outside the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening OK - 3

The result of the tightening is within the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Loosening - 22

Indicates that the tool is loosening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_LOOSENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Tightening - 21

Indicates that the tool is tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_TIGHTENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output Signals

  • Clear Results - 39
  • Disable Open Protocol Commands - 10060
  • External Identifier - 10045
  • External Monitored 1 - 10035
  • External Monitored 2 - 10036
  • External Monitored 3 - 10037
  • External Monitored 4 - 10038
  • External Monitored 5 - 10039
  • External Monitored 6 - 10040
  • External Monitored 7 - 10041
  • External Monitored 8 - 10042
  • Fieldbus Keep Alive - 30002
  • Generic IO 1 - 50
  • Generic IO 10 - 59
  • Generic IO 2 - 51
  • Generic IO 3 - 52
  • Generic IO 4 - 53
  • Generic IO 5 - 54
  • Generic IO 6 - 55
  • Generic IO 7 - 56
  • Generic IO 8 - 57
  • Generic IO 9 - 58
  • Generic Rising Edge 1 - 169
  • Generic Rising Edge 10 - 178
  • Generic Rising Edge 2 - 170
  • Generic Rising Edge 3 - 171
  • Generic Rising Edge 4 - 172
  • Generic Rising Edge 5 - 173
  • Generic Rising Edge 6 - 174
  • Generic Rising Edge 7 - 175
  • Generic Rising Edge 8 - 176
  • Generic Rising Edge 9 - 177

Clear Results - 39

Clears status of other signals set to next tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: CLEAR_RESULTS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Open Protocol Commands - 10060

Disables the possibility to send commands over Open Protocol to the Virtual Station.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_OPEN_PRTCOL_CMDS

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Identifier - 10045

The string sent in External identifier is included in the result as VIN number. It is possible to provide up to 2 identifiers to be passed from Fieldbus for task selection.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_IDENTIFIER

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 1 - 10035

External Monitored 1 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_1

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 2 - 10036

External Monitored 2 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_2

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 3 - 10037

External Monitored 3 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_3

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 4 - 10038

External Monitored 4 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_4

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 5 - 10039

External Monitored 5 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_5

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 6 - 10040

External Monitored 6 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_6

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 7 - 10041

External Monitored 7 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_7

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 8 - 10042

External Monitored 8 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_8

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Fieldbus Keep Alive - 30002

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Generic IO 1 - 50

Input/Output 1 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 10 - 59

Input/Output 10 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_10

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 2 - 51

Input/Output 2 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 3 - 52

Input/Output 3 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 4 - 53

Input/Output 4 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 5 - 54

Input/Output 5 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 6 - 55

Input/Output 6 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 7 - 56

Input/Output 7 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 8 - 57

Input/Output 8 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic IO 9 - 58

Input/Output 9 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 1 - 169

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 10 - 178

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_10

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 2 - 170

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 3 - 171

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 4 - 172

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 5 - 173

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 6 - 174

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 7 - 175

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 8 - 176

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 9 - 177

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Subsignals - Input

  • Inhibit No Result
  • Inhibit NOK result
  • Inhibit OK result
  • Force pset
  • Force bolt id

Inhibit No Result

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_COMMAND_NO_RESULT

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Inhibit NOK result

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_COMMAND_NOK_RESULT

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Inhibit OK result

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_COMMAND_OK_RESULT

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Force pset

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_COMMAND_FORCE_PSET

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Integer

1

8

Force bolt id

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_COMMAND_FORCE_BOLT_ID

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Integer

1

8

Subsignals - Output

  • All signals
  • Cycle running
  • Inhibited
  • In Selected Mode
  • Running repair
  • Running termination
  • Tightening running
  • Loosening running
  • Last cycle OK
  • Last cycle NOK
  • Last cycle Inhibited
  • Last cycle Not included
  • Last cycle Terminated by other
  • Last cycle Hardware error
  • Tool Led Mirror Green
  • Tool Led Mirror Yellow
  • Tool Led Mirror Red
  • Last tightening OK
  • Last tightening NOK
  • Last loosening OK
  • Last loosening NOK
  • Last cycle Timeout
  • Last cycle Torque High
  • Last cycle Torque Low
  • Last cycle Angle High
  • Last cycle Angle Low

All signals

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_ALL

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Integer

1

32

Cycle running

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_RUNNING

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Inhibited

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_INHIBITED

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

In Selected Mode

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_IN_SELECTED_MODE

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Running repair

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_REPAIR

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Running termination

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_TERMINATE

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Tightening running

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_RUNNING_TIGHTENING

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Loosening running

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_RUNNING_LOOSENING

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle OK

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_OK

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle NOK

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_NOK

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Inhibited

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_INHIBITED

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Not included

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_NOT_INCLUDED

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Terminated by other

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_TERMINATED_BY_OTHER

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Hardware error

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_HW_ERROR

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Tool Led Mirror Green

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_TOOL_LED_MIRROR_GREEN

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Tool Led Mirror Yellow

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_TOOL_LED_MIRROR_YELLOW

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Tool Led Mirror Red

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_TOOL_LED_MIRROR_RED

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last tightening OK

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_TIGHTENING_OK

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last tightening NOK

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_TIGHTENING_NOK

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last loosening OK

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_LOOSENING_OK

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last loosening NOK

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_LOOSENING_NOK

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Timeout

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_TIMEOUT

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Torque High

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_TORQUE_HIGH

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Torque Low

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_TORQUE_LOW

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Angle High

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_ANGLE_HIGH

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Last cycle Angle Low

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_STATUS_LAST_CYCLE_ANGLE_LOW

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Boolean

1

1

Soft PLC Signals

parameter ID

Name

Direction

Description

10010

Start tightening (continuous)

Input

Active signal starts tightening. Once input goes inactive the tightening must be stopped.

10016

Select input bit 0

Input

Input signal for select bit 0.

10017

Select input bit 1

Input

Input signal for select bit 1.

10018

Select input bit 2

Input

Input signal for select bit 2.

10019

Select input bit 3

Input

Input signal for select bit 3.

10020

Select input

Input

Input selected value.

10024

Tightening + start (pulse)

Input

The tightening starts at signal. Runs until the tightening is finished, or until the 30 sec timeout in tightening program occurs.

10030

Tightening/Loosening stop (pulse)

Input

If this signal is generated any ongoing tightening or loosening will be stopped. Used in combination with 10024.

10045

External Identifier

Input/Output

Provide up to 2 identifiers to be passed from Fieldbus for task selection.

10049

Disable Fieldbus

Input

Disables the fieldbus.

10066

Select input bit 4

Input

Input signal for select bit 4

10067

Select input bit 5

Input

Input signal for select bit 5

10068

Select input bit 6

Input

Input signal for select bit 6

10069

Select input bit 7

Input

Input signal for select bit 7

10070

Select input bit 8

Input

Input signal for select bit 8

10071

Select input bit 9

Input

Input signal for select bit 9

10072

Loosening start (pulse)

Input

Loosening sync mode is started when this signal goes high.

Runs until the loosening is finished, even if the Loosening Start (pulse) signal goes low.

10064

From PLC

Input

Byte array that carries information from the SoftPLC to the Accessories.

10054

Channel Command

Input

With the channel command it is possible to inhibit individual tools so they are not included in the next tightening.

10055

Enable Operation

Input

Must be set high to be able to run a tightening in a fixtured system. It is set to low during a tightening, the tightening is stopped and the status of the cycle is NOK.

10056

Reset Cycle Status

Input

When Reset Cycle Status is set to true, reset of the status of the station and all bolts will be performed.

If this signal is set during a tightening, the signal is ignored.

10057

Disable Testbolt

Input

The signal controls if the test bolt can be performed or not from external source. If the signal is True (high), it is not possible to perform test bolt from an external source.

10062

Reset System Error

Input

If this input is set to high, the system will try to reset any hardware errors.

82

Cycle Ready to Start

Output

The signal is set high when the system is ready to start a tightening. The system is ready if the following conditions are fulfilled:

  • Input Enable Station is set to true

  • No emergency stop is activated

  • No machine stop

  • A valid mode is selected

  • No ongoing tightening and loosening is running

  • No channels in the selected mode have any hardware errors

  • All channels are available

78

Cycle Running

Output

Set high while the system is running a tightening.

77

Cycle Complete

Output

Set high when the running cycle is completed and the data is stored persistently.

75

Cycle OK

Output

Set high if the last tightening was OK and is cleared when the start signal is received.

76

Cycle NOK

Output

Set high if the last tightening was NOK and is cleared when the start signal is received.

83

No System Error

Output

The No System Error is set to true if there are no hardware errors in the system.

91

Testbolt Activated

Output

Testbolt Activated is used to display if test tightening is enabled.

20036

Emergency Stop

Output

Set high if the system is emergency stopped.

42

IO ON

Output

Controller switched On.

96

Fiedbus Disconnected

Output

Fieldbus Disconnected will be set to True when fieldbus disconnects.

102

No System Warning

Output

No System Warning is set High if any of the tools report “time for service” or “time for calibration”.

100

Identifier Received

Output

Identifier received is used to indicate that a new identifier has been received.

72

Selected Mode ID

Output

Selected Mode ID mirrors the Input Mode Value if the mode is valid. If the mode is invalid or no mode is selected, "0" will be sent.

79

Bolt Tightening Status

Output

Status for individual bolts in a synchronized tightening. 100 bolts are supported.

80

Channel Tightening Status

Output

Status for individual channels in a synchronized tightening. 64 channels are supported.

81

Channel Hardware Status

Output

Hardware status for individual channels.

85

Software Release Version

Output

Release version of the software running in the controller.

86

Software Major Version

Output

Major version of the software running in the controller.

87

Software Minor Version

Output

Minor version of the software running in the controller.

88

Configuration Version

Output

Version of the configuration currently used in the controller.

10065

To PLC

Output

Byte array that carries information from the accessories to the SoftPLC.

Acyclic Result Items

This is a list of result items that can be sent as acyclic data.

Acyclic result items

Batch size

Batch sequence counter

Batch sequence current status

Batch current status

Batch count

Batch sequence name

Batch sequence index

Total status additional info

Mode name

Status

Tightening Program name

Status

Operation mode

Status info

Stopping error

Bolt number

Final torque

Elapsed time

Bolt name

Channel

Failing Step

Torque low limit

Torque high limit

Final angle

Angle low limit

Angle high limit

Target angle

Target torque

Start final angle

Tool article number

Tool serial number

Compact error

Final angle

Torque difference

Angle difference

Maximum Time Limit

Date and time

VIN

Shut Off Torque

Measured Post Thread Cut Angle

Measured Post Thread Cut Peak Torque

Torque rate

Torque rate deviation

Low torque in angle window

Post view average torque high

Angle at post view torque high

Stick Slip Detection -Measured number of oscillations

Shut off current

Post view average torque low

Angle at post view torque low

Yield angle

Prevailing torque

Monitor time

Peak Torque

Angle

Peak torque in angle window

Peak Torque - Low Limit

Shut-off Torque - Low Limit

Peak Torque - High Limit

Shut-off Torque - High Limit

Torque Rate and Deviation - Torque Rate Low Limit

Torque Rate and Deviation - Torque Rate High Limit

Torque Rate and Deviation - Deviation Limit

Torque in Angle Window - High Limit

Torque in Angle Window - Low Limit

Post View Torque High - High Limit

Post View Torque Low - Low Limit

Shut-off Current - Low Limit

Angle from Yield - High Limit

Angle from Yield - Low Limit

Shut-off Current - High Limit

Time - Low Limit

Prevailing Torque - High Limit

Prevailing Torque - Low Limit

Time - High Limit

Elapsed time

Cross Thread

Maximum Time - High Limit

Cross Thread - Minimum Limit

Cross Thread - Maximum Limit

Overall Status Additional Information

On the multiple level and the overall level for each bolt there is a field called Overall Status Additional Information . The possible parameters for this field are described in the table below:

Parameter

Comment

Repaired

The total status of the tightening is OK, but at least one error that was repaired occurred during the tightening.

Terminated By Reject Management

The bolt did not have any errors of its own but was ordered to terminate due to an error on another bolt.

Reject Management Termination Failed

The bolt was ordered to terminate and an error occurred while executing the termination path.

Stopped

The tightening was ended due to a stop signal from the outside, for example Machine stop sent through fieldbus or if the tool trigger was released.

Emergency Stopped

The tightening was ended due to emergency stop.

Tool Error

The tightening was ended due to a hardware error in the tool.

Drive Error

The tightening was ended due to a hardware error in the drive.

Inhibited

The device was not allowed to run, since outside signal blocked it.

InvalidPset

The controller has loaded an invalid tightening program.

PreStartCheckFailed

The preStartCheck state of Controller failed, it can be many reasons, such as tool errors, emergencyStop is active and the system received a stop signal and so on.

Reject Management Repair Failed

The bolt was ordered to repair and an error occurred while executing the repair path.

File Formats For Export and Import

Export and import of controller configurations and results can be done from different places in the ToolsTalk 2 application. An export can also result in different file content.

  • Export tightening results and events for further processing.

  • Export log files for debug assistance from an Atlas Copco service engineer.

  • Export controller configuration that can be used to copy settings to another controller.

An export of controller data can vary between controller type and between controller software version. For a detailed description of the file format and the file content, please refer to the documentation for each controller and version.

The tables provide a summary of the ToolsTalk 2 exports.

Export/import

Location

Path

File type and format

Usage

Controller library configuration

*.json

Export of controller configurations and to create controller templates.

Used inside ToolsTalk 2.

Fieldbus configuration

*.json

Export of fieldbus configurations. Used to copy configurations. Used together with the import command.

Used inside ToolsTalk 2.

Controller software and data management

*.tar.gz

Used to make a complete export of controller results and configurations from a controller. It is also possible to export Tool logs.

Can be used to make imports of configurations and parameters of a previously exported file.

Scheduled controller export and import

*.tar.gz

Used to make a complete scheduled export of controller results and configurations from a controller.

Can be used to make scheduled imports of configurations and parameters of a previously exported file.

Controller export and import

*.tar.gz

Used to make a complete scheduled export of controller results and configurations from a controller.

Can also be used to make scheduled imports of configurations and parameters of a previously exported file.

Used as an alternative route if user rights prevent access to the global icons.

Result export

*.csv

Used to only export tightening results from the controller

Controller software

*px2it.zip

Load new controller software.

Export locations and formats

File type and format

Usage

*.json

A file format used within the ToolsTalk 2.

The files can be used to copy configurations and parameter settings.

The file format can not be used by the ToolsTalk 2 application.

*.tar.gz

Used to make a complete export of controller results and configurations from a controller.

The file format can not be used by the controller. The file can contain the following modules:

  • A folder with configurations and parameters, that is used by a subsequent import.

  • Several log and data files. Only used by Atlas Copco for debug information in case of error.

  • *_events.csv. A result file listing the controller events.

  • *_results.csv. A result file listing the controller tightening results.

*.csv

Used to only export tightening results or events from the controller.

This file is included in the *.tar.gz file.

The csv files uses different characters to separate the fields depending on the language setting in the controller.

The fields can vary between controller software versions.

*px2it.zip

Only used to load controller software. Does not contain any configurations or parameter settings.

Printing Scenarios

Printing done at the station

Use this when the programs to print are on a controller and your have access to an Atlas Copco PC with TT2 standalone version installed. Printing a program while at the station by connecting to the Flex controller:

  1. Select the tightening program and open it to view.

  2. Use the print button at the upper right of the software to print the program. (Note for Windows 10 machines, when you use print option in TT2, there is an option available called “Microsoft print to pdf” by default. In earlier version, this option can be added either installing Adobe acrobat or installing Foxit PDF reader on older Windows machines).

Printing with PF6 FlexSystem with an active (online) Flex controller

Use this when the programs to print are in an exported xxx.tar.gz file from a controller that you have no longer access to. Printing a program using a tar.gz file exported from a system:

  1. Connect to any PF6 Flex controller.

  2. Export the current configuration (original configuration) from the controller. This is done to back up the existing system in order to be able to restore it at the end.

  3. Import the configuration file that contains the tightening programs to print, into this controller.

  4. Open and print the tightening programs as stated in the steps in Printing done at the station.

  5. Import the original configuration saved in step 2 to return the controller to its original state.

Printing with PF6 FlexSystem with an inactive (offline) PF6 FlexSystem

This provides the easiest way to print a file (xxx.json file) without being in front of a system.

A .json file is created as a result of an export of a configuration from an offline controller (library).

  1. Import the .json file to the library.

  2. Open the configuration from the .json file in the library.

  3. Open and print the tightening programs.

Converting between tar.gz and .json

A configuration can be moved between a connected controller and an offline controller; from XXX.tar.gz to XXX.json and vice versa.

Prerequisites:

  • Flex controller

  • TT2 Installation

To convert a .tar.gz file to a .json file:

  1. Follow steps 1-3 in Printing with PF6 FlexSystem with an active (online) Flex controller.

  2. Right-click on the controller name in the left column and “add to library”.

  3. Go to library and find the controller name that was added to library as an offline controller.

  4. Select the controller check box – manage – export a .json file.

To convert a .json file to a .tar.gz file:

  1. Follow steps 1-2 in Printing with PF6 FlexSystem with an inactive (offline) Flex controller.

  2. Select the controller check box – manage – distribute. This will pop up a list of checkbox items that you want to distribute to the connected controller. Check what is relevant and select Distribute.

  3. Open the plant structure – controller, and export to get a xxx.tar.gz file.

System Information

Issue

Solution

Installation files

C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk Client

C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk Server

C:\Program Files (x86)\Atlas Copco\ToolsTalk Station Setup

Log file from the installation

In each installation folder is a log file named log.txt.

Computer IP address

Information needed for the controller configuration.

Select the Windows start menu.

Type cmd in the box in the bottom of the window and hit <return>. The administrator window opens.

Type ipconfig and hit <return>. The IP address of the computer is displayed.

Computer name

Information needed for the client installation to point to correct server installation.

Select the Windows start menu.

Type or system information in the box in the bottom of the window and hit <return>. The system information window opens.

The system name parameter is needed in the client installation to point to the location of the server.

Deleting database catalog

Start the management studio of the selected SQL server.

Select the desired database catalog. The default name is ToolsTalkEventStore.

Right-click and select Delete.

Select the check box Delete backup and .......

Select the check box Close existing .......

Select OK.

Check and modify database authentication

Start the management studio of the selected SQL server.

Select the desired server.

Right-click and select Properties.

Select Security page.

In the server authentication field, mark the radio button labeled SQL server and windows authentication.

Installation of the Functionality Management System (FMS)

Only applicable in a client-server installation.

The FMS installation is part of the InstallShield Wizard and runs automatically. For correct installation the system variable JAVA_HOME must have a correct value.

Select the Windows start menu.

Type System variables in the box in the bottom of the window. Several options are shown. Select Edit the system environmental variables. The system properties pop-up window opens.

Select the Environment variables command button.

Scroll down in the System variables window and search for the variable JAVA_HOME.

If the variable is present, the value is the path to the 64-bit Java installation.

If the variable is not present, select the New command button. A New system variable pop-up window opens.

The variable name must be set to JAVA_HOME.

The variable value must be set to the installation directory, i.e. C:\PROGRAM FILES\JAVA\JRE1.8.0_131. Do not include the BIN folder.

Check if the installation of the Functionality Management System (FMS) is correct.

Select the Windows start menu.

Type Services in the box in the bottom of the window. Several options are shown. Select Services. The system properties pop-up window opens.

Scroll down in the list and search for FlexNet License Server -acopco.

If the Status indicates Started, the FMS is installed and is running.

Check if the ToolsTalk 2 server is installed and is running

Select the Windows start menu.

Type Services in the box in the bottom of the window. Several options are shown. Select Services. The system properties pop-up window opens.

Scroll down in the list and search for Atlas Copco Industrial Technique Host for ToolsTalk.

If the Status indicates Started, the server is installed and is running.

ToolsTalk 2 FLEX | 2.14

Published: 2021-03-09

© Atlas Copco Industrial Technique AB, 2021 | Legal Notice